Mitsubishi Electric Sanda Works NR207UHD Multimedia Car Radio User Manual

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Multimedia Car Radio

user manual

COMAND OnlineSupplementNur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
SymbolsIn this Owner's Manual, you will find the fol-lowing symbols:GWARNINGWarning notices draw your attention to haz-ards that may endanger your health or life, orthe health or life of others.HEnvironmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.iThese symbols indicate useful instruc-tions or further information that could behelpful to you.XThis symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.XSeveral consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find further information on atopic.YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.Display This text indicates a message onthe multifunction/COMAND dis-play.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzFirst of all, familiarise yourself with yourCOMAND Online. Read this Supplement, par-ticularly the safety and warning notes, beforeyou drive off.This will help you to obtain the maximumpleasure from your COMAND Online andavoid endangering yourself and others.The equipment level and functions of yourCOMAND Online may differ depending on:RModelROrderRCountry variantRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art .Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.Please consult a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre should you have any questions.The Owner's Manual and all supplements areintegral parts of the vehicle. You shouldalways keep it in the vehicle and pass it on tothe new owner if you sell the vehicle.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.1725845481Z102 É1725845481Z102dËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4Operating safety ................................. 15At a glance ........................................... 19System settings .................................. 43Vehicle functions ................................ 51Navigation ........................................... 61Telephone .......................................... 129Online and Internet functions .......... 169Audio .................................................. 207Video .................................................. 249Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 269Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...360° cameraDisplaying images ............................ 58Switching on/off .............................. 58AAccess data of the mobile phonenetwork providerDeleting ......................................... 178Editing ........................................... 177Making entries ............................... 175Selecting ........................................ 173Active partition (USB mass storagedevices only)Selecting ........................................ 224Address bookBrowsing ........................................ 155Calling up ....................................... 155Changing an entry .......................... 157Connecting a call ........................... 158Creating an entry ........................... 156Deleting an entry ........................... 156Deleting contacts ........................... 161Details about an entry ................... 157Entering characters ......................... 34Entry as a home address ............... 107Hiding contact details .................... 162Importing contacts ........................ 160Introduction ................................... 154Receiving vCards ........................... 161Searching for an entry ................... 156Starting route guidance ................. 158Voice tag ....................................... 159Address entry menu ............................ 65Adjusting the balance ......................... 31Adjusting the bass .............................. 31Adjusting the brightness (TV, video) 250Adjusting the colour (TV, video) ...... 250Adjusting the contrast (TV, video) ... 250Adjusting the sound settingsBalance ............................................ 31Treble and bass ............................... 31Adjusting the treble (sound) .............. 31Adjusting the volumeCOMAND ......................................... 30Navigation messages ....................... 30Traffic announcements .................... 30Alternative route ................................. 97AudioRadio mode ................................... 208Audio CD/DVD or MP3 modeSwitching to (Rear Seat Entertain-ment System) ................................ 280Audio DVDPause function ............................... 220Playback options ........................... 225Safety notes .................................. 214Setting the audio format ................ 224Stop function ................................. 220Switching to ................................... 218Audio menu (COMAND Online) ......... 208AUX (audio)Notes/socket ................................ 247Switching to ................................... 247AUX (video)Connecting an external videosource ............................................ 265Setting the volume and sound ....... 266Showing/hiding the menu ............. 266Switching to ................................... 266AUX jacksCD/DVD drive ............................... 272Avoiding an area ................................ 120BBack button ......................................... 27Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 113Bluetooth®Activating/deactivating ................... 46Activating audio mode ................... 238Conditions (telephone) .................. 132Connecting another mobile phone . 136Connecting audio devices .............. 235Device list ...................................... 235Entering the passcode ................... 134External authorisation .................... 135General information ......................... 46Interface ........................................ 130Introduction ................................... 130Reconnecting an audio device ....... 2374Index
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 133Settings ........................................... 46Telephone basic menu ................... 137Telephony ...................................... 132Telephony notes ............................ 130Bluetooth® audio basic display ........ 238Buttons on the COMAND controller ... 27CCallAccepting/ending/rejecting .......... 139Connecting .................................... 140see Telephone Call listDisplay details ............................... 149Call listsDeleting ......................................... 150Opening and selecting an entry ..... 148Saving an entry in the addressbook .............................................. 149Category list (music search) ............ 227CDCopy protection ............................. 227Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222General information ....................... 227Inserting ........................................ 214Inserting/loading (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 279Multisession .................................. 225Notes on compact discs ................ 227Pause function ............................... 219Player/changer operation(COMAND) ..................................... 214Removing/ejecting (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 279Safety notes .................................. 214Selecting a media type .................. 220Selecting a track ............................ 221Sound settings (balance, bass,treble) .............................................. 31Switching to ................................... 218CD/DVDEjecting (DVD drive) ....................... 216Ejecting (DVD single drive) ............ 215Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 215Inserting (DVD single drive) ........... 215CD modePlayback options ........................... 225Changing directionAnnouncement phase ...................... 91Change of direction phase ............... 91Preparation phase ............................ 91Changing the character set ................ 38Changing the picture format (TV,video) .................................................. 250CharacterChanging the character set .............. 36Changing the language .................... 35Deleting ........................................... 36Moving the cursor ............................ 36Switching to letters .......................... 35CharactersEntering ........................................... 37Entering (address book, phonebook) ............................................... 34Entering (navigation) ........................ 36COMAND controller ............................. 27COMAND control panel ....................... 25COMAND displayCleaning instructions ....................... 24Setting ............................................. 44Switching on/off .............................. 24COMAND OnlineActive multicontour seat .................. 54Basic functions ................................ 29Calling up drive status regulator(ABC) ............................................... 54Display ............................................. 20Emergency call system displays .... 167Examples of operation ..................... 27Importing POIs ............................... 185Menu overview ................................. 22Multicontour seat ............................ 54Seat functions .................................. 54Settings ......................................... 205Switching on/off .............................. 29COMAND Online and Internetsee Online and Internet functions Compass function ............................. 122Connecting a USB device ................. 218ContactsDeleting ......................................... 161Importing ....................................... 160Index 5
Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 227Country-specific information (nav-igation) ............................................... 123DDAB radio (Digital Audio Broad-casting)Selecting a station ......................... 210see Radio Data carrierAudio DVD ..................................... 225MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 230Delete button ....................................... 28DestinationAssigning a destination to anaddress book entry ........................ 109Destination (navigation)Displaying information ..................... 98Entering a destination by address .... 65Entering a destination using themap ................................................. 73Entering a POI .................................. 78Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 73Entering using Mercedes-BenzApps ................................................ 74Saving ............................................ 108Selecting from the destinationmemory ........................................... 71Selecting from the list of last des-tinations ........................................... 72Selecting storage options .............. 109Storing after destination entry ....... 108Storing during route guidance ....... 108Destination memory (navigation)Deleting an entry ........................... 110Entering/saving your homeaddress ............................................ 69Previous destinations .................... 111Dialling a number (telephone) .......... 140Digital teletext (MHEG-5) .................. 257Digital TV channelsProgramme preview ....................... 254DiscCD/DVD ........................................ 227MP3 ............................................... 225DISC buttonActivating audio CD/DVD or MP3mode ............................................. 218Activating Bluetooth® Audio .......... 239Switching on the Media Interface .. 242Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER 231DisplaySelecting the design ........................ 44Displaying the arrival time ................. 98Displaying the distance to the des-tination ................................................. 98Displaying the track and album ....... 224Dolby® Digital ...................................... 32DTMF tone transmission .................. 141DVDCopy protection ............................. 227Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222Inserting ........................................ 214Inserting/loading (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 279Notes on discs ............................... 227Removing/ejecting (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 279Selecting a media type .................. 220Selecting a track ............................ 221Sound settings (balance, bass,treble) .............................................. 31DVD videoRear Seat Entertainment System ... 288Dynamic route guidance/TMCDisplaying traffic reports ............... 104Displays on the map ...................... 103Introduction ................................... 103Switching on/off ........................... 103EEmergency call 999 or 112 .............. 131Entering a junction name ................... 69Entering an address (example) .......... 65Entering a street name ....................... 66Entering the house number ................ 66Entering the town ................................ 66EntryDeleting ........................................... 38Saving .............................................. 356Index
Example displayAudio CD mode .............................. 219MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 230FFactory setting (reset function) ......... 49Fast forwardAudio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 222Video DVD ..................................... 262Fast rewindAudio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 222Video DVD ..................................... 262Favourites (Internet) ......................... 202Favourites button ................................ 47FrequencyAdjusting for radio stations ............ 211FuelDisplaying consumption ................... 52GGoogle™ local searchImporting a destination/route ....... 181Popular searches ........................... 182Search ........................................... 180Search history ............................... 182Selecting a search position ............ 180Using as the destination ................ 181GPS reception ...................................... 62Gracenote® Media Database ............ 222HHands-free microphone, switchingon/off ................................................. 141Harman/kardon® Logic 7® sur-round sound systemsee Surround sound (harman/kardon® surround sound system) Heading up (navigation) ................... 113HeadphonesChanging batteries ........................ 274Home addressEntering and saving ......................... 69Selecting from the destinationmemory ........................................... 71IIndicator lampRemote control .............................. 274Interface (USB, iPod®)see Media Interface InternetCalling up the carousel view .......... 197Conditions for access .................... 170Creating a favourite ....................... 202Entering the URL ............................ 197Favourites manager ....................... 202Favourites menu ............................ 203Menu functions .............................. 200Opening favourites ......................... 201Selecting/setting access data ....... 171Selecting favourites ....................... 198Internet radioCalling up ....................................... 196Searching for stations .................... 196iPod®Alphabetic track selection ............. 245Connecting to Media Interface ...... 241Selecting a category/playlist ......... 244iTunes® ............................................... 245LLane recommendationsExplanation ...................................... 93Presentation .................................... 93LINGUATRONICSettings ........................................... 46List of access dataNew provider ................................. 175List of mobile phone network pro-vidersCalling up ....................................... 171Empty ............................................ 171With the selected provider ............. 173Load/eject button ............................. 215Lumbar supportAdjusting (COMAND Online) ............ 55Index 7
MMap (navigation)Adjusting the scale ........................ 111Arrival time/distance to the des-tination .......................................... 114City model ..................................... 116Geo-coordinate display .................. 114Heading ......................................... 113Information in the display .............. 114Map settings .................................. 113Moving ........................................... 112North orientation ........................... 113Notes ............................................. 111POI symbols ................................... 113RDS-TMC displays ......................... 103Road display .................................. 114Saving the crosshair position ......... 112Showing the map data version ....... 123Topographical map ........................ 116Updating ........................................ 124Updating process ........................... 124Media InterfaceAlphabetical track selection .......... 245Basic menu .................................... 242Connecting an external audiosource ............................................ 241Connecting an external videosource ............................................ 265Connection options ....................... 240iPod® ............................................. 240Mode ............................................. 240MP3 player .................................... 241Notes for the MP3 player ............... 246Playback options ........................... 246Selecting categories ...................... 244Selecting folders ............................ 244Selecting music files ...................... 243Selecting playlists .......................... 244Switching on .................................. 242USB mass storage device .............. 240Media list ........................................... 220Mercedes-Benz Contact .................... 163Mercedes-Benz emergency callsystemAutomatic emergency call ............. 165Conditions ..................................... 165Displays in the COMAND display ... 167Manual emergency call .................. 166Overview ........................................ 164Service availability in Europe ......... 164Transmitted data ........................... 167Microphone, switching on/off ......... 141Mobile phoneAuthorising .................................... 134Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) . 132De-authorising ............................... 136External authorisation .................... 135Registering (authorising) ................ 134Motorway information ...................... 116MP3Bit/sampling rates ......................... 226Copyright ....................................... 226Disc ............................................... 225Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 222File systems ................................... 225Formats ......................................... 226Notes ............................................. 225Pause function ............................... 219Playback options ........................... 225Safety notes .................................. 214Selecting a media type .................. 220Selecting a track ............................ 221Sound settings (balance, bass,treble) .............................................. 31Switching to ................................... 218Multifunction steering wheelAdjusting the volume ....................... 30Selecting a TV channel .................. 252Multisession CD ................................ 225MUSIC REGISTERCopying music data ....................... 231Deleting all music files ................... 232Deleting individual music files ....... 234General notes ................................ 230Memory space info ........................ 233Playback options ........................... 234Switching on .................................. 230Music search ..................................... 227My address ........................................ 1068Index
NNavigationAdjusting the volume of the navi-gation announcements .................... 30Alternative route .............................. 97Avoiding an area ............................ 120Basic settings .................................. 64Blocking a route section affectedby a traffic jam ................................. 96Compass function .......................... 122Destination memory ...................... 106Displaying destination informa-tion (arrival time, distance to des-tination) ........................................... 98Dynamic route guidance/TMC ....... 103Entering/saving your homeaddress ............................................ 69Entering a destination ...................... 65Entering a destination by address .... 65Entering a destination using themap ................................................. 73Entering a POI .................................. 78Entering characters (character bar) . 36General notes .................................. 62GPS reception .................................. 62Important safety notes .................... 62Lane recommendation ..................... 93List of areas ................................... 121Map settings .................................. 111Motorway information ................... 116Off-road/off-map (off-road desti-nation) ........................................... 102Previous destinations .................... 110Repeating announcements .............. 95Route guidance ................................ 90Selecting a destination from thedestination memory ......................... 71Selecting a destination from thelist of last destinations ..................... 72Selecting your home address ........... 71Setting options for destination/route download .............................. 194Setting route options (avoiding:motorways, toll roads, tunnels,ferries) ............................................. 64Setting the route type (shortroute, fast route, dynamic route oreconomic route) ............................... 64Showing/hiding the menu ............... 63Starting route calculation ................ 68Switching announcements on/off ... 95Switching on .................................... 63Navigation announcementsSwitching off .................................... 30Night View Assist PlusShowing the image on theCOMAND display ............................. 58North orientation (navigation) ......... 113OOff-map .............................................. 102Off-road .............................................. 102Online and Internet functionsEnding the connection ................... 179Establishing/ending the connec-tion ................................................ 178Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 195Manually setting the access dataof the mobile phone network pro-vider .............................................. 175Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 195Options menu ................................ 191Resetting adjustments ................... 195Selecting options for the localsearch ............................................ 191Selecting options for the weatherdisplay ........................................... 192Selecting the access data of themobile phone network provider ..... 173Setting options for destination/route download .............................. 194Specifying the ID for the download 194PPause functionAudio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 219Video DVD ..................................... 262Personal POIsAcoustic notification ........................ 84Calling up the menu ......................... 83Index 9
Personal special destinationSelecting as the destination ............. 86Personal special destinationsDisplaying on the map ..................... 83Managing categories ........................ 84Saving .............................................. 85Settings ........................................... 83Visual information ............................ 83Phone bookAdding a number to an addressbook entry ..................................... 147Calling up ....................................... 144Creating a new entry ..................... 147Deleting an entry ........................... 146Entering characters ......................... 34Searching for an entry ................... 145Symbol overview ............................ 145Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 250Picture viewerDisplaying pictures ........................ 267Introduction ................................... 266Playback optionsAudio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 225POI (navigation)Category .......................................... 80Defining the position for the POIsearch .............................................. 79Entering ........................................... 78Entering a POI using the map ........... 82List ................................................... 80POI iconSetting ........................................... 113POIs (navigation)see Personal POIs Previous destinations (navigation) .. 110RRadioAlphabetical browser ..................... 210Overview ........................................ 208RDS (Radio Data System) .............. 212Setting a station ............................ 210Sound settings (balance, bass,treble) .............................................. 31Storing stations ............................. 212Switching on .................................. 208Switching wavebands .................... 209Traffic Programme ......................... 213Radio stationStoring ........................................... 212RDS (Radio Data System)General notes ................................ 212Switching on/off ........................... 213Read-aloud functionAutomatic ...................................... 106Rear-compartment screens .............. 271Rear Seat EntertainmentActive COMAND source ................. 292Adjusting sound settings ............... 276Adjusting the brightness ................ 277Adjusting the colour ...................... 277Adjusting the contrast ................... 277AUX mode ...................................... 295CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 279Changing the batteries .................. 274Changing the picture format .......... 277Cordless headphones .................... 273Multiple users ................................ 276Operating with the headphones ..... 276Picture settings .............................. 277System settings ............................. 278TV mode ........................................ 283Using the main loudspeaker .......... 276Video DVD mode ........................... 288Receiving vCards ............................... 161Redialling (telephone) ....................... 140Remote controlButton lighting ............................... 272Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 271Reset function ..................................... 49Resetting (factory settings) ............... 49Reversing cameraDisplaying the image ........................ 57RouteEstimated time of arrival .................. 98Route (navigation)Calling up the "Routes" menu ........ 100Displaying the distance to the des-tination ............................................ 98Recording ........................................ 99Route overview ................................ 98Selecting an alternative route .......... 9710 Index
Setting route options (avoiding:motorways, toll roads, tunnels,ferries) ............................................. 64Setting the route type (shortroute, fast route, dynamic route oreconomic route) ............................... 64Starting calculation .......................... 68Route display ....................................... 99Route guidanceCancel ............................................. 96Continue .......................................... 96Destination reached ......................... 96General information ......................... 90Lane recommendations ................... 93Off-road ......................................... 102SSafety notesAudio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 214Using the telephone ....................... 130Video DVD mode ........................... 259Saving the crosshair position .......... 112ScreenSelecting for remote operation ...... 271SD memory cardEjecting .......................................... 218Inserting ........................................ 217SeatActive multicontour seat .................. 54Balance (seat heating) ..................... 56Resetting adjustments ..................... 57Seat functions (COMAND Online) .... 54Selecting for adjustment(COMAND Online) ............................ 54SeatsAdjusting lumbar support(COMAND Online) ............................ 55Multicontour seat ............................ 54Selecting channelsTV .................................................. 252Selecting the country .......................... 66SettingsBasic TV settings ........................... 255Menu overview ................................. 22Picture (COMAND) ......................... 250Sound settings ................................. 31Setting the audio formatAudio DVD ..................................... 224Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 292Video DVD ..................................... 264Setting the date format ...................... 45Setting the day design ........................ 44Setting the languageCOMAND ......................................... 47Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 292Setting the night design ..................... 44Setting the read-aloud speed ............. 46Setting the reception region (TV)Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 287Setting the volumeTelephone calls ................................ 30Video-AUX ..................................... 266SoundSwitching on/off .............................. 29Sound menu ......................................... 31Sound Modus ....................................... 33Sound settingsCalling up the sound menu .............. 31Surround sound ............................... 32Special destination listWith character bar ........................... 81Speed dial listStoring a phone book entry in thespeed dial list ................................ 150SPLITVIEW ............................................ 39Station list ......................................... 210Station pre-sets ................................. 211Station search ................................... 211Stop functionAudio DVD ..................................... 220Video DVD ..................................... 262Storing channelsTV .................................................. 254Storing stationsRadio ............................................. 212Street View .......................................... 74Surround sound ................................... 32Surround sound (harman/kar-don® surround sound system)Notes ............................................... 32Switching on/off .............................. 32Switching between summer andstandard time ...................................... 45Index 11
Switching wavelength (radio) .......... 209System settingsBluetooth® ....................................... 46Date ................................................. 44Language ......................................... 47LINGUATRONIC (voice control) ........ 46Text reader speed ............................ 46Time ................................................. 44Time zone ........................................ 45TTelephoneAccepting/ending call ................... 139Accepting or rejecting a waitingcall ................................................. 142Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30Automatically reconnectingmobile phone ................................. 136Calling (outgoing call) .................... 140Conference connection .................. 143Connecting a Mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 132Deregistering (de-authorising) amobile phone ................................. 136Ending an active call ...................... 143Entering a number ......................... 140Entering phone numbers ................ 140External authorisation (Bluetooth®) 135Function restrictions ...................... 131General notes ................................ 130Incoming call ................................. 139Making a call ................................. 142Making a call via speed dial ........... 140Operating options .......................... 131Overview of functions .................... 141Reception and transmission vol-ume ............................................... 138Rejecting a call .............................. 139Safety notes .................................. 130Sending DTMF tones ...................... 141Single call ...................................... 141Switching hands-free microphoneon/off ............................................ 141Text message (SMS) ...................... 152Toggling ......................................... 143Using the telephone ....................... 139see Bluetooth® Telephone basic menuBluetooth® interface ...................... 137Telephone modeRedialling ....................................... 140Telephone numberEntering ......................................... 140TeletextTV (Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem) ............................................... 288Teletext (TV) ...................................... 256Text message (SMS)Call sender .................................... 154Deleting ......................................... 154Inbox .............................................. 152Reading .......................................... 153Reading aloud ................................ 153Storing sender in address book ..... 154Storing the sender as a newaddress book entry ........................ 154Text messages (SMS)Notes and requirements ................ 152TimeSetting ............................................. 46Setting summer/standard time ....... 45Setting the format ............................ 45Setting the time ............................... 44Setting the time/date format .......... 45Setting the time manually ................ 44Setting the time zone ....................... 45TMC (Traffic Message Channel)Displays on the map ...................... 103Switching dynamic route guid-ance on/off ................................... 103Tone settingsBalance and fader ............................ 31TrackSelecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 221Selecting using the number keypad 221Track information .............................. 283Traffic Announcement (TA)Interrupting .................................... 213Notes ............................................. 213Switching on/off ........................... 213Traffic jam function ............................. 9612 Index
Traffic jam iconShowing on route ........................... 104Traffic jam messageReading out on route ..................... 106Traffic jamsShowing in the map ....................... 103Traffic Message Channelsee TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Traffic messagessee Dynamic route guidance/TMC Traffic Programme (TA)Switching off .................................... 30Traffic reportsReading out on route ..................... 106Real-time traffic news .................... 105Showing in the map ....................... 103Showing on route ........................... 104Traffic symbol information ............. 104Traffic Sign AssistCOMAND display ........................... 118Display on the map ........................ 119Switching on/off ........................... 118Travel guideActivating/deactivating data ........... 87Calling up ......................................... 88Choosing topics ............................... 89Exploring a destination or route ....... 90Selecting a destination or route onthe map ........................................... 89ViaMichelin ...................................... 87True Image™ ........................................ 33TVAlphabetical browser ..................... 254Automatic picture shutoff .............. 250Digital teletext (MHEG-5) ............... 257Fixing a channel ............................. 255Further options .............................. 258Information about the current pro-gramme ......................................... 254Picture settings .............................. 250Programme preview ....................... 254Reception quality ........................... 251Selecting channels (COMANDOnline) ........................................... 252Selecting channels (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 284Selecting language and subtitles ... 258Setting the reception region .......... 256Showing/hiding the menu ............. 252Showing/hiding the navigationmenu ............................................. 251Sound settings (balance, bass,treble) .............................................. 31Storing channels (COMAND Online) 254Storing channels (Rear SeatEntertainment System) .................. 286Switching on .................................. 251Teletext .......................................... 256UUpdating the digital map .................. 124USBsee Media Interface VVehicleData acquisition ............................... 16Videosee Video DVD Video-AUXSetting the picture ......................... 250Video DVDAutomatic picture shutoff .............. 250Data carrier .................................... 259DVD menu ..................................... 263Fast forward/rewind ...................... 262Function restrictions ...................... 260Interactive content ........................ 265Operation ....................................... 259Pause function ............................... 262Playing conditions .......................... 260Safety notes .................................. 259Selecting ........................................ 263Selecting a film/title ...................... 263Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 262Setting the audio format ................ 264Setting the language ...................... 264Setting the picture ......................... 250Showing/hiding the menu ............. 261Showing/hiding the navigationmenu ............................................. 261Stop function ................................. 262Subtitles ........................................ 265Switching on .................................. 260Index 13
WWaypointsAccepting waypoints for the route ... 77Creating ........................................... 75Editing .............................................. 76Entering ........................................... 75Searching for a filling station whenthe fuel level is low .......................... 77Weather display (COMANDOnline)Calling up the weather map ........... 189Information chart ........................... 186Selecting locations in the informa-tion chart ....................................... 187Selecting the location .................... 187Selecting the location in theweather map .................................. 189Switching off .................................. 186Switching on .................................. 186Weather map (COMAND Online)Legend ........................................... 190Showing/hiding the menu ............. 189Switching to the weather informa-tion display .................................... 189WebsiteAdding to favourites ....................... 20114 Index
Important safety notesGWARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating COMAND Online.COMAND Online calculates the route to thedestination without taking account of the fol-lowing, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and give way signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsCOMAND Online may give incorrect drivingrecommendations if the data on the digitalmap does not correspond to the actual con-ditions. For example, a route may have beendiverted or the direction of a one-way streetmay have changed.For this reason, you must always observeroad and traffic rules and regulations duringyour journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-ulations always have priority over the sys-tem's driving recommendations.Bear in mind that, at a speed of only50 km/h, your vehicle covers a distance ofnearly 14 m per second.Declarations of conformityWireless vehicle componentsThe following information applies to all com-ponents of the vehicle and the COMANDOnline system which receive and/or transmitradio waves:The components of this vehicle which receiveand/or transmit radio waves are compliantwith the basic requirements and other rele-vant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Youcan obtain further information from aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Electromagnetic compatibilityThe electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi-cle components has been checked and certi-fied according to the currently valid versionof Directive ECE-R 10.Correct useObserve the following information when usingCOMAND Online:Rthe safety notes in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehiclesiImproper work on electronic componentsor other systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer)and their software may result in malfunc-tion or failure. Even systems that have notbeen modified could be affected becausethe electronic systems are connected.Electronic malfunctions can seriously jeop-ardise the operational safety of your vehi-cle.iThe functionality of a roof aerial (tele-phone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carriersystems are used.Attaching metallised retrofit film to thewindscreen may affect radio reception andhave a negative impact on all other aerialsOperating safety 15Z
(e.g. emergency aerial) in the vehicle inte-rior.iOnly have work or changes to electroniccomponents carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This workshop shouldhave the necessary specialist knowledgeand tools to carry out the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In partic-ular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.iProtection against theft: this device isequipped with technical provisions to pro-tect it against theft. Further information onprotection against theft can be obtainedfrom a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Data stored in the vehicleA number of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateReventsRfaultsThis technical information generally docu-ments the condition of a component, a mod-ule, a system or an environment.These are, for example:Roperating conditions of system compo-nents. This includes, e.g. fluid levels.Rstatus messages from the vehicle and fromindividual vehicle components. Thisincludes, e.g. number of wheel revolu-tions/speed, deceleration, lateral acceler-ation.Rmalfunctions and faults in important sys-tem components. This includes, e.g. lights,brakes.Rreactions of the vehicle in special drivingsituations. This includes, e.g. deploymentof an airbag, intervention of stability controlsystems.Renvironmental conditions. This includes,e.g. the outside temperature.This data is exclusively technical in natureand is used to:Rassist in the detection and rectification offaults and defectsRoptimise vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements over distances travelled.When your vehicle is serviced, this technicalinformation can be read out from the eventand fault memory.Services include:RrepairsRservice processesRwarranty claimsRquality assuranceThe information is read out by authorisedemployees of the service network (includingmanufacturers) using special diagnostic devi-ces. You can find more information there ifnecessary.After a fault has been rectified, the informa-tion in the fault memory is deleted or consec-utively overwritten.In normal vehicle operation, situations mayarise in which this technical data couldbecome personal in nature in conjunctionwith other information and, if necessary, onconsultation of an approval official.Examples include:Raccident reportsRvehicle damageRwitness testimoniesFurther additional features which are con-tractually agreed with the customer likewiseallow specific vehicle data to be obtainedfrom the vehicle. Such additional featuresinclude vehicle locating in an emergency, forexample.16 Operating safety
Qualified specialist workshopRead the information on qualified specialistworkshops in the vehicle Owner's Manual.Copyright informationGeneral notesYou can find information on licences for freeand open-source software used in your vehi-cle and its electronic components on the fol-lowing website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource.Features of your COMAND OnlineThese operating instructions describe allstandard and optional equipment availablefor your COMAND Online system at the timeof purchase. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described. This isalso the case for systems and functions rele-vant to safety. Therefore, the equipment onyour COMAND Online system may differ fromthat in the descriptions and illustrations.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Function restrictionsFor safety reasons, some COMAND functionsare restricted or unavailable while the vehicleis in motion. You will notice this, for example,because either you will not be able to selectcertain menu items or COMAND Online willdisplay a message to this effect.Operating safety 17Z
18
Features of your COMAND Online ..... 20COMAND Online operating system ... 20Operating COMAND Online ................ 28Basic functions of COMAND Online ... 29Character entry (telephony) ............... 34Character entry (navigation) .............. 36SPLITVIEW ........................................... 3919At a glance
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.COMAND Online operating systemOverview:COMAND display (Y page 20);COMAND control panel with a single DVDdrive or DVD changer=COMAND controller (Y page 27)You can use COMAND Online to operate thefollowing main functions:Rthe navigation systemRthe audio functionRthe telephone functionRthe video functionRthe system settingsRonline and Internet functionsRthe Digital Owner's Manual(availability depends on the vehicle model)You can call up the main functions:Rusing the corresponding function buttonsRusing the main function bar in the COMANDdisplayRusing the remote controlCOMAND displayGeneral notes! Do not use the space in front of the dis-play for storage. Objects placed here coulddamage the display or impair its function.Avoid any direct contact with the displaysurface. Pressure on the display surfacemay result in impairments to the display,which could be irreversible.Wearing polarised sunglasses may impairyour ability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightnessis automatically reduced if the temperature istoo high. If necessary, the display may tem-porarily switch off completely.20 COMAND Online operating systemAt a glance
Display overviewExample display for radio:Status bar;To call up the audio menu=Main function bar?Display/selection windowARadio menu barStatus bar : shows the time, the active network provider and the signal strength.If the traffic announcement function is switched on, the . symbol appears and when thesound is switched off, the , symbol is displayed.The main functions – navigation, audio, telephone and video – feature additional menus. Thisis indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items.Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main functionis activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering.In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selec-tion window ? is active.Menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions.COMAND Online operating system 21At a glance
Menu overviewNavi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol ®Route settings Radio Telephone TV Calls up thesystemmenuCalls up theDigital Own-er's Manual(availabilitydepends onthe vehiclemodel)Map settings Disc AddressbookDVD video Calls upCOMANDOnline andInternetPersonal POIs MemorycardAux Calls up theMercedes-Benz MobilewebsiteTravel guide MUSICREGISTERMessages(street nameannouncements,acoustic informa-tion during calls,audio fadeout,reserve fuel level)USB mem-oryO Activates/deactivates alter-native routesMedia Inter-faceAvoids an area BluetoothaudioShows the map ver-sionAux22 COMAND Online operating systemAt a glance
System menu overviewSystem Time SplitView Consump-tionSeat Display offDisplay settings OSwitchesthe auto-matic timesettingson/offOperatesCOMANDfunctionsfrom thepassengersideCalls up thefuel con-sumptiondisplayChangesthe driver/front-passengerseat set-tingsSwitchesoff the dis-playSets the textreader speedSets thetime zoneLINGUATRONICsettingsSwitches tosummertimeReversing camera Manualtime settingSets the language Sets thetime/dateformatFavourites buttonO Activates/deactivates Blue-tooth®Automatic volumeadjustmentImports/exportsdataResets COMANDOnline If equipped with the reversing camera: when the function is activated and COMAND Onlineis switched on, the image from the reversing camera is automatically shown in the COMANDdisplay when reverse gear is engaged.iIf the 360° camera menu item is displayed, Display off can be called up under System.COMAND Online operating system 23At a glance
Switching the COMAND display on/offXPress the W function button.orXSelect System in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.In both cases, the system menu appears.XTo switch off: select Display off andpress W to confirm.XTo switch on: press one of the functionbuttons, e.g. W, Ø or the % backbutton.Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the COMAND display. Thedisplay has a very sensitive high-gloss sur-face; there is a risk of scratching. If youhave to clean the screen, however, use amild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-freecloth.The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Cleanthe display screen, when necessary, with acommercially available microfibre cloth andcleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversibledamage. Then dry the surface with a drymicrofibre cloth.Avoid using alcoholic thinners, petrol or abra-sive cleaning agents. These could damage thedisplay surface.24 COMAND Online operating systemAt a glance
COMAND control panelFunction Page:Switches to radio mode 208Switches wavebands 209Switches to DAB radiomode 208;Switches to navigationmode 63Shows the menu system 63=Press h repeatedly• Switches to the audio CD,audio DVD and MP3 mode 218• Switches to memory cardmode 218• Switches to MUSIC REG-ISTER 230• Switches to USB storagedevice mode 218• Switches to Media Inter-face or audio AUX mode 242• Switches to Bluetooth®audio mode 238Function Page?Calls up the telephonebasic menu:• Telephony via the Blue-tooth® interface 137SAP telephony; see the sep-arate operating instruc-tionsALoad/eject button8 Single DVD drive 215V DVD changer 215BSelects a station using thestation list (FM and DABradio mode) 210Sets a station using the sta-tion search function 211Rewinds 222Selects the previous track 221CDisc slot• Loads CDs/DVDs 215• Ejects CDs/DVDs 216• Updates the digital map 124COMAND Online operating system 25At a glance
Function PageDSelects a station using thestation list (FM and DABradio mode) 210Sets a station using the sta-tion search function 211Fast forward 222Selects the next track 221EDelete button:• Deletes characters 38• Deletes an entry 38FNumber keypad• Selects stations via thestation presets 211• Stores stations manually 212• Authorises mobile phone 134• Telephone number entry 140• Sends DTMF tones 141• Character entry 37• Selects a location for theweather forecast from thememory 187z Displays the currenttrack being played 224g Selects stations byentering the frequencymanually 211g Selects a track 221Function PageGSwitches COMAND Onlineon/off 29Adjusts the volume 30HSD memory card slot 217ICalls up the system menu 44JAccepts a call 139Dials a number 140Redials 140Accepts a waiting call 142KMute 29Switches the hands-freemicrophone on/off 141Cancels the text messageread-aloud function 153Switches off the traffic andnavigation announcements 29LRejects a call 139Ends an active call 143Rejects a waiting call 14226 COMAND Online operating systemAt a glance
COMAND controllerOverview:COMAND controllerYou can use the COMAND controller to selectthe menu items in the COMAND display.You can:Rcall up menus or listsRscroll within menus or lists andRexit menus or listsOperationExample: operating the COMAND controllerThe COMAND controller can be:Rpressed briefly or pressed and held WRturned clockwise or anti-clockwise cVdRslid left or right XVYRslid forwards or back ZVÆRslid diagonally aVbExample of operationIn the instructions, operating sequences aredescribed as follows:XPress the $ button.Radio mode is activated.XSelect Radio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XConfirm Station list by pressing W.The station list appears.Buttons on the COMAND controllerOverview:Back button (Y page 27);Delete button: (Y page 28)=Seat function button (Y page 54)?Favourites button (Y page 47)iIf your vehicle does not have the seatfunction button, it will have two Favouritesbuttons.iFor AMG vehicles: the COMAND Control-ler is configured with the : and ; but-tons.Back buttonYou can use the % back button to exit amenu or to call up the basic display of thecurrent operating mode.COMAND Online operating system 27At a glance
XTo exit the menu: briefly press the %back button.COMAND Online changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.XTo call up the basic display: press andhold the % back button.COMAND Online changes to the basic dis-play of the current operating mode.Delete button:XTo delete individual characters: brieflypress the j delete button.XTo delete an entire entry: press and holdCLR button j.Seat function buttonYou can use button T to call up the fol-lowing seat functions:Rmulticontour seat (with 4-way lumbar sup-port)Ractive multicontour seat (dynamic seat andmassage function)Rbalance (seat heating distribution)More information on the seat functions(Y page 54).Favourites buttonYou can assign predefined functions to thefavourites button ; and call them up bypressing the button (Y page 47).Operating COMAND OnlineSelecting a main functionAddress entry menu:Main function barSituation: switching from navigation mode(address entry menu) to the system settings.XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Address entry and press W toconfirm.The address entry menu appears.XSlide ZV the COMAND controller andswitch to main function bar :.XSelect System in the main function bar byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The system menu appears.28 Operating COMAND OnlineAt a glance
Selecting the menu of a main functionExample display for audio CD mode and audiomenu (below):To call up the audio menuIf one of the navigation, audio, telephone orvideo main functions is switched on, trian-gle : appears next to the entry in the mainfunction bar. You can now select an associ-ated menu.The example shows how to call up the audiomenu from audio CD mode (an audio CD isplaying).XSelect Audio in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The Audio menu appears.The # dot indicates the currently selectedaudio mode.XSelect another audio mode, e.g. Radio, byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.Radio mode is activated.Selects a menu itemXSelect the station by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The station is set.Basic functions of COMAND OnlineSwitches COMAND Online on/offXPress the q control knob.When you switch on COMAND Online, awarning message will appear.COMAND Online calls up the previouslyselected menu.If you switch off COMAND Online, playbackof the current audio or video source willalso be switched off.MuteAudio/video source soundXPress the 8 button on the COMANDcontroller or the multifunction steeringwheel.The sound from the respective audio orvideo source is switched on or muted.iWhen the sound is switched off, you willsee the , symbol in the status bar. If youchange the audio or video source or changethe volume, the sound is automaticallyswitched on.Basic functions of COMAND Online 29At a glance
iEven if the sound is switched off, you willstill hear traffic and navigation systemannouncements.Switching Traffic Programme and navi-gation announcements on againXTo switch Traffic Programme off: pressand hold the 8 button until the . dis-play disappears from the status bar of thedisplay.A confirmation tone sounds.XTo switch the Traffic Programme on again: press and hold down the 8 but-ton until the . display in the status barappears.A confirmation tone sounds.XTo switch navigation announcements off: press and hold the 8 button duringan announcement.XTo switch navigation announcements on again: switch COMAND Online off andthen on again (Y page 29).orXStart a new route calculation(Y page 68).orXTo have the announcement repeated whilethe navigation menu is shown, select +and press W to confirm (Y page 95).Adjusting the volumeAdjusting the volume for the audio orvideo sourceXTurn the q control knoborXPress the W or X button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.The volume of the currently selected audioor video source changes.You can also adjust the volume for the fol-lowing:Rtraffic announcementsRnavigation announcementsRphone callsRLINGUATRONIC voice control (see the sep-arate operating instructions)Adjusting the volume for trafficannouncements and navigationannouncementsYou can adjust the volume of traffic and nav-igation announcements independently, rela-tive to the volume of the audio or videosource.During traffic or navigation announcements:XTurn the q control knob.orXPress the W or X button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.Adjusting the volume for phone callsYou can adjust the volume for hands-freemode during a telephone call.XTurn the q control knob.orXPress the W or X button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.30 Basic functions of COMAND OnlineAt a glance
Adjusting the sound settingsCalling up the sound menuYou can make various sound settings for thedifferent audio and video sources. This meansthat it is possible to set more bass for radiomode than for audio CD mode, for example.You can call up the respective sound menufrom the menu of the desired mode.The example describes how to call up thesound menu in radio mode.XPress the $ button.The radio display appears. You will hear thelast station played on the last wavebandselected.XSelect Sound by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You can now set the treble, bass and bal-ance for radio mode.Setting treble and bassTo set the bassXSelect Treble or Bass in the sound menuby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.An adjustment scale appears.XSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The setting is saved.Setting balance and faderSetting the balanceThe balance function is used to controlwhether the sound is louder on the driver's oron the front-passenger side.The fader function is used to control whetherthe sound is louder in the front or in the rearof the vehicle.You can adjust the fader depending on thevehicle model.Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound sys-tem: for the best sound focus, choose thesetting 0.XSelect Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in thesound menu by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect a balance setting by sliding XVY theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Basic functions of COMAND Online 31At a glance
Surround soundGeneral notesYour vehicle is equipped with one of twosound systems:Rharman/kardon®Logic7® Surround SoundsystemThe harman/kardon®Logic 7® SurroundSound system allows you to set the opti-mum surround sound in the vehicle interior(Y page 32).RBang & Olufsen sound system(Y page 33)Both sound systems are available for the fol-lowing operating modes:Rradio (FM only)RDAB radioRaudio CDRaudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digi-tal audio formats)RMP3 (including SD memory card and USBstorage device)RMedia InterfaceRoperation with Bluetooth® audioRTVRvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digitalaudio formats)RAUXBecause many DVDs contain both stereo andmultichannel audio formats, it may be neces-sary to set the audio format (Y page 264).Discs which support the audio formats men-tioned have the following logos:harman/kardon®Logic 7® SurroundSound systemThe example describes how to set the sur-round sound for radio mode.XTo switch surround sound on/off: pressthe $ button.The radio display appears. You will hear thelast station played on the last wavebandselected.32 Basic functions of COMAND OnlineAt a glance
XSelect Sound by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Surround and press W to confirm.XSelect Logic7® on or Logic7® off by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Depending on your selection, surroundsound is switched on or off and the menuis exited.XTo exit the menu without saving: pressthe % back button or slide XVY theCOMAND controller.iPlease note the following: for the opti-mum audio experience for all passengerswhen Logic7® is switched on, the balanceshould be set to the centre of the vehicleinterior.You will achieve the best sound results byplaying high-quality audio and video DVDs.MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least128 kbit/s.Surround-sound playback does not func-tion for mono signal sources, such as themedium wave range (MW) in radio mode.If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,you should switch off Logic 7®, as it mayotherwise switch between stereo andmono and cause temporary sound distor-tions.On some stereo recordings, the soundcharacteristics may differ from conven-tional stereo playback.iThe Logic7® on function creates a sur-round sound experience for everypassenger when playing stereo recordings,for example. It enables optimum playbackof music and films on CD, audio DVD orvideo DVD with multichannel audio for-mats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.This results in sound characteristics as thesound engineer intended when the originalwas recorded.iIf you select Logic7® off, the sound sys-tem plays the tracks as stored on themedium. Due to the design of thepassenger compartment, an optimumaudio experience cannot be guaranteed forall passengers.Bang & Olufsen sound systemYou can optimise the sound in the vehicle withthe Bang & Olufsen sound system and theTrue Image™ sound technology. The Sound Mode function enables you to focus the selec-ted sound setting within the vehicle.The example describes how to set the opti-mum sound for radio mode.Selecting the sound setting for True Image™XPress a number key, such as $.XSelect Sound by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-firm.A menu appears. A # dot marks the currentsetting for True Image™.XSelect Reference or Surround and pressW to confirm.RReferenceThis setting provides a crisp, clear, luxuryhigh-end sound setting for a studio atmos-phere in your vehicle.RSurroundBasic functions of COMAND Online 33At a glance
This setting enables a wide-ranging soundexperience for playing music and videos.:Current position of the sound settingFor the optimum musical enjoyment, you canfocus the sound image precisely on one seat.This means you are right at the centre of thelistening experience, with all system param-eters being precisely calculated for the selec-ted position. The result is authentic musicreproduction inside the vehicle.Focusing the sound settingXPress the $ button.XSelect Sound by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-firm.A menu appears. A # dot marks the currentsetting for Sound Mode.Depending on the vehicle model seriesXSelect left, all or rear and press W toconfirm.orXSelect left, all or right and press W toconfirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton or slide XVY the COMAND control-ler.iPlease note the following: you will achievethe best sound results on your Bang & Oluf-sen sound system by playing high-qualityaudio DVDs and CDs.MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least224 kbit/s.When playing back music from an iPod®,the bit rate should also be at least224 kbit/s.For optimum playback quality:XDeactivate the "EQ" setting on theiPod®.Surround-sound playback does not func-tion for mono signal sources, such as themedium wave range in radio mode.On some stereo recordings, the soundcharacteristics may differ from conven-tional stereo playback.Character entry (telephony)Example: entering characters:*To switch the character bar to upper-case/lower-case letters;pTo switch the character bar fromupper/lower-case letters to digits=BTo change the language of the char-acter bar?FTo delete a character/entryThe example describes how to enter the sur-name "Schulz".XCall up the input menu with data fields(Y page 147).XSelect S and confirm W with the COMANDcontroller.S appears in the data field.34 Character entry (telephony)At a glance
XSelect c and confirm W with the COMANDcontroller.The letter c is added to S in the data field.XRepeat the process until the name hasbeen entered in full.Other input menu functions:RDeleting a character/entry (Y page 36)RSwitching between upper/lower-case let-ters (Y page 35)RChanging the character set (Y page 36)RMoving the cursor to the next data field(Y page 36)X To enter a phone number: select the dig-its one by one in the corresponding datafield by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Switching data fields:Cursor in the next data field;Stores an entry=4 and 5 symbols to select a data fieldIn the input menu, if you want to enter a firstname after you have entered a surname, forexample, proceed as follows to switchbetween the data fields:Option 1XSelect 4 or 5 in the character bar andpress W to confirm.The input menu shows the data field selec-ted.Option 2XSlide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-edly until the character bar disappears.XSelect the data field by sliding ZVÆ andpress W to confirm.Storing an entryXAfter making an entry in the input menu, to create a new entry, for exam-ple (Y page 147): select the ¬ symbolin the character bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The entry is stored in the address book.Further functions available in thecharacter barChanging the language of the characterbarWhile making an entry in the input menu(Y page 147):XSelect B and press W to confirm.XSelect the language by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Switching the character bar to lettersWhile making an entry in the input menu, tocreate a new entry, for example(Y page 147):Character entry (telephony) 35At a glance
XSelect the * (upper case) or E(lower case) symbol and press W to con-firm.Changing the character setWhile making an entry in the input menu(Y page 147):XSelect the p symbol and press W toconfirm.RABC (upper/lower case)R123 (digits)ROther (special characters such as @, €,etc.)Moving the cursor to the next data field:Cursor (repositioned);2 and 3 symbol to reposition the cur-sorWhile making an entry in the input menu(Y page 147):XSelect the 2 or 3 symbol and press Wto confirm.Deleting a character/entryWhile making an entry in the input menu(Y page 147):XTo delete characters: press the $ but-ton on the control panel.orXSelect the F symbol by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.orXPress the j button next to theCOMAND controller.XTo delete an entry: press and hold the$ button on the control panel until theentire entry has been deleted.orXSelect the F symbol and press and holdW the COMAND controller until the entireentry has been deleted.orXPress and hold the j button next to theCOMAND controller until the entire entry isdeleted.Character entry (navigation)General notesThe following paragraphs describe how toenter characters using town input for BER‐LIN as an example.If you want to use the address entry menu toenter a town, a street or a house number, forexample, COMAND Online offers you:Ra list with a character bar (option 1)Ra selection list (option 2)You can enter the characters using either thecharacter bar or the number keypad. In theselection list, you select an entry to copy it tothe address entry menu.36 Character entry (navigation)At a glance
Option 1: list of towns/streets withcharacter barTown list with character barXCall up the town list with the character bar(Y page 66).The alphabetically sorted town list showsthe first available entries.:Character entered by the user B;Characters automatically added byCOMAND Online AABE=List entry that most closely resembles thecurrent entry by the user?To switch to the selection listATo delete an entryBTo change the character set (Latin/Cyril-lic)CCharacters not currently availableDCharacters currently availableECharacter barFTo cancel an entryGCurrently selected characterHListEntering characters using the character barXSelect B by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.List H shows all available town namesbeginning with a B. List entry most closelyresembling current entry by user = isalways highlighted at the top of the list(BAABE in the example).All of the characters that have beenentered so far are shown in black (letterB: in the example). Letters added byCOMAND Online are shown in grey ;(AABE in the example).Character bar E shows the letters stillavailable for selection in black D. Thesecan be selected. In the example, the letterA is highlighted G. The characters availa-ble depend on the entry made by the userso far and the data contained in the digitalmap. Characters that are no longer availa-ble are shown in grey C.XSelect E, R, L, I, N in succession, confirmingeach by pressing W.Character entry (navigation) 37At a glance
Entering characters using the number keypadXTo enter the letter B: press the l num-ber key twice in quick succession.The character appears at the bottom of thedisplay when the key is pressed. The firstavailable letter is highlighted.You see which characters you can enterwith that key. Each time the key is pressed,the next character is selected.Example: key l:Rpress once = ARpress twice = BRpress three times = CXWait until the character display goes out.The entries matching your input are shownin the list.XEnter E, R, L, I, N using the correspondingkeys.Further functions in the list with char-acter barXTo delete characters: press the $ but-ton on the control panel.orXPress the j button next to theCOMAND controller.orXSelect the F symbol in the character barby sliding VÆ and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XTo delete an entry: press $ on thecontrol panel.orXPress and hold the j button next to theCOMAND controller until the entire entry isdeleted.orXSelect the F symbol in the character barand press and hold W the COMAND con-troller until the entire entry is deleted.XTo switch the character set: selectB and press W to confirm.This will switch the character set from Latinto Cyrillic and back.XTo cancel an entry: select the & symbolin the bottom left of the character bar andpress W to confirm.orXPress the % back button.The address entry menu appears.XTo accept the first list entry: press andhold W the COMAND controller until theaddress entry menu appears.The accepted list entry is shown there.Calling up the list as a selection listIt is also possible to switch from the town listwith character bar to the town selection listat any time during character input.XSlide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-edly until the town list appears as a selec-tion list.Select the desired town from the selectionlist.orXSelect¬in the character bar by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.38 Character entry (navigation)At a glance
If there are several entries for a town or ifseveral towns of the same name are stored,then ¬ is highlighted in the character bar.XPress W the COMAND controller.Option 2: town list as selection listCOMAND Online either shows the selectionlist automatically or you can call up the selec-tion list from the list with the character bar.The example shows the selection list after thetown BERLIN has been entered. The entry ishighlighted automatically.XConfirm BERLING by pressing W theCOMAND controller.You see the available entries.XConfirm BERLIN(1XXXX) by pressing Wthe COMAND controller.The address entry menu appears.Observe the information relating to destina-tion entry (Y page 65).SPLITVIEWMethod of operationSPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously usedifferent COMAND functions on the front-passenger side and on the driver's side. Dif-ferent content is seen depending on your per-spective when viewing the display.The "Navi" function, for example, can be usedfrom the driver's side while a video is watchedfrom the front-passenger side.SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote con-trol from the front-passenger side.To do so, use the special radio headphones.Using the headphones on the correct sidesensures an optimal sound.You can connect your own headphones to aspecial headphones jack. You can use theremote control to operate them.Points to rememberRYou can only adjust the volume for theheadphones supplied directly on the head-phones.ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio,TV, video and Internet, for example, may beused with SPLITVIEW.RYou can only operate media from the driv-er's and front-passenger sides separately ifthe media are from different sources.Example: if a medium from the DVDchanger is being played on the driver's side.Then, no other medium can be used sepa-rately on the front-passenger side that isalso played from the DVD changer. How-ever, other media can be used at the sametime on the front-passenger side, includingradio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER,Media Interface, USB or AUX.RIf you use the same medium on both sides,you can both carry out the respective set-tings.RInternet use is only available at any onetime to the driver or the front passenger.SPLITVIEW 39At a glance
A corresponding message appears on thedisplay.RInternet can only be used, if it is set andconnected via a telephone on the driver'sside.RThe multifunction steering wheel can onlybe used for functions which relate to thedriver's side.Switching SPLITVIEW on/offSwitching on SPLITVIEWXSelect System in the main function bar byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect ; in the menu bar and confirm.SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-play, and display ; switches to off.The front passenger sees the display of thefunction last activated. If the switch-ontime was longer than 30 minutes previ-ously, the display from the driver's side isshown.Switching off SPLITVIEWXSelect ; in the menu bar by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.SPLITVIEW symbol : disappears from thedisplay. Display ; switches to on.iIf COMAND Online has already beenswitched on, you can also use the remotecontrol to switch SPLITVIEW on and off.Make sure that the SPLITVIEW symbol isset on the remote control thumbwheel(Y page 271).The SPLITVIEW display remains on for approx-imately 30 minutes after the key has beenturned to position 0 in the ignition lock. Afterthis time or after the key has been removed,the settings on the front-passenger side aresaved for approximately 30 minutes longer.After this period, reactivation on the front-passenger side means that the settings fromthe driver's side will be used.Transferring the driver's websiteXTo switch on SPLITVIEW: select Systemfrom the main function bar by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect ; in the menu bar and confirm.SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-play, and display ; switches to off.XSelect ® in the main function bar with theremote control.A carousel view appears with the followingoptions:ROwner's ManualREnter a URLRInternet favouritesRMercedes-Benz AppsRInternet radio40 SPLITVIEWAt a glance
RMercedes Mobile websiteRTransfer driver's websiteXSelect Transfer driver's website withthe remote control.You see the last website called up by thedriver.Transferring a destination to thedriverUsing SPLITVIEW you can select a destinationfrom the front-passenger side and transferthis to the driver's side.XTo switch on SPLITVIEW: select Systemfrom the main function bar by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect ; in the menu bar and confirm.SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-play, and display ; switches to off.XSelect ® in the main function bar with theremote control.The carousel view appears.XSelect Mercedes-Benz Apps with theremote control.You see the selection of Mercedes-BenzApps.XSelect Google Local Search with theremote control.Using a menu you can select a category forthe destination.XSelect At current location, for exam-ple.Using a menu you can determine the typeof search enquiry.XSelect Enter search term, for example.An input field appears.XEnter the destination with the remote con-trol and confirm the entry with b.You see the results list from Google.XSelect the exact destination with theremote control.An additional menu appears.XSelect Navigate to.XA pop-up window appears on the driver'sside with the message: Should the nav‐igation data from Mercedes-Benz Apps be accepted?SPLITVIEW 41At a glance
42
Features of your COMAND Online ..... 44Display settings .................................. 44Time settings ....................................... 44Text reader settings ............................ 46LINGUATRONIC settings ..................... 46Bluetooth® settings ............................ 46Setting the system language ............. 47Assigning a favourites button ............ 47Importing/exporting data .................. 48Reset function ..................................... 4943System settings
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.Display settingsSetting the brightnessThe brightness detected by the display lightsensor affects the setting options for thisfunction.XPress W.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Display and press W to confirm.XSelect Brightness and press W to con-firm.XAdjust the brightness by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Display designYour COMAND Online display features opti-mised designs for operation during daytimeand night-time hours. You can customise thedesign by manually selecting day or nightdesign, or opt for an automatic setting.XPress W.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Display and press W to confirm.XSelect Day design, Night design orAutomatic by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.A dot indicates the current setting.Design ExplanationDay design The display is set perma-nently to day design.Night design The display is set perma-nently to night design.Automatic If the Automatic settingis selected, COMANDOnline evaluates thereadings from the auto-matic vehicle light sen-sor and automaticallyswitches between thedisplay designs.Time settingsGeneral notesIf COMAND Online is equipped with a naviga-tion system and has GPS reception, COMANDOnline automatically sets the time and date.You can change the time in minute incre-ments. The date can also be changed.iIf you adjust the time in minute incre-ments, any time zone settings and settingsfor changing between summer and stand-ard time are lost. Switching between sum-mer and standard time (Y page 45).44 Time settingsSystem settings
iThe following navigation system functionsrequire the time, time zone and summer/standard time to be set correctly in orderto work properly:Rroute guidance on routes with time-dependent traffic guidanceRcalculation of expected time of arrivaliUse this function to set the time for alldisplays in the vehicle.Setting the time/date formatXPress the W button.XSelect Time by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Format and press W to confirm.The # symbols show the current settings.XSet the format by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Abbreviation MeaningDD . MM . YY Day . Month . Year(date format, two digits)MM / DD / YYYY Month/Day/Yeardate format, year (allfour digits)YY / MM / DD Year/Month/Daydate format, year (twodigits)HH : MM (24 hrs)Hours : Minutes(24 hour time format)HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes(AM/PM time format)Adjusting the time zone and switchingto summer timeXPress W.XSelect Time by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Time zone and press W to confirm.A list of countries or time zones appears.The # dot indicates the current setting.XSelect the country or time zone by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A time zone list may also be displayed,depending on the country selected.XSelect the time zone and press W to con-firm.The entry for the Automatic time set‐tings is accepted.Subsequent operation depends on whetherthe automatic changeover function to sum-mer time is available.XTo change manually: select ON or OFF andpress W to confirm.XTo change to automatic time: selectAutomatic and press W to confirm.The entry for the Automatic time set‐tings is accepted.XTo switch the automatic time setting off/on: press the W button.XSelect Time by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XPress W to confirm the Automatic time settings.Switch the automatic time setting off ª oron again O.To switch on: the menu item is switchedon as the default setting. If the Automatic time settings is switched off and youswitch it on again, the last settings for thetime zone and summer time changeoverare selected.To switch off: the time zone is deselectedand the summer time is switched off. IfAutomatic is set for the summer timechangeover, a prompt will appear askingwhether this should be maintained.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.Time settings 45System settings
Setting the time manuallyXPress the W button.XSelect Time by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Set time manually and press Wto confirm.XSet the time by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The time is accepted.Text reader settingsXPress the W button.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Text reader speed and press Wto confirm.A list appears. The # dot indicates the cur-rent setting.XSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.LINGUATRONIC settingsOpening/closing the help windowThe help window provides information in addi-tion to the audible instructions during indi-vidualisation and during the subsequent voicecontrol.XPress W.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Linguatronic and press W to con-firm.XSelect Help window and press W to con-firm.You have switched the help window onO or off ª.IndividualisationUsing individualisation, you can fine-tune LIN-GUATRONIC to your own voice and thusimprove voice recognition. See the separateoperating instructions.Bluetooth® settingsGeneral information about Blue-tooth®Bluetooth® technology is a standard forshort-range wireless data transmissions up toapproximately 10 metres. Bluetooth® allows,for example, the exchange of vCards.Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®XPress the W button.The system menu appears.46 Bluetooth® settingsSystem settings
XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Activate Bluetooth and pressW to confirm.This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª.Setting the system languageThis function allows you to determine the lan-guage for the menu displays and the naviga-tion announcements. The selected languageaffects the characters available for entry.The navigation announcements are not avail-able in all languages. If a language is not avail-able, the navigation announcements will be inEnglish.If you change the system language, the lan-guage for LINGUATRONIC will be also bechanged. If the selected language is not sup-ported by LINGUATRONIC, English will beselected.XPress the W button.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Language and press W to confirm.The list of languages appears. The # dotindicates the current setting.XSelect the language by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.COMAND loads the selected language andsets it.iIf you are using Arabic map data, the textinformation can also be shown in Arabic onthe navigation map. To do this, select Eng‐lish (Arabic map) as the language fromthe list of languages. Navigation announce-ments are then made in Arabic.Assigning a favourites buttonXTo assign a favourites button: press theW button.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Assign as favourite and pressW to confirm.The list of predefined functions appears.The dot # indicates the currently selectedfunction.XSelect the function by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The favourites button is assigned the selec-ted function.XExample: to call up a favourite: press theg favourites button.This calls up the predefined function.You can select the following predefined func-tions in a menu:RSplitView on/off: you can switch thescreen view for the front passenger on oroff.RDisplay off/on: you can switch the dis-play off or on.RFull screen: 'Clock': you can call upthe full screen with the clock.R®Menu: you can call up the COMANDOnline and Internet functions.RFull screen: 'Map': you can call up thefull screen with the map.RSpoken driving tip: you can call up thecurrent driving recommendation.RDisplay traffic messages: you can callup traffic reports.RNavigate to 'Home address': you canstart route guidance to your home addressif you have already entered and saved theaddress (Y page 69).RDetour menu: you can call up the Detourmenu and then block a section of the routeand recalculate the route (Y page 96).Assigning a favourites button 47System settings
RCompass screen: you can call up the com-pass.RDriver’s seat massage, Front-pas‐senger's seat massage or Massage: both front seats: you can start the mas-sage function, depending on which seatsare selected (Y page 54).Importing/exporting dataGeneral notes! When data is being copied to the USBstick or the memory card, the stick or thecard must not be removed under any cir-cumstances. Doing so runs the risk of dataloss.Using this function, you can:Rtransfer your personal COMAND data fromone system/vehicle to anotherRmake a backup copy of your personal data(export data) and load it again (importdata).Rprotect your data from unwanted export byactivating a pin prompt (presetting: deacti-vated ª).You can either use an SD memory card or aUSB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem-porary storage.Activating/deactivating PIN protec-tionXPress the W button.The system menu appears.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Import/export data and pressW to confirm.XSelect Activate PIN protection andpress W to confirm.Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protec-tion. When activating PIN protection, youwill be prompted to enter a PIN.XEnter a 4-digit PIN, select¬and pressW to confirm.You will be prompted to enter the PINagain.XRe-enter the PIN, select ¬ and pressW to confirm.The PIN prompt now protects your personaldata from unwanted export.iIf you deactivate your PIN protection, youwill first be prompted to enter your PIN. Ifyou have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-Benz service station can deactivate yourPIN protection for you. Alternatively, youcan deactivate PIN protection by resettingyour personal COMAND data(Y page 49).48 Importing/exporting dataSystem settings
Importing/exporting dataXInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).orXConnect a USB device (e.g. a USB memorystick) (Y page 218).XPress the W button.The system menu appears.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Import/export data and pressW to confirm.XSelect Import data or Export data andpress W to confirm.If PIN protection is activated, a PIN promptappears when you select Export data.XEnter the PIN, select¬and press W toconfirm.You can now proceed in the same way as ifPIN protection was deactivated.XTo select a preset: select Memory card orUSB storage and press W to confirm.XSelect All data and press W to confirm.This function exports all the data to theselected disc.orXSelect the data type and press W to con-firm.Depending on the previous entry, select thedata type for the export O or not ª.XSelect Continue and press W to confirm.iPersonal music files in the MUSIC REGIS-TER cannot be saved and imported againusing this function.Reset functionYou can completely reset COMAND Online tothe factory settings. Amongst other things,this will delete all personal COMAND Onlinedata. This includes the station presets,entries in the destination memory and in thelist of previous destinations in the navigationsystem and address book entries. In addition,an activated PIN protection, which you haveused to protect your data against unwantedexport, will be deactivated. Resetting is rec-Reset function 49System settings
ommended before handing over or selling thevehicle, for example.Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. musicfiles in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.You can also delete music files from theMUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all musicfiles" function (Y page 232).XPress the W function button.XSelect System by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Reset and press W to confirm.A warning message appears askingwhether you wish to reset.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.If you select Yes, a prompt will appear againasking whether you really wish to reset tothe factory settings.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, a message will be shown.COMAND Online is reset and restarted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.50 Reset functionSystem settings
Features of your COMAND Online ..... 52Climate control status display ........... 52Fuel consumption indicator ............... 52ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 53Driving conditions menu (ActiveBody Control) ....................................... 53Seat functions ..................................... 54Reversing camera ............................... 57Night View Assist Plus ....................... 58360° camera ....................................... 5851Vehicle functions
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.Climate control status displayExample: the climate control status display in theCOMAND displayIf you change the settings of the climate con-trol system, the climate status displayappears for three seconds at the bottom ofthe screen in the COMAND display. You willsee the current settings of the various climatecontrol functions.Overview of climate control systems, see sep-arate vehicle operating instructions.The climate control status display appearswhen:XYou turn the temperature control and setthe temperatureorXYou turn the control to set the airflow.orXYou press one of the following buttons:K Increases air flowI Decreases air flow¿ Switches climate control on/offá Switches the ZONE function on/offà Controls the air conditioning auto-maticallyñ Sets the climate control style in auto-matic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE)_ Sets the air distributionM, P or O Sets the air distribu-tion¬ Turns on the defrost functioniHow the climate status display is calledup, depends on the climate control systemin your vehicle.Example settings for the defrost function (top) andfor the climate mode in automatic modeXTo hide the display: turn or press theCOMAND controller.orXPress one of the buttons onCOMAND Online.Fuel consumption indicatorOverviewDepending on the vehicle equipment and theinstalled engine variant, fuel consumptioncan be displayed in the COMAND display.If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and theinstalled engine variant supports it, you cancall up other displays (see the separate oper-ating instructions).52 Fuel consumption indicatorVehicle functions
Calling up/exiting the displayXTo call up the full-screen display: pressthe W button.XIn the system menu, slide ZV theCOMAND controller up until the Full screen option is selected.XPress W the COMAND controller.The system display is shown as full screen(without system menu).XSlide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-edly until the fuel consumption indicatorappears.The COMAND display shows the fuel con-sumption for the last 15 minutes of thejourney.XTo exit the full-screen display: press Wthe COMAND controller.The system menu appears.Every bar of the graph displays the averagevalue for one minute.The fuel consumption display may differ fromthe display in the FROM START trip computerin the Trip menu; see the vehicle Owner'sManual.ON&OFFROAD displayOverviewDepending on the vehicle model series, thesettings and the status of the ON&OFFROADfunctions can be shown in the COMAND dis-play, e.g.Rvehicle's angle of inclinationRuphill or downhill gradient in percentageRsteering angleFurther information on the ON&OFFROADfunctions can be found in the vehicle Owner'sManual.Calling up displaysXPress W.XIn the system menu, slide ZV theCOMAND controller up until the display/selection window is selected.XSlide XVY the COMAND controller untilthe ON&OFFROAD display appears.The COMAND display shows the settingsand the status of the ON&OFFROAD func-tions.Exiting the displayXSlide XVY the COMAND controller untilthe desired display (clock or fuel consump-tion) is shown.Driving conditions menu (Active BodyControl)General notesOn vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC),you can display some driving systems andadditional information in the COMAND dis-play.Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) 53Vehicle functions
Calling up drive status regulator (ABC)XPress W.XIn the system menu, slide ZV theCOMAND controller up until the display/selection window is selected.XSlide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-edly until the drive status regulator (ABC)appears.The corresponding displays appear in theCOMAND display.Details on the displays:Rfor vehicles except AMG vehicles; see theseparate vehicle Owner's ManualRfor AMG vehicles; see the separate vehicleOwner's ManualExiting the displayXSlide XVY the COMAND controller untilthe desired display (clock or fuel consump-tion) is shown.Seat functionsOverviewUsing the T button next to the COMANDcontroller or the Seat menu item in the sys-tem menu, you can call up different settingfunctions: The following settings depend onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.Rseat cushion lengthRbackrest side bolstersRlumbarRbalanceRcushion side bolstersRdriving dynamicsRmassageiYou also can save and recall the currentsettings of a seat function using the mem-ory button and the corresponding memoryposition switch; see the separate vehicleOwner's Manual.The massage function cannot be started orstopped using the memory button.Selecting the seatFirst select the seat which you wish to adjust.This function is not available for all vehicles.XPress the T or W button.XSelect Seat and press W to confirm.XTo switch to the lower line, for both optionsslide VÆ the COMAND controller.XSelect Driver's seat or Front-pass. seat by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.Adjustment functionsTo adjust the seat cushion lengthThe availability of this function depends onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.This function allows you to adjust the heightof the seat cushion.54 Seat functionsVehicle functions
XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Seat surface by turning cVd theCOMAND Controller and press W to con-firm.A scale appears.XSlide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Adjusting the seat contour in the lum-bar region of the seat backrestThe availability of this function depends onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.This function allows you to adjust the aircushions in the lumbar region of the backrest(4-way lumbar support).XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Lumbar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A crosshair appears. You can make twosettings:RVertical: to move the point of greatestlumbar support up or downRHorizontal: to adjust the amount of sup-portXSlide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest(backrest side bolsters)The availability of this function depends onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Backr. sides by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A scale appears.XSlide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.iFor vehicle model series with a dynamicmulticontour seat: if the driving dynamicsare activated and respond to a change ofdirection (e.g. when cornering), the back-rest side bolsters cannot be temporarilyadjusted.Adjusting the seat side bolstersThe availability of this function depends onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.Seat functions 55Vehicle functions
This function allows you to adjust the aircushions in the seat side bolsters.XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Seat sides by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A scale appears.XSlide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.BalanceThe availability of this function depends onthe vehicle model series.The Balance function controls the distributionof heat on the seat backrest and cushion.The Balance function influences the currentlyset heating level of the seat heating; see theseparate vehicle Owner's Manual.XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Balance by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A scale appears and shows the current set-ting. Positive values indicate the heat out-put for the seat backrest, negative valuesindicate the heat output for the seat cush-ion. The intensity is indicated by an orangebar in the stylised seat above the scale.The values stand for:R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heatedequally to the maximum levelR1 to 3 - the heat output to the seat cush-ion is reduced in one-third incrementsR-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrestis reduced in one-third incrementsXSlide cVd or turn XVY the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Massage functionThe availability of this function depends onthe type of seat and the vehicle model series.Example display (M-Class or GL-Class)XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Massage by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A list appears.You can select different types of massagefunction:R0: OffR1: Slow and gentleR2: Slow and vigorousR3: Fast and gentleR4: Fast and vigorous56 Seat functionsVehicle functions
XSlide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.The massage function runs for approx-imately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on thesetting.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Setting the driving dynamicsThis function is available on vehicle modelseries with a dynamic multicontour seat.XSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Dynamic seat by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A scale appears.You can select:R0: OffR1: level 1 (medium setting)R2: level 2 (high setting)XSlide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Resetting all adjustmentsXSelect the seat (Y page 54).XSelect Reset all by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A query appears.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.After you select Yes, all seat adjustmentsare reset to the default values (factory set-ting).Reversing cameraThe reversing camera is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attention to the imme-diate surroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.The image from the reversing camera isshown in the COMAND display when reversegear is engaged if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a reversingcameraRCOMAND Online is switched onRthe Activation by R gear function isactivated.If the function is activated, the COMAND dis-play will automatically switch back to the pre-Reversing camera 57Vehicle functions
viously selected display as soon as you shiftout of reverse gear.iFor further information on the reversingcamera, see separate vehicle Owner'sManual.XPress the W function button.The system menu appears.XSelect Settings by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Rear view camera and press W toconfirm.XSelect Activation by R gear and pressW to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.Night View Assist PlusOn vehicles with Night View Assist Plus youcan have the image from Night View AssistPlus shown on the COMAND display.XSwitch on COMAND Online (Y page 29).XActivating Night View Assist Plus .Activating Night View Assist Plus, see theseparate operating instructions.The image from Night View Assist Plusappears in the COMAND display.XTo adjust the brightness: adjust theBrightness by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XTo switch off the display: select Back andpress W to confirm or press the % but-ton.360° cameraImportant notesThe 360° camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.OverviewThe 360° camera covers the immediate sur-roundings of the vehicle and assists you, forinstance when parking or at exits withreduced visibility. It detects moving objectsand displays these objects at the bottomusing bars.Displaying the image from the 360°cameraThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-eraRCOMAND Online is switched on(Y page 29)Rthe 360° camera function is activatedYou can activate the 360° display by:Rengaging reverse gear (only possible if theActivation by R gear option is activa-ted)Rselecting the 360° camera menu item inthe System menuRpressing and holding the W function keyAs soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of30 km/h with the function activated, thefunction switches off. The previous displayappears on the COMAND display.You can also switch the display by selectingthe & symbol in the display and pressingW the COMAND controller to confirm.58 360° cameraVehicle functions
XTo activate/deactivate using the reverse gear: press the W function key.The system menu appears.XSelect Settings by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect 360° camera and press W to con-firm.XSelect Activation by R gear and pressW to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.iThis function must only be switched on ifyou want the image from the 360° camerato be displayed when the reverse gear isengaged. The other activation options arealways available.XTo display the image from the 360° camera: press the W function key forlonger than 2 seconds.The full image will appear.orXSelect Settings by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect 360° camera and press W to con-firm.The split view of the 360° camera appears.orXEngage reverse gear (only possible if theActivation by R gear option is activa-ted)The 360° camera in split view and thereverse drive image appears.For a detailed description of the 360° cam-era, see the separate vehicle Owner's Man-ual.360° camera 59Vehicle functions
60
Features of your COMAND Online ..... 62Introduction ......................................... 62Basic settings ...................................... 64Entering a destination ........................ 65Entering a POI ...................................... 78Personal POIs ...................................... 82ViaMichelin travel guide ..................... 87Route guidance ................................... 90Dynamic route guidance .................. 103Destination memory ......................... 106Last destinations .............................. 110Map operation and map settings .... 111Additional settings ........................... 120Problems with the navigation sys-tem ..................................................... 12661Navigation
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.IntroductionImportant safety notesGWARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating COMAND Online.COMAND Online calculates the route to thedestination without taking account of the fol-lowing, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and give way signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsCOMAND Online may give incorrect drivingrecommendations if the data on the digitalmap does not correspond to the actual con-ditions. For example, a route may have beendiverted or the direction of a one-way streetmay have changed.For this reason, you must always observeroad and traffic rules and regulations duringyour journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-ulations always have priority over the sys-tem's driving recommendations.General notesOperational readiness of the navigationsystemIn vehicles for certain countries, the naviga-tion system is not operational immediatelyafter delivery. The digital map is not pre-installed.If this is the case, the following messageappears in the display after you switch to nav-igation mode:Please insert the map DVD to acti‐vate navigation.XTo install the digital map:(Y page 124).The navigation system must determine theposition of the vehicle before first use orwhenever operational status is restored.Therefore, you may have to drive for a whilebefore precise route guidance is possible.GPS receptionCorrect functioning of the navigation systemdepends, amongst other things, on GPSreception. In certain situations, GPS recep-tion may be impaired, there may be interfer-ence or there may be no reception at all, e.g.in tunnels or multi-storey car parks.iThe functionality of a roof aerial (tele-phone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carri-ers are used.Entry restrictionOn vehicles for certain countries, there is arestriction on entering data.The restriction is active above a vehicle speedof about 5 km/h. The restriction is deactiva-ted as soon as the vehicle speed drops belowabout 3 km/h.62 IntroductionNavigation
When the restriction is active, certain entriescannot be made. This will be indicated by thefact that certain menu items are greyed outand cannot be selected.The following entries are not possible, forexample:Rentering the destination town and streetRentering a destination via the mapRentering POIs in the vicinity of a town or viaa name searchRediting entriesRdirect entry using the number keypadOther entries are possible, however, such asentering POIs in the vicinity of the destinationor current position.Switching to navigation modeMap showing the menu; route guidance inactive:Status bar;Main function bar=Current vehicle position?Navigation menu barXPress the Ø function button.The map is displayed with the menu eithershown or hidden.orXSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The map is displayed with the menu shown.Map without the menu; route guidance inactive:Current vehicle position;Map orientation selected=Map scale selectediRoute guidance active means that youhave entered a destination and thatCOMAND Online has calculated the route.The display shows the route, changes ofdirection and lane recommendations. Nav-igation announcements guide you to yourdestination.Route guidance inactive means that nodestination has been entered and no routehas been calculated yet.Showing/hiding the menuYou can show or hide the menu on the map.XTo hide the menu: slide ZV the COMANDcontroller and, when the Full screenmenu item is shown, press W to confirm.orXPress the % back button.The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-play.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller when the map is shown in full-screen display.Introduction 63NavigationZ
Basic settingsSetting route type and route optionsRoute settings menu (start of menu):To select the route type;To set route optionsXSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Route settings and press W toconfirm.The route settings menu appears.XSelect a route type and press W to confirm.A filled circle indicates the current setting.XSelect the route option(s) and press W toconfirm.The route options are switched on O or offª, depending on the previous status.iIf you change the route type and/or theroute options while route guidance isactive, COMAND Online will calculate anew route.If you change the route type and/or theroute options while route guidance is inac-tive, COMAND Online uses the new settingfor the next route guidance.Route guidance active: a destination hasbeen entered and the route has been cal-culated.Route guidance inactive: no destinationhas been entered yet and no route has beencalculated yet.You can select the following route types:RFast route: COMAND Online calculates aroute with the shortest (minimised) journeytime.RDynamic route: same route type as Fast route. In addition, COMAND Online takesinto account any RDS-TMC traffic reports itreceives during route guidance. The navi-gation system can help you avoid a trafficjam, for example. If a faster route is deter-mined due to a received RDS-TMC trafficannouncement, the navigation systemchanges the route. If possible, it will bypassblocked roads.REco route: the Eco route (economicalroute) is a variant of the Fast route type.COMAND Online will attempt to minimisethe journey distance at the expense of aslightly increased journey time.RShort route: COMAND Online calculatesa route with the shortest possible (mini-mised) route distance.iRDS-TMC is not available in all countries.iThe route calculated may, for example,include ferry connections, even if theAvoid ferries route option is switchedon.In some cases, e.g. when calculating par-ticularly long routes, COMAND Online maynot be able to take all the selected routeoptions into account.iTo avoid toll roads: route calculation isperformed excluding sections (e.g. tunnels,stretches of motorway, inner cities) whichrequire you to pay a fee (toll).To avoid routes requiring a special toll sticker: route calculation is performedexcluding route networks (e.g. a country'smotorway network) which require you topay a fee (vignette). A vignette allows tem-porary use of the route network. Exampletime limits are 10 days, 2 months or 1 year.XTo exit the menu: slide XVY the COMANDcontroller.64 Basic settingsNavigation
Entering a destinationImportant safety notesGWARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating COMAND Online.Entering a destination by addressIntroductionOptions for destination entry:Renter the country, town/postcode, streetand house numberRenter the country, town/postcode andstreetRenter the country, town/postcode andcentreRenter the country, town/postcode, streetand junctionRenter the country and townCountry and town are sufficient to start nav-igating. You can enter either a town or a post-code. By entering further address data suchas the street and house number, you canspecify the destination more precisely.iYou can only enter a street, house num-ber, junction or centre once you haveentered a country and a town or postcode.iYou can only enter those towns, streets,postcodes etc. that are stored in the digitalmap. This means that for some countries,you cannot enter postcodes, for example.This step-by-step example of how to enter anaddress uses the following example data:GermanyBerlinUnstrutstraße 1You can of course enter any country, town,street and house number desired and enter,for example your home address (My address).Calling up the address entry menuAddress entry menuCalling up the address entry menuXSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Destination in the lower menu barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Address entry and press W toconfirm.The address entry menu appears. If youhave previously entered a destination, thiswill be shown in the display.Depending on the sequence in which youenter the address and on the data status ofthe digital map, some menu items may not beavailable at all or may not yet be available.Example: after country selection the Street,No., Centr. (centre), Junct. (junction), POI,Save and Start menu items are not yet avail-able. The Postcode menu item will not beavailable unless the digital map containspostcodes.Entering a destination 65NavigationZ
Entering the country, city, street, housenumberCountry list with character barEnter countryXCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Country in the address entry menuby turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You see the list of countries with the char-acter bar.Entering characters using town input as anexample (Y page 36).Country list as selection listXTo switch to the country list as a selec-tion list: select ¬ in the character barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.orXSlide ZV the COMAND controller once ortwice.XSelect GERMANY by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The address entry menu appears again.GERMANY has now been entered.Entering a townXCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Town in the address entry menu byturning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see the town list either with thecharacter bar (option 1) or as a selectionlist (option 2).Town list with character barOption 1: town list with character barXEnter BERLIN. Entering characters usingtown input as an example (Y page 36).List of towns as selection list66 Entering a destinationNavigation
Option 2: town list as selection listXSelect BERLIN by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Entries with the G: icon cannot beuniquely assigned. Another selection list isshown.XSelect BERLIN(1XXXX) by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The address entry menu appears again.BERLIN(1XXXX) has now been entered.Entering a streetXCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Street in the address entry menuby turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see the street list either with thecharacter bar (option 1) or as a selectionlist (option 2).Street list with character barOption 1: street list with character barXEnter UNSTRUTSTRASSE. Entering charac-ters using town input as an example(Y page 36).Street list as selection listOption 2: street list as selection listXSelect UNSTRUTSTRASSE by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XIrrespective of the option, press W to con-firm your selection.The address entry menu appears again.UNSTRUTSTRASSE has now been entered.Entering a house numberXCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect No. in the address entry menu byturning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see the house number list eitherwith the character bar (option 1) or as aselection list (option 2).Entering a destination 67NavigationZ
House number list with character barOption 1: house number list with characterbarXEnter 1. Entering characters using towninput as an example (Y page 36).House number list as selection listOption 2: house number list as selection listXSelect 1 by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XIrrespective of the option, press W to con-firm your selection.The address entry menu appears again. 1has now been entered.Starting route calculationAddress entry menu with destination address:Destination address;To start route calculationYou can now have COMAND Online calculatea route to the destination address you haveentered, or you can save it.XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XIn the address entry menu, confirm Startby pressing W.If no other route has been calculated, routecalculation starts immediately (option 1). Ifanother route has already been calculated(route guidance is active), a promptappears (option 2).Option 1 – no route guidance active: routecalculation starts. While route calculation isin progress, an arrow will indicate the direc-tion to your destination. Below this, you willsee a message, e.g. Calculating fast route....Once the route has been calculated, routeguidance begins. If the vehicle is travelling ona non-digitised road, the system displays thelinear distance to the destination, the direc-tion of the destination and the Off roadmessage. In this case, the display will begreyed out.Option 2 – route guidance is already active: if route guidance is already active, aprompt will appear asking whether you wishto terminate the currently active route guid-ance.68 Entering a destinationNavigation
XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online will stoproute guidance and start route calculationfor the new destination.If you select No, COMAND Online will con-tinue with the active route guidance.iRoute calculation takes a certain amountof time. The time depends on the distancefrom the destination, for example.COMAND Online calculates the route usingthe digital map data.The calculated route may differ from theideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incom-plete map data. Please also refer to thenotes about the digital map (Y page 124).Entering and storing your home addressYou can either enter your home address forthe first time (option 1) or edit a previouslystored home address (option 2).XOption 1: enter the address, e.g. a town,street and house number (Y page 65).XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Save in the address entry menu byturning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Save as "My address" and pressW to confirm.COMAND Online stores your home addressas My address in the destination memory.XOption 2: proceed as described under"Option 1".A prompt appears asking whether the cur-rent home address should be overwritten.XSelect Yes and press W to confirm.After selecting Yes, the Saving proce‐dure successful message appears.Entering a postcode, centre and junc-tionEntering a postcodeEntering a postcode will delete a previouslyentered town.XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Postcode in the address entry menuby turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see the postcode list either withthe character bar (option 1) or as a selec-tion list (option 2).List of postcodes with character barOption 1: postcode list with character barXEnter a postcode. Entering charactersusing town input as an example(Y page 36).Postcode list as selection listEntering a destination 69NavigationZ
Option 2: postcode list as selection listXSelect the desired postcode by turningcVd the COMAND controller.XIrrespective of the option, press W to con-firm your selection.If COMAND Online can assign the postcodeto one town unambiguously (e.g. 74172 forNECKARSULM), the address entry menuappears again. You can now complete theaddress, e.g. by entering a street.If COMAND Online cannot assign the post-code unambiguously to a specific address,the address entry menu also appears again.The postcode is automatically entered. Youcan now enter the street for a more preciselocation. Only streets in the area coveredby the entered postcode are available.XStart route calculation (Y page 68).Entering a town centreEntering a centre will, for example, delete apreviously entered street.XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Centr. (centre) in the address entrymenu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see the centre list either with thecharacter bar (option 1) or as a selectionlist (option 2).Town centre list with character barOption 1: centre list with character barXEnter a centre. Entering characters usingtown input as an example (Y page 36).iIn big cities, you can also enter the cen-tres of districts.Centre list as selection listOption 2: centre list as a selection listXSelect a centre by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.For options 1 and 2:XConfirm your selection by pressing W.The address entry menu appears again. Thecentre selected has been entered.XStart route calculation (Y page 68).Entering a junctionEntering a junction will delete a previouslyentered house number.XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Junct. (junction) in the addressentry menu by turning cVd and slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You will see the junction list either with thecharacter bar (option 1) or as a selectionlist (option 2).70 Entering a destinationNavigation
Junction list with character barOption 1: junction list with character barXEnter a junction. Entering characters usingtown input as an example (Y page 36).Junction list as selection listOption 2: junction list as selection listXSelect a junction by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Entries with the G: icon cannot beuniquely assigned. Another selection list isshown.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The address entry menu appears again. Thejunction selected has been entered.XStart route calculation (Y page 68).Selecting a destination from the des-tination memoryAn entry named "My address" can always befound at the top of the destination memory.You may wish to assign your home address tothis entry, for example, and select it for routeguidance. Further information on entering ahome address (Y page 69).XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From memory and press W to con-firm.You will see the destination memory listeither with the character bar (option 1) oras a selection list (option 2).Destination memory list with character barOption 1: destination memory list with char-acter barXEnter a destination, e.g. "My address".Enter characters (Y page 36).Entering a destination 71NavigationZ
Destination memory list as selection listOption 2: destination memory list as a selec-tion listXSelect My address by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XIrrespective of the option, press W to con-firm your selection.The address entry menu appears again."My address" has been entered.:Starting route calculationXTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Entering a destination from the list oflast destinationsLast destinationsXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From last destinations andpress W to confirm.XSelect the desired destination by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The address entry menu appears again. Thedestination address selected has beenentered.XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Once the route has been calculated, routeguidance begins (Y page 68).iFurther information on the "Last destina-tions" memory (Y page 110).72 Entering a destinationNavigation
Entering a destination using the mapCalling up the mapMap with crosshair:Current vehicle position;Crosshair=Details of the crosshair position?Map scale selectedXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Using map and press W to confirm.The map with crosshair is shown.Display = depends on the settings selectedin "Map information in the display"(Y page 114). If the digital map contains thenecessary data, the current road is shown. Ifthe geo-coordinates display is switched on,the geo-coordinates of the crosshair areshown.Moving the map and selecting the des-tinationXCall up the destination entry via the map(Y page 73).XTo scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ oraVb the COMAND controller.XTo set the map scale: as soon as you turncVd the COMAND controller, the scale barappears.XTurn cVd until the desired scale is set.Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;turning anti-clockwise zooms in.XTo select a destination: press W theCOMAND controller.If the crosshair lies outside the digital map,COMAND Online uses the nearest digitisedroad for route calculation. The The cross‐hair is outside the digitalised area of the map message is shown. If thecrosshair is located over a body of water,you will see the message: The destina‐tion is located in a body of water. Please select another des‐tination.XSelect OK and press W to confirm.If the destination is within the limits of thedigital map, COMAND Online attempts toassign the destination to the map.If the destination can be assigned, you willsee the address entry menu with theaddress of the destination. If not, you willsee the Destination from map entry.XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Entering a destination using geo-coor-dinatesGeo-coordinates input menuEntering a destination 73NavigationZ
XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Using geo-coordinates andpress W to confirm.The geo-coordinates input menu is shown.You can now enter the latitude and longitudecoordinates with the COMAND controller orthe number keypad (Y page 37).XTo change a value: turn cVd theCOMAND controller.XTo move the selection within the line:slide XVY the COMAND controller.XTo move the selection between lines:slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.XTo confirm the value: press W theCOMAND controller.iIf the selected position is outside the dig-ital map, COMAND Online uses the nearestdigitised road for route calculation. You willsee the The co-ordinates are out‐side the map message. If the selectedposition is located over a body of water, youwill see the The destination is loca‐ted in a body of water. Please select another destination. mes-sage.Entering a destination usingMercedes-Benz AppsXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Mercedes-Benz Apps and pressW to confirm.If an Internet connection is established, youwill see the message Do you want to accept the navigation data sent via Mercedes-Benz Apps?Street ViewXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the lower menu barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Address entry and press W toconfirm.XSelect icon : in the address entry menuand press W to confirm.If an Internet connection is established, youwill see the Street View basic display.XTo explore the view of the street: turncVd or slide XVY, ZVÆ the COMANDcontroller.XTo return to the navigation system:press the % button.74 Entering a destinationNavigation
Entering waypointsIntroductionYou can map the route yourself by enteringup to four waypoints. The sequence of thewaypoints can be changed at any time.COMAND Online provides a selection of pre-defined destinations in eight categories forthis purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or COF‐FEE SHOP. You can also use the destinationentry options to enter waypoints.Creating waypointsWaypoint menu (with destination, without way-point)XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Way points and press W to con-firm.The destination is entered into the way-points menu. The waypoints are not yetentered.XConfirm Add: by pressing W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect the category or Other by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.After selecting a category, the POIs whichare available along the route and in thevicinity are displayed.COMAND Online first searches for destina-tions along the route. If there are no desti-nations available there, it then continuessearching for destinations within a radiusof approximately 100 km of the vehicleposition.XAfter selecting Other, select one of thedestination entry options from the list.Selection StepAddress entry XEnter a destina-tion by address(Y page 65).From memory XSelect a destina-tion from the des-tination memory(Y page 71).From last desti‐nationsXSelect a destina-tion from the listof last destina-tions (Y page 72).From POIs XSelect a POI(Y page 78).Entering a destination 75NavigationZ
Selection StepFrom personal POIsXEnter a destina-tion from the per-sonal POIs(Y page 86).Using map XEnter a destina-tion using the map(Y page 73).Using geo-coor‐dinatesXEnter a destina-tion using the geo-coordinates(Y page 73).XSelect POI and press W to confirm.After selecting a POI or entering a destina-tion, the address of the waypoint is dis-played.After entering a destination using the map,the address entry menu is displayed. OK ishighlighted.XTo accept the waypoint: confirm OK bypressing W.When you have accepted the waypoint, it isentered in the waypoint menu.XTo display the details: select Details byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XTo make a call: select Call with theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm. COMAND Online switches to tele-phone mode (Y page 140).iThis menu item is available if the waypointhas a telephone number and a mobilephone is connected to COMAND Online(Y page 132).XTo call up the map: select Map with theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XYou can move the map and select the des-tination.XTo store the waypoint in the destination memory: select Presets with theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm (Y page 109).Waypoint menu with two waypoint entriesEditing waypointsYou can:Rchange waypointsRchange the sequence in the waypoint menuRdeleted76 Entering a destinationNavigation
To change the sequence, at least one way-point and the destination must be entered.XSelect a waypoint in the waypoint menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.A menu appears.XTo change a waypoint: select Edit fromthe menu and press W to confirm.XChange the address, e.g. the town andstreet, and confirm with OK.The waypoint menu appears and displaysthe modified waypoint.You can change the sequence of the way-points and the destination.XTo change the sequence: from the menu,select Move by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller andmove the waypoint or destination to thedesired position, then press W to confirm.XTo delete waypoints: from the menu,select Delete and press W to confirm.Accepting waypoints for the routeXSelect Start in the waypoint menu by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The route is calculated with the enteredwaypoints.iContinue is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate alternative routes is activated in the navigation menu(Y page 97).iIf a waypoint has been passed duringroute guidance, the waypoint will be dis-played in the waypoint menu with a greenarrow. Once the route has been recalcula-ted, the waypoint is deleted from the way-point menu.Searching for a filling station when thefuel level is lowIf the reserve fuel warning is displayed, youwill see the message: Fuel tank reserve level. Do you want to start the search for filling stations?.XSelect Yes or No.If you select Yes, the filling station searchstarts. When the search is complete, a listof the filling stations available along theroute or in the vicinity is displayed.Entering a destination 77NavigationZ
If you select No, the search is cancelled.XSelect a filling station and press W to con-firm.The address of the filling station is dis-played.XConfirm Start by pressing W.The selected filling station is entered intoposition 1 of the waypoints menu. Routeguidance begins.If the waypoints menu already containsfour waypoints, a prompt will be displayed,asking you whether you wish to enter thefilling station into position 1. If you selectYes, the filling station is transferred into thelist and waypoint 4 is deleted.Entering a POICalling up the POI menuExample: POI menuPOIs are predefined destinations within cat-egories, e.g. a filling station in the AUTOMO‐TIVE category.XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From POIs and press W to confirm.A menu appears.XChoose one of the options and press W toconfirm.Further steps are arranged in a tableaccording to the option selected(Y page 79).78 Entering a POINavigation
Defining the position for the POI searchSelection Characteristic InstructionsIn the vicinity of the destina‐tionEntry is only possiblewhen route guidance isactive.XSelect Near destination from the POImenu and press W to confirm.XSelect a POI category (Y page 80).Current posi‐tionThe system looks for aPOI in the vicinity of thecurrent vehicle position.XSelect Current position in the POImenu and press W to confirm.XSelect a POI category (Y page 80).Other town After entering a town,the system looks for thePOI within the town.Option 1XSelect Other town in the POI menu andpress W to confirm.XSelect the country, if desired(Y page 66).XEnter the town. Proceed as described inthe "Entering a town" section(Y page 66).XSelect a POI category (Y page 80).Option 2XEnter a town in the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect POI and press W to confirm.XSelect a POI category (Y page 65).Search by name You can call up all thePOIs in the digital map orfocus your search on thethree previously selec-ted positions.XSelect Search by name in the POI menuand press W to confirm.XSelect All POIs or one of the three pre-viously selected positions.The POI list with character bar appears.XProceed as described in the "POI list withcharacter bar" section (Y page 81).Search by phone numberThis function gives youaccess to all POIs thathave a phone number.XSelect Search by phone number andpress W to confirm.You will see a list of phone numbers.XProceed as described in the "POI list withcharacter bar" section (Y page 81).Entering a POI 79NavigationZ
Search by POI categoryPOI category listXCalling up the POI menu (Y page 78).After entering a town, the POI category listappears after choosing the menu itemNear destination, Current positionor Other town.XSelect a POI category by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm. The G arrow behind an entry showsthat other categories are available.FILLING STATION category selectedXSelect an entry and press W to confirm.The search for POIs begins in the vicinity ofthe selected position.Example: POI search near the current positionThe example shows a search after selectionof the FILLING STATION entry.iThe POI search is cancelled when 50 POIshave been found.COMAND Online searches within a radiusof approximately 100 km.Once the search is completed, the POI listis displayed.If COMAND Online does not find any POIswithin this radius, it extends its searchrange to approximately 200 km.If COMAND Online finds one POI within thisradius, it finishes the search.POI listIntroductionExample: POI listThe POI list displays the search results for thecategory in the vicinity of the selected posi-tion.80 Entering a POINavigation
The search results display the following infor-mation:Ran arrow that shows the linear direction tothe POIRthe linear distance to the POIRthe name of the POIiThe arrow and linear distance to the des-tination are not visible if you have entereda POI after entering another town.The arrow is also not shown when search-ing for a POI in the vicinity of the destina-tion.Depending on the POI selected,COMAND Online uses different referencepoints in determining the linear distance tothe destination:Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis-tance is the distance from the currentvehicle position to the POI.Rvicinity of destination: the linear distanceis the distance of the POI from the des-tination entered.Selecting a POI:POI with address;To start route calculation=To store an address in the destinationmemory?To display detailsATo make a call (when available)BTo display a POI's position on the mapThe example has been selected in the BAR & RESTAURANT POI category. Further infor-mation on searching via POI categories(Y page 80).XSelect the POI in the POI list by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The full address of the POI selectedappears.XTo start route calculation: selectStart; and press W to confirm.XTo store an address in the destination memory: select Save= and press W toconfirm. You can now select storingoptions (Y page 109).XTo show the detailed view: selectDetails? and press W to confirm.XTo make a call: select CallA and pressW to confirm. COMAND Online switches totelephone mode (Y page 139).iThis menu item is available if the POI hasa telephone number and a mobile phone isconnected to COMAND Online(Y page 132).XTo call up the map: select MapB andpress W to confirm.XYou can move the map and select the des-tination (Y page 73).POI list with character barExample: search by name in the vicinity of the des-tinationIf you have selected Search by name in thePOI menu and then defined the position forEntering a POI 81NavigationZ
the search (Y page 79), the POI list with char-acter bar appears.Depending on your selection, you can selectall available POIs on the digital map or thePOIs in the vicinity of the selected position.XProceed as described in "Searching for aphone book entry" (Y page 145).If COMAND Online can assign the charac-ters entered to one entry unambiguously,the address entry appears automatically.XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Selecting a POI using the mapPOI on the mapYou can select POIs that are available in theselected (visible) section of the map. The POIis highlighted on the map, you will see furtherinformation on the upper edge of the display.XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Guide in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If POIs are available:Depending on the map scale selected, POIicons appear on the map. The scale atwhich the icons are displayed on the mapvaries according to the icon. You can selectthe icons that you want COMAND Online todisplay.If there are POIs, you will see a message tothis effect.iYou also see this message if you haveselected the No symbols menu item under"Map display" (Y page 113).XTo confirm the message: press W theCOMAND controller.XTo select a POI: select Next or Previousand press W to confirm.XTo show details for the selection: selectDetails and press W to confirm.XTo change to the map: slide ZV theCOMAND controller.You can move the map and select the mapsection.XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether the POIshould be used as the destination.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, route guidance starts.If you select No, you can choose a new POI.iContinue is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate alternative routes isactivated in the navigation menu(Y page 97).Personal POIsGeneral notesiThe use of personal POIs to display trafficmonitoring installations is not permitted inall countries. Please observe the country-specific regulations and always drive at asuitable speed.82 Personal POIsNavigation
SettingsCalling up the "Personal POIs" menu"Personal POIs" menuXTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Personal POIs and press W toconfirm.Displaying personal POIs on the mapThe personal POIs are shown on the map withan icon according to their category.XCall up the "Personal POIs" menu(Y page 83).XSelect Display personal POIs on mapin the menu and press W to confirm.You can select different categories.Selection ExplanationªNot clas‐sifiedStandard entry for per-sonal POIsªCOMAND OnlinePersonal POIs (destina-tions, routes) that youhave imported via theonline function(Y page 185).If you have created your own categories (e.g."Café", "Top 10"), they are also displayed(Y page 84).XSelect a category and press W to confirm.The icon display is switched on O or offª, depending on the previous status.iThe icons are displayed on the 50 m,100 m, 200 m and 500 m map scales.Visual information for personal POIsExample: visual information for a personal POIIf the vehicle is approaching a personal POI,this is highlighted on the map. The display forthe corresponding category must be activa-ted for this.XCall up the "Personal POIs" menu(Y page 83).XIn the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis‐ual warning for personal POIs andpress W to confirm.The menu displays the available categories.Personal POIs 83NavigationZ
XSelect a category and press W to confirm.This will switch the visual warning for allpersonal POIs of this category on O or offª, depending on the previous setting.Acoustic notification for personal POIsA gong sounds when the vehicle is approach-ing a personal POI. The function for the cor-responding category must be activated forthis.XCall up the "Personal POIs" menu(Y page 83).XIn the "Personal POIs" menu, select Acous‐tic notification for personal POIsand press W to confirm.The menu displays the available categories.XSelect a category and press W to confirm.This will switch the acoustic notification forall personal POIs of this category on O oroff ª, depending on the previous setting.Managing categories for personal POIsXCall up the "Personal POIs" menu(Y page 83).XIn the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man‐age categories for personal POIsand press W to confirm.XTo create a new category: select New andpress W to confirm.XEnter the name of the category. Characterentry (Y page 34).XSelect the ¬ symbol and press W toconfirm.A list with symbols appears. You can assigna symbol to the category.XSelect an icon by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You have created a new category with aname and icon. This category appearswhen selecting the display on the map orwhen selecting the destination.XTo rename a category, to change an icon: select Rename or Change icon andpress W to confirm.XProceed as described under "To create anew category".XTo delete a category: select Delete andpress W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether the cat-egory should be deleted.iIf you delete a category, all POIs of thiscategory are also deleted.XSelect Yes and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the category will bedeleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.84 Personal POIsNavigation
Managing personal POIsXCall up the "Personal POIs" menu(Y page 83).XSelect Manage personal POIs in themenu and press W to confirm.XSelect Not classified, COMAND Onlineor your own category and press W to con-firm.XSelect a personal POI and press W to con-firm.The personal POI is displayed.Observe the additional information on man-aging personal POI categories (Y page 86):RRenamingRChanging the categoryRDeletingSaving personal POIsThere are three ways of saving personal POIs.You must insert an SD memory card to do so.The No memory card message otherwiseappears.Personal POIs and routes are saved on thememory card in the same data format inwhich the geographical data is stored. Thisformat is based on the open GPX (GPSExchange) format.Option 1XInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XHide the menu to show the map in fullscreen mode (Y page 63).XPress W the COMAND controller for longerthan two seconds.The current position of the vehicle is savedas a personal POI on the SD memory cardin the Not classified category.iThe crosshair position is saved in thescrolling map function (Y page 112).Option 2XInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Save position as pers. POI orSave crosshair pos. as personal POI ("Move map" function active) and pressW to confirm.The list of personal categories appears.XSelect a category and press W to confirm.XEnter the name for the personal POI. Char-acter entry (Y page 34).Option 3XInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XCall up the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Save from the address entry menuand press W to confirm.XSelect Save as personal POI and pressW to confirm.XSelect a category.XEnter the name.The current address is saved as a personalPOI on the SD memory card.Importing personal POIs via the onlinefunctionYou can import personal POIs (destinations,routes) via the online function (Y page 185).When importing, you can choose whether towrite files to the SD memory card or to filethem in the address book. The imported per-sonal POIs have their own icon and are filedin the COMAND Online category.Personal POIs 85NavigationZ
Selecting as the destinationXInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From personal POIs and pressW to confirm.The categories of personal POIs appear.Selection ExplanationNot classi‐fiedStandard entry for per-sonal POIs.COMAND OnlinePersonal POIs which youhave imported via theonline function(Y page 185).COFFEE SHOP Icon and category thatyou have created yourself(Y page 84).In the example, the COMAND Online categoryis selected.The personal POIs received are displayed.XSelect a personal POI and press W to con-firm.XTo rename a personal POI: selectRename and press W to confirm.XTo change the category: select Change category and press W to confirm.XTo change to the map: select Map andpress W to confirm.The position of the personal POI is shownin the map.iAn icon is displayed according to the "Dis-playing personal POIs on the map" setting(Y page 83).XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.If route guidance has been activated, aprompt will appear asking whether youwish to accept the personal POI as the des-tination.86 Personal POIsNavigation
If route guidance has not been activated,route calculation for the personal POI willstart immediately.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the personal POI is accep-ted as the destination.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XTo make a call: select Call and press Wto confirm. COMAND Online switches totelephone mode (Y page 141).iCall is available if the personal POI has atelephone number and a mobile phone isconnected to COMAND Online(Y page 132).XTo delete a personal POI: select Deleteand press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto delete the POI.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the personal POI isdeleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.ViaMichelin travel guideOverviewIf COMAND Online offers the ViaMichelintravel guide in navigation mode, you canselect tourist destinations, including routes.In this case, the travel guide data is on a SDmemory card. First place the SD memory cardin the SD card slot (Y page 217).You can download available updates from theMercedes-Benz webshop.iYou can also subsequently obtain travelguide data from the Mercedes-Benz Acces-sory webshop.The travel guide offers you tourist destina-tions and routes:Rin the vicinity of the current vehicle positionRalong the calculated routeRin the vicinity of the destinationRthrough selection on the mapRon a specific topic, for example, Paris, theAlps or German wine routesYou can select:Rwhich travel guide data on the map can beshown and selected (e.g. restaurants andtourist routes)Rwhether information on tourist destina-tions is read out as you approach themActivating/deactivating travel guidedataCategories for the display of travel guide data onthe mapTravel guide data is stored in categories, suchas e.g. restaurants or tourist routes. In themenu, you can select which travel guide cat-egories are shown on the map, and thereforewhich can be selected. You can also deter-mine whether available information on theViaMichelin travel guide 87NavigationZ
tourist destination of a particular category isacoustically provided as you approach it.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu bar: press W theCOMAND controller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Travel guide and press W to con-firm.XSelect Map icons or Acoustic announcement and press W to confirm.The menu displays the available categories.XSelect a category and press W to confirm.Switch the category on O or off ª.If you selected Map icons and switched ona category, you can select the availabletourist destinations of that category on themap.If you selected Acoustic announcementand switched on a category, you hear infor-mation as you approach a tourist destina-tion. The information must be available asan audio file for this destination.Calling up the travel guideUsing destination entrySelecting search position for travel guide (usingdestination entry)XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu bar: press W theCOMAND controller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Travel guide and press W to con-firm.XNo destination has been entered yet:select Current position, Using map orTopics.XA route has already been entered: youcan also select Along the route andNear destination.Using the guideSelecting search position for travel guide (usingguide)88 ViaMichelin travel guideNavigation
XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu bar: press W theCOMAND controller.XSelect Guide in the navigation systemmenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Travel guide and press W to con-firm.XNo destination has been entered yet:select Current position, Using map orTopics.XA route has already been entered: youcan also select Along the route andNear destination.Selecting topicsYou can choose from a variety of topics. Top-ics can be listed based on places (e.g.coun-tryside) or on content (e.g. wine guide).XCall up the travel guide (Y page 88).XSelect Topics.A list appears.XSelect a topic and press W to confirm.The system selects a map view that allowsthe tourist destinations and routes for thetopic to be displayed.XSelect a tourist destination or route on themap and press W to confirm.Selecting a destination or a route onthe mapTo select tourist destinations/routes, firstselect the search position and then the cor-responding symbol on the map.XCall up the travel guide (Y page 88).XSelect a search position, e.g. Using map.The map appears.XSelect a menu item and press W to confirm(see table).Menu item ExplanationSettings In the settings, you canselect which selectabletravel guide data is shownon the map.Prev. (previ-ous) or NextHighlights the previous ornext symbol on the map.Details Shows detailed informa-tion about the destinationor route. You may alsouse further functions, e.g.calling the hotel or listen-ing to an audio file aboutthe place of interest (ifavailable).ViaMichelin travel guide 89NavigationZ
Menu item ExplanationMap Switches to the map withthe crosshair. You canslide the crosshair andchange the map scale.Start Begins route calculationfor the selected destina-tion.Exploring the destination or routeBefore the route calculation, you can call upuseful information on the selected destina-tion.iNot every tourist destination or route hasimages, texts or audio files available.Destination address is displayed (example)XCall up the travel guide (Y page 88).XSelect a search position, e.g. Using map.The map appears.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The destination address is shown.XTo display images: select Images andpress W to confirm.One or more photos of the tourist destina-tion are shown.XTo display text information: select Infoand press W to confirm.A short text provides interesting detailsabout the tourist destination.XTo play an audio file: select M and pressW to confirm.You hear useful information about the tou-rist destination.XTo stop playback, select ¯ and press Wto confirm.XTo call the destination: select Call andpress W to confirm.If a mobile phone is connected to COMANDOnline, the telephone function is activatedand the call is connected (Y page 141).XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Example: tourist route is displayedIf you have selected a tourist route, the mapshows an overview of the route.Above, the following functions are described:Rdisplaying picturesRshowing text informationRplaying an audio fileRcalling up the destinationXTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.Route guidanceImportant notesCOMAND Online calculates the route to thedestination without taking account of the fol-lowing, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and give way signs90 Route guidanceNavigation
Rparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsCOMAND Online may give differing drivingrecommendations if the data on the digitalmap does not correspond to the actual con-ditions, such as if the road layout haschanged.For this reason, you must always observeroad and traffic rules and regulations duringyour journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-ulations always have priority over systemdriving recommendations.Route guidance begins once a route has beencalculated (Y page 68).COMAND Online guides you to your destina-tion by means of navigation announcementsin the form of audible navigation announce-ments and route guidance displays.The route guidance displays can be seen if thedisplay is switched to navigation mode.If you do not follow the navigation announce-ments or if you leave the calculated route,COMAND Online automatically calculates anew route to the destination.If the digital map contains the correspondinginformation, the following applies:Rduring route guidance, COMAND Onlinetries to avoid roads with restricted access.Those roads, for example, that are closedto through-traffic.Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.closed on Sundays and public holidays) areconsidered for route guidance on dayswhen they are open. For this purpose, therelevant times must be correctly stored inthe database.Displays during route guidanceChanging directionChanges of direction have three phases:Rpreparation phaseRannouncement phaseRchange-of-direction phaseExample: preparation phase:Point at which the change of directiontakes place (light blue dot);Next road=Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-angle indicates the vehicle’s direction oftravel)?Current roadDisplay ? depends on the setting selectedunder "Map information in the display"(Y page 114).COMAND Online prepares you for the upcom-ing change of direction. Based on the exam-ple display below, the change of direction isannounced by the Prepare to turn right message. You see the full-screen map.Route guidance 91NavigationZ
Example: announcement phase:Next road;Point at which the change of directiontakes place (light blue dot, shown in boththe left and right half of the display)=Graphic representation of the distance tothe next change of direction?Change of direction (turn right here)ADistance to the next change of directionBRoute (blue line, shown in both the leftand right half of the display)iThe filled-in section of visual display fordistance = gets shorter the nearer you getto the announced change of direction.COMAND Online announces the imminentchange of direction. Based on the exampledisplay below, the change of direction isannounced beforehand by the message: In 400 metres turn right onto the A81.The display is now split into two sectors. Inthe left half, you see the normal map view.The right-hand half shows:Ran enlarged section of the area around thejunction (crossing zoom) orRa 3D image of the road's course with theroute indicating the next change of direc-tionExample: change-of-direction phase:Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-angle indicates the vehicle’s direction oftravel);Graphic representation of the distance tothe next change of direction=Distance to the next change of directionCOMAND Online announces the imminentchange of direction.Based on the example display below, thechange of direction is announced 40 metresbefore the change of direction with the Now turn right message.The display is split into two halves, as in theannouncement phase.Once the change of direction is completed,COMAND Online automatically switches backto full-screen display.Example display: roundabout92 Route guidanceNavigation
Example of a display without a changeof direction:Route (highlighted in blue);Current vehicle position=Current road?Map orientation selectedAMap scale selectedLane recommendationsExample: lane recommendations:Point of the next change of direction;Point of the change of direction after next=Direction display, number of junction andof motorway?Graphic representation of the distance tothe next change of directionADistance to the next change of directionBRecommended lane (dark blue)CNext change of direction (in this case, exitto the right)DPossible lanes (light blue)ENon-recommended lanes (light brown orlight grey)FCurrent vehicle position (the tip of the tri-angle indicates the vehicle’s direction oftravel)On multilane roads, COMAND Online can dis-play lane recommendations for the nextchange of direction. The corresponding datamust be available on the digital map.COMAND Online displays lane recommenda-tion B, based on the next two changes ofdirection. The number of lanes applies to thepoint at which the next change of direction isrequired.iThe multifunction display also shows lanerecommendations.Only the recommended lanes are displayedhere; see separate vehicle Owner's Man-ual.Route guidance 93NavigationZ
Display and description of lane recom-mendationsLane DaydesignNightdesignRecommended laneIn this lane, you willbe able to completethe next twochanges of directionwithout changinglane.DarkblueLightbluePossible laneIn this lane, you willonly be able to com-plete the nextchange of directionwithout changinglane.LightblueDarkblueLane not recom-mendedIn this lane, you willnot be able to com-plete the nextchange of directionwithout changinglane.Lightbrown orlight greyGreyiThe colours used in the lane recommen-dation display vary depending on whetherday or night design is switched on.:New lane (dark blue)During the change of direction, additionallanes may appear. These are displayed differ-ently.Example: day design:The displayed lane recommendationsapply to this position (light blue circle)Example: night designExample: lane recommendations at a motorwayjunctionObserve the route guidance informationshown in the multifunction display, see theseparate vehicle Owner's Manual.94 Route guidanceNavigation
Navigation announcementsRepeating navigation announcementsIf you have missed an announcement, you cancall up the current announcement at anytime.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect + in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.Switching navigation announcementsoff/onXTo switch off: press the 8 button dur-ing an announcement.You will briefly see the message: The guidance instructions have been muted.XTo switch on: press W the COMAND con-troller.XSelect + in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.iCOMAND Online automatically switchesthe navigation announcements back onwhen:Rit receives RDS-TMC traffic reports dur-ing dynamic route guidance and recalcu-lates the route accordingly(Y page 103)Ryou calculate a new routeRyou switch COMAND Online on again orstart the engineSwitching announcements and audiofadeout on/offXSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Announcements and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.You can activate/deactivate the followingfunctions:RAnnouncing the street namesStreet names are announced duringroute guidance.RAudible info during a phone callDuring a phone call, navigationannouncements and traffic reports areaudible in the background.RAudio fadeoutThe volume of an active audio or videosource is automatically reduced during anavigation announcement.RReserve fuel indicatorOnce you have reached reserve fuellevel, you will see a query asking whetheryou wish to start the search for a fillingstation (Y page 77).XSelect the function and press W to confirm.Switch the function on O or off ª.Setting the volume manuallyXAdjust the volume using the q controlknob during a navigation announcement.orXSelect + in the map view with the menushown and adjust the volume using theq control knob.Announcing the street namesIf the function is switched on, the name of thestreet into which you should turn isannounced.Route guidance 95NavigationZ
Announcements are not made in the chosenlanguage in all countries. They are made whenrelevant street names for the selected lan-guage are available in the database.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Announce street names and pressW to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.Street names may be announced in the fol-lowing languages:RDanishRGermanREnglishRFrenchRDutchRPortugueseRSwedishQuitting route guidanceCancelling or continuing route guidanceXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XTo cancel route guidance: select Cancel route guidance and press W to confirm.orXTo continue route guidance: select Con‐tinue route guidance and press W toconfirm.COMAND Online calculates the route.Destination or area of destinationreachedWhen you reach your destination, COMANDOnline displays a chequered flag and routeguidance is automatically ended.If the destination is not in close proximity toa digitised street, the Area of destina‐tion reached message appears when thedestination is reached.Influencing route guidanceAvoiding a section of the route blockedby a traffic jam:Length of the blocked route section;Name of route section=Blocked route sectionThis function blocks a section of the routeahead of you. You can set the length of theblocked route section. If possible, COMANDOnline calculates a detour around theblocked section of the route.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.96 Route guidanceNavigation
XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Route in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Detour and press W to confirm.XTo block a section of the route: selectLonger or Shorter repeatedly and confirmusing W until the desired section has beenselected.iThe total length of the section that can beblocked is defined by the digital map. Themenu items are available accordingly.XTo start route calculation: select Startand press W to confirm.XTo delete the blocked section: selectDelete while the message is shown andpress W to confirm.COMAND Online calculates the route with-out the block.Selecting an alternative routeWith the "Alternative route" function, routesother than the original one can be calculated.Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the currentsettings for the route type and route optionsand are shown with a dark blue line(Y page 64).Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) andis shown with a green line.On the right-hand side, you will see informa-tion on the currently selected alternativeroute, e.g. distance, estimated remainingdriving time and estimated time of arrival.Route sections used (e.g. motorways, tun-nels) are displayed as symbols.Option 1XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Route in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Alternative route and press Wto confirm.Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (ecoroute)Option 2XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Calculate alternative routesand press W to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.Function is activated: alternative routesare calculated directly after the destinationis entered.Route guidance 97NavigationZ
Menu functionsXTo select the next or previous alterna-tive route: select Next or Previous andpress W to confirm.XTo start route guidance using the selec-ted alternative route: select Start andpress W to confirm.COMAND Online begins route guidance onthe selected alternative route.Route informationDisplaying destination informationExample: destination informationThe example shows information on distance,estimated time of arrival and estimatedremaining driving time to the destination Oand two way points.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Route in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Destination information andpress W to confirm.Destination information is displayed.XTo call up further destination informa-tion: turn cVd the COMAND controller.XTo close the destination information:slide XVY the COMAND controller or pressthe % back button.iYou can display destination informationfor the destination, for both waypoints andthe intermediate stop, if they are part of theroute.If a mobile phone is connected to COMANDOnline and a phone number is included inthe destination information, you can call it(Y page 132).Route overviewYou can use the route overview to move alongthe active route section by section and viewinformation and details about each section ofthe route.You can see information relevant to the sec-tion of the route, such as the length of theroad section you will be driving along and theroad name. The highlighted route section ismarked in white with a red border on the map.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Route in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Route browser and press W toconfirm.98 Route guidanceNavigation
XTo view the next or previous route sec-tion: select Next or Previous and pressW to confirm.iIf the first or last route section is high-lighted, you cannot select Previous orNext.XTo zoom in or out of the map: select Nor M and press W to confirm.XTo close the route overview: selectBack and press W to confirm.Route demonstrationYou can see the route before starting yourjourney. This function is only available whenthe vehicle is stationary.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Route in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Route demonstration and pressW to confirm.The map with the crosshair appears.XTo get to the destination: press W toconfirm the highlighted symbol.XTo stop the route demonstration: con-firm the Ë symbol by pressing W.Example: route demonstration stopped:Display of street name and city whenroute demonstration is paused;Distance of the crosshair from currentvehicle positionXTo get to the current vehicle position:press W to confirm the symbol for the cur-rent vehicle position.XTo change the map scale: select Scaleand press W to confirm.The scale bar appears.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.Recording the routeNotesIf you have activated COMAND Online and theSD memory card has been inserted, youshould not take it out of the slot.When you record a route, COMAND Onlineuses so-called support points and displaysthe route as a series of lines. If the route isthen calculated, COMAND Online attempts toalign the recorded route with the digital map.The support points of the route may not be ona digitised road.Route guidance 99NavigationZ
This is often the case with routes which aredrawn up using other map data and importedvia the online function, e.g.:Rroutes from the Google™ Local Search(Y page 180)Rroutes from the destination/route down-load (Y page 185)Calling up the Routes menuXInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Routes.Starting/ending recording:To indicate recording has started (REC isred)XCall up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).XTo start recording: select Start record‐ing in the "Routes" menu by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The route is recorded and entered in a list.#REC is displayed in red :.XTo end recording: select Stop record‐ing in the "Routes" menu by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.Displaying and editing the recordedrouteXInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XCall up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).XSelect List in the "Routes" menu by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Previously recorded routes are displayed.100 Route guidanceNavigation
XSelect a route and press W to confirm.The map appears with a menu. The recor-ded route is shown in the map with a bluedotted line.XTo view a demonstration of the route on the map: select Demo by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The map with the crosshair appears.XProceed as described in the "Route dem-onstration" section (Y page 99).XTo begin route calculation: select Startin the menu by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.COMAND Online attempts to align therecorded route with the digital map.Changing route names and iconsXSelect Edit in the menu by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XTo change the route name: selectRename and press W to confirm.iThe name cannot be changed while thevehicle is in motion.XTo change the icon: select Change iconand press W to confirm.Please see further information on managingcategories for personal POIs (Y page 84).To change direction for route calcula-tion: you can set the icon for the route to thestarting point or to the destination, therebychanging the direction for route calculation.During route calculation, one-way streets orturn restrictions, for example, are taken intoaccount. Therefore, the outward and returnroutes may differ from each other.XSelect Swap in the menu by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XTo delete a route: select Delete in themenu by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether the routeshould be deleted.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the route will be deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Scanning the memoryThe SD memory card is inserted.Route guidance 101NavigationZ
XCall up the "Routes" menu (Y page 100).XSelect Presets in the "Routes" menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The route memory is displayed.Off-road and off-mapRoute guidance to a destination that isnot on a digitised roadExample: route guidance to an off-road destination:Off-road destination;Off-road route section (dashed blue)=Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-angle indicates the vehicle’s direction oftravel)COMAND Online can guide you to destina-tions which are within the area of the digitalmap, but which are not themselves recordedon the map.These destinations are known as off-roaddestinations, which you can enter using themap, for example. In these cases, COMANDOnline guides you for as long as possible withnavigation announcements and displays onroads known to the system.Shortly before you reach the last known pointon the map, you will hear the "Area of desti-nation reached" announcement. The displayshows a direction arrow with the linear dis-tance to the destination.Route guidance from an off-road loca-tion to a destinationIf the vehicle position is within the area cov-ered by the digital map, but the map does notcontain any information about that location,the vehicle is in an off-road location.COMAND Online is also able to guide you toa destination even from an off-road location.At the start of route guidance, you will see theStreet unknown message, an arrow and thedistance to the destination. The arrow showsthe compass heading to the actual destina-tion.The route is highlighted blue, starting fromthe last recognised street the vehicle was onbefore it left the map.As soon as the vehicle is back on a roadknown to the system, route guidance contin-ues in the usual way.Route guidance from an off-map loca-tion to a destinationIf the vehicle position is outside the area cov-ered by the digital map, then the vehicle is inan off-map location. COMAND Online is alsoable to guide you to a destination even froman off-map location.At the start of route guidance, you will see theStreet unknown message, an arrow and thedistance to the destination. The directionarrow shows the compass heading to the des-tination.The route is highlighted blue from the nearestroad known to the system.As soon as the vehicle is back on a roadknown to the system, route guidance contin-ues in the usual way.Off-road during route guidanceDue to roadworks, for example, there may bedifferences between the data on the digitalmap and the actual course of the road.In such cases, the system will temporarily beunable to locate the vehicle position on the102 Route guidanceNavigation
digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-road position.In the display, you will see the Street unknown message, an arrow and the distanceto the destination. The direction arrow showsthe compass heading to the destination.As soon as the system can assign the vehicleposition to the map again, route guidancecontinues in the usual way.Dynamic route guidanceIntroductionTraffic reports via TMCAn RDS-TMC radio station transmits RDS-TMC traffic reports in addition to the radioprogramme. COMAND Online can receiveRDS-TMC traffic reports and take them intoconsideration for dynamic (traffic-depend-ent) route guidance. The navigation systemcan, for example, guide you around a trafficjam.In Germany, COMAND Online uses high-qual-ity traffic data for the TMCpro traffic jamwarning system. In contrast to the public TMCservice, TMCPro uses exclusive traffic datathat is detected with an automated sensornetwork, in addition to the messages gener-ated by the TMC service. The traffic datareceived from the traffic jam warning servicesnamed above could differ.There may also be differences between thetraffic reports received and the actual roadand traffic conditions.The respective traffic data being receivedappears at the bottom right of the display withthe symbols "TMCPro" or "TMC". If there is noreception, no symbol is displayed.iRDS-TMC is not available in all countries.Switching dynamic route guidanceon/offIf Dynamic route or Eco route is selectedas the route type, RDS-TMC traffic reports aretaken into account for route guidance.The Fast route and Short route routetypes do not take RDS-TMC traffic reportsinto account for route guidance.Selecting route type (Y page 64).iCOMAND Online calculates a new route ifyou change the route type setting withroute guidance active. If you change theroute type setting when route guidance isinactive, COMAND Online uses the newsetting for the next route guidance.RDS-TMC displays on the mapExample: traffic reports on the mapRDS-TMC symbols:Traffic jam on the route;Slow-moving traffic on the route=Road blockedDynamic route guidance 103NavigationZ
?Road blockedASlow-moving traffic (yellow line along theaffected route)BTraffic jam (red line along the affectedroute)iThe display shows the entire affectedroute section with the corresponding sym-bols, regardless of how long the incidentactually is. The symbols are placed on theside of the carriageway affected by the inci-dent.COMAND Online can show certain traffic inci-dents on the map. The displays can be shownin map scales of 50 m to 20 km.XTo set the map scale: turn cVd theCOMAND controller until the desired mapscale is set.Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;turning anti-clockwise zooms in.Displaying RDS-TMC traffic reportsStarting a search for traffic reportsXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TMC in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.A menu appears. COMAND Online firstsearches for RDS-TMC stations withinreceiver range. If RDS-TMC stations arefound, a search for traffic reports is thenstarted.If no RDS-TMC stations are found, or thereare no traffic reports, you will see a mes-sage to this effect.XTo close the message: confirm OK by press-ing W the COMAND controller.Traffic symbol informationExample display:Affected section of motorway;Symbol for incident (traffic jam in theexample shown)=Symbol display for the section of routeaffectedXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TMC in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Traffic symbol informationand press W to confirm.XTo show the next/previous incident:select Next or Previous (if available) andpress W to confirm.XTo show the detailed view: selectDetails and press W to confirm.XTo scroll the map: select Map and pressW to confirm.You can move the map to enable furthertraffic reports to be displayed(Y page 112).104 Dynamic route guidanceNavigation
Displaying reports on the route:Country designation, road number, direc-tion and number/total number of reportsfor the affected road (1/2);Section of the road to which the trafficreport applies=Traffic report?Type of traffic report (warning):Traffic jam;Slow-moving traffic=Warning message?Road blockedAConstruction siteXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TMC in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Messages on the route and pressW to confirm.The traffic report is displayed. If there ismore than one traffic report for a section ofthe route, this is indicated by 1/2, forexample.XTo scroll within a report or to access the next report: turn cVd the COMANDcontroller.XTo exit the report: slide XVY theCOMAND controller once or several times.Displaying all traffic reportsExample: list showing all currently available trafficreportsXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TMC in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Display all messages and pressW to confirm.A list is shown containing all roads, areasor regions affected by traffic reports.Roads, areas or regions not on the routealso appear in the list.Dynamic route guidance 105NavigationZ
XTo show a traffic report: select a road, anarea or a region and press W to confirm.The traffic report is displayed. If there ismore than one traffic report for a section ofthe route, this is indicated by 1/2, forexample.You can find an example of a traffic reporthere: (Y page 105).XTo exit the report: slide XVY theCOMAND controller once or several times.Reading out traffic reports on therouteCalling up traffic reportsThe text reader function is only availablewhen route guidance is active.You can select from the following text readerproperties:RLanguage (Y page 47)RText reader speed (Y page 46)XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TMC in the navigation system menubar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Read out all messages on route and press W to confirm.COMAND Online reads out the messagesin sequence.iThe Read out all messages on route menu item has no function if thereare no reports relating to the route.XTo cancel the read-aloud function: selectCancel read-aloud function and pressW to confirm.The current traffic report is read out to theend and then the function is deactivated.orXBriefly press the 8 button.The function is deactivated immediately.iCOMAND Online interrupts the read-aloud function automatically as it recalcu-lates the route following a new RDS-TMCtraffic report.Automatic read-aloud functionYou can have TMC traffic reports on yourroute read aloud automatically. Announce-ments are made as you approach traffic inci-dents.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XTo switch the automatic read-aloud function on/off: select TMC in the naviga-tion system menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Read traffic messages auto‐matically and press W to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.Destination memoryHome address (My address)Entering the home address via addressentryXProceed as described under "Adopting anaddress book entry as a home address"106 Destination memoryNavigation
(Y page 107). Confirm My address bypressing W.XTo enter the home address for the first time: confirm New entry by pressing W.XTo change the home address: selectChange in the menu showing the homeaddress by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XConfirm New entry by pressing W.XIn both cases, enter the home address as adestination, e.g. as a town, street andhouse number (Y page 66). Then, save thehome address (Y page 69).Adopting an address book entry as ahome addressXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From memory and press W to con-firm.You will see the destination memory listeither with the character bar (option 1) oras a selection list (option 2).Option 1: destination memory list with character bar:Entry containing data that can be used fornavigation;To call up optionsXSlide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-edly until the destination memory listappears as a selection list.Option 2: destination memory list as a selection listThe My address entry is listed as the firstentry in the destination memory.XSelect My address by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.iIf you have not yet entered any charac-ters, My address is automatically highligh-ted in the selection list.If no home address has been stored yet, youcan now assign an address book entry. If ahome address already exists, it is displayedand you can alter it.iIf you select New entry, you are alsooffered the option of entering the homeaddress for the first time. You can thenDestination memory 107NavigationZ
save the home address without having tostart route guidance.XTo enter the home address for the first time: select Assign to address book entry and press W to confirm.XSelect Home, Work or Not classified andpress W to confirm.XTo change the home address: selectChange and press W to confirm.XSelect Assign to address book entryand press W to confirm.iIf you select New entry, you are alsooffered the option of changing the homeaddress by entering an address. You canthen save the home address without havingto start route guidance.XSelect Home, Work or Not classified andpress W to confirm.In both cases, you will see the address bookeither with the character bar or as a selec-tion list.XSelect the address book entry(Y page 156).XTo select: press W the COMAND control-ler.If there is no existing home address,COMAND Online saves the entry. You willsee a message and then the address menuwith the selected address. Start is high-lighted automatically.If a home address has already been stored,you will see a prompt asking you whetherthe My address entry should be overwrit-ten.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online over-writes the destination. You will see a mes-sage and then the address menu with theselected address. Start is highlightedautomatically.If you select No, the list will appear again.Selecting the home address for routeguidanceXProceed as described under "Selecting adestination from the destination memory"(Y page 71).Save destinationGeneral notesThis function also stores the destination inthe address book.When the address book is full, no destinationscan be saved in the destination memory. Youmust first delete address book entries(Y page 156).After destination entryXThe destination has been entered and isshown in the address entry menu(Y page 65).XSelect Save by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You can now select storing options(Y page 109).During route guidanceXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Save destination and press W toconfirm.You can now select storage options(Y page 109).From the list of previous destinationsXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.108 Destination memoryNavigation
XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From last destinations andpress W to confirm.The list of previous destinations appears.XSelect a destination by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The destination address is shown.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.You can now select storage options(Y page 109).Selecting storage optionsOnce you have chosen one of the followingoptions for storing a destination, you canspecify storage options:RAfter destination entry (Y page 108)RDuring route guidance (Y page 108)RFrom the list of previous destinations(Y page 72)Storage optionsXTo save the destination without a name: select Save without name andpress W to confirm.COMAND Online stores the destination inthe destination memory and uses theaddress as the destination name.Example: saving a destination with a name:Selected data field with cursor;Character barXTo save the destination with a name:select Save with name and press W toconfirm.XSelect a category, e.g. Home, and press Wto confirm.The input menu appears with data fieldsand the character bar.XProceed as described under "Characterentry (navigation)" (Y page 36).XThen select ¬ and press W to confirm.COMAND Online stores the destinationunder the name entered.An address with complete address data thatis suitable for navigation can be assigned toa pre-existing address book entry.XTo assign an address to an address book entry: select Assign to address book entry and press W to confirm.XSelect a category, e.g. Home, and press Wto confirm.You will see the address book either withthe character bar or as a selection list.XSelect the address book entry(Y page 156).COMAND Online stores the data if theaddress book entry selected does not yetcontain navigable address data.If the selected address book entry alreadycontains navigable address data, a promptDestination memory 109NavigationZ
will appear asking whether you wish tooverwrite the existing data.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online storesthe data.You can now start route guidance to thisaddress directly from the address book(Y page 158).XTo save the destination as My address:select Save as "My address" and pressW to confirm.COMAND Online stores the destination inthe destination memory as My address. Ifthe selected address book entry alreadycontains address data that can be used fornavigation (L icon), a prompt will appearasking whether you wish to overwrite theexisting data.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XTo save the destination as a personal POI: insert the SD memory card(Y page 217).XSelect Save as personal POI and pressW to confirm.XSelect a category.XEnter the name.The current address is saved as a personalPOI on the SD memory card.Deleting a destination or the homeaddressXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From memory and press W to con-firm.You will see the destination memory listeither with the character bar (option 1) oras a selection list (option 2).XOption 1: destination memory list with character bar: enter characters using thecharacter bar (Y page 37).XOption 2: destination memory list as selection list: select a destination by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You see the address data of the selectedentry.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto delete the destination.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online deletesthe destination. You will see a message tothis effect.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.iIf the navigable address data for the des-tination being deleted is also assigned toan address book entry, COMAND Onlinewill also delete this data from there. If thecorresponding address book entry doesnot contain any further data, such as tele-phone numbers, COMAND Online deletesthe entire address book entry.Last destinationsIntroductionCOMAND Online automatically stores theprevious destinations for which route calcu-lation has been started. If the memory is full,COMAND Online deletes the oldest destina-tion. You can also save a destination from thelist of previous destinations in the destinationmemory. It will be stored there permanently.110 Last destinationsNavigation
Storing a destination permanently inthe destination memoryXProceed as described in the "From the listof previous destinations" section(Y page 72).Storing the vehicle position in the listof previous destinationsXTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Save vehicle position and pressW to confirm.COMAND Online stores the current vehicleposition as a destination in the list of pre-vious destinations.Storing the crosshair position in thelist of previous destinationsA crosshair appears on the map if you havemoved the map manually (Y page 112). Youcan store the crosshair position as a destina-tion in the list of previous destinations.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Save crosshair position andpress W to confirm.Deleting a previous destinationXTo switch on navigation mode: press theØ function button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Destination in the navigation sys-tem menu bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect From last destinations andpress W to confirm.The list of previous destinations appears.XSelect the desired destination and pressW to confirm.The destination address appears.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether the entryshould be deleted.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Map operation and map settingsGeneral notesCompany logos displayed on the map aretrademarks of the respective companies andused solely for the purpose of indicating thelocations of these companies. The use of suchlogos on the map does not indicate approvalof, support of or advertising by these compa-nies for the navigation system itself.Setting the map scale:Currently set map scale expressed as anumber with unit, in this case 500 m;Currently set map scale as indicated bythe needle on the scale bar=New map scale?Scale barMap operation and map settings 111NavigationZ
Unit of measurement : in the COMAND dis-play depends on the selection made for theinstrument cluster; see the separate vehicleOwner's Manual.XTo hide the menu: slide ZV the COMANDcontroller and, when the Full screenmenu item is shown, press W.XTo call up the scale bar: as soon as youturn cVd the COMAND controller, scalebar ? appears.XTurn cVd until the desired scale is set.Moving the mapShowing the crosshairMap with crosshair:Current vehicle position;Crosshair=Details of the crosshair position?Map scale selectedXTo hide the menu: slide ZV the COMANDcontroller and, when the Full screenmenu item is shown, press W.XTo scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ oraVb the COMAND controller.A crosshair appears on the map. If you slideit again, the map moves in the correspond-ing direction under the crosshair.Display = may be the name of a street, forexample, provided the digital map containsthe necessary data. It shows the geo-coordi-nate position of the crosshair if the Geo-coordinates display is switched on(Y page 114).Hiding the crosshair and centring themap on the vehicle position or destina-tionXPress the % back button twice.The crosshair disappears and the map isset to the vehicle position.Centring the map on the vehicle's posi-tionXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Vehicle position map and pressW to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown,press the % back button.This hides the crosshair.Centring the map on the destinationpositionThis function requires that a route to a desti-nation has been calculated. If the route haswaypoints and an intermediate stop, the mapcan also be set to these positions.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Destination position map andpress W to confirm.The crosshair is centred on the respectivedestination.112 Map operation and map settingsNavigation
Map settingsCalling up the Map settings menuXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.Map orientationExample: map orientation:Current map orientation (0 or ¤)Possible map orientations:R0 North orientation (the map view is dis-played so that north is always up)R¤ Orientation in direction of travel (themap is displayed so that the direction oftravel is always up; the orange point of theicon points north)R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed sothat the direction of travel is always up; themap projection reproduces the curvatureof the earth and the orange point of the iconpoints north)R¤ 3D map (the map is displayed so thatthe heading is always up; from a scale of1 km the map displays elevation; theorange point of the icon points north).Map orientation menuSetting the map orientationXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Map orientation and press W toconfirm.XSelect North up, Heading up, Bird's-eye view or 3-D map by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A # dot indicates the new setting.Selecting POI symbolsSetting the POI symbol displayYou can set the POIs you wish to have dis-played as symbols on the map. POIs are, forMap operation and map settings 113NavigationZ
example, filling stations, hotels, cinemas andrestaurants.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect POI symbols on map and pressW to confirm.The following settings are possible:RStandard symbolsSymbol display determined by the factorysettings.RPersonal symbolsYou can determine the symbols yourself.RNo symbolsThe map does not show any symbols.XSelect Standard symbols, Personal symbols or No symbols.If you select Personal symbols, the POIlist appears.XTo switch the symbol display on/off:select a POI by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Depending on the previous state of thesymbols, they will either be shown O orhidden ª. You can switch on the icon dis-plays for more than one POI.XTo switch all personal symbols on/off:select All and press W to confirm.Depending on the previous status of thesymbols, they will either be shown O orhidden ª.If the function is switched on O, the indi-vidual POIs are greyed out and the previ-ously selected settings remain unchanged.If the function is switched off ª, you canreselect the individual POIs. This indicatesthe previous settings.iThe list shows all symbols that are con-tained on the digital map across all coun-tries. However, not all POIs are available inall countries. As a result, certain POI sym-bols may not be displayed on the map, evenif the symbol display is switched on.XTo exit the menu: press the % backbutton.Selecting map informationMap information in the displayDuring route guidance, you can have mapinformation displayed at the bottom edge ofthe display.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Text information on map andpress W to confirm.A # dot indicates the current setting.XSelect Current street, Geo-coordi‐nates or None and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: slide XVY the COMANDcontroller.114 Map operation and map settingsNavigation
Road display:Road name or designationGeo-coordinate display:Current height above average sea level(rounded to the nearest 10 m);Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-nates=Current vehicle position: longitude coor-dinates?Number of GPS satellites currently beingusedThere must be sufficient GPS reception for alldisplays to be shown. If this is not the case,the display will be greyed out. Height dis-play : may vary from the actual value,because the navigation system uses the GPSsignals for the calculation.During the "Move map" function, you will seethe geo-coordinates of the crosshair position.Height display : and number of satellitesused ? are not displayed.Display switched off:Current map orientationWhile moving the map, you will see additionaldata depending on the crosshair position ifthe digital map supports this data. A streetname, for example, can be shown here(Y page 112).Compass view on the mapXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Compass on map and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.XSelect Never, When off-road or When route guidance inactive and press Wto confirm.The selected setting is accepted.Map operation and map settings 115NavigationZ
Switching additional information on/offExample: topographic mapSwitching the topographic map on/offXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Topographic map and press W toconfirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª.The topographic map uses different coloursto depict elevation. The colour key generallyreflects the topography's dominant vegeta-tion or the ground's perceived colour whenseen from the air, for example:Rgreen (grass) for lowlandRyellow, brown (woodland) for hillsRgrey (stone) and white (snow) for moun-tains.Example: motorway informationSwitching motorway information on/offWhen driving on the motorway, you can seethe following information on the right of thedisplay:Rthe nearest filling stationsRthe nearest rest areas, etc.Rand their distance from the current vehiclepositionThe entries show the number of the motor-way and the motorway exits as well as theirdistance from the current vehicle position.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Motorway information and pressW to confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª.116 Map operation and map settingsNavigation
Example: city modelSwitching town view on/offWhen the city model is switched on, the mapshows buildings as 3D models.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect City (3D) and press W to confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª.iThe city model is only shown in the bird's-eye view and 3D maps.It is available for the 50 m and 100 m mapscales.The data required for displaying buildingsis not available for all towns.Example: intersecting roads on city routes/motor-waysShowing/hiding intersecting roadsIf route guidance is not active, intersectingroads can be displayed at the upper edge ofthe display.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map settings and press W to con-firm.The Map settings menu appears.XSelect Next intersecting street andpress W to confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª.Map operation and map settings 117NavigationZ
Traffic Sign AssistImportant safety notesTraffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is notalways able to correctly display speed limitsand overtaking restrictions. Traffic signsalways have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionallyimpaired or temporarily unavailable if:Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fogor sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being lowin the skyRthere is dirt, ice or misting on the wind-screen in the area of the cameraRtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice,snow)Rthere is insufficient illumination of the traf-fic signs in the nightRsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs onconstruction sites or in adjacent lanes)Rthe information in the digital street map ofthe navigation system is incorrect or out ofdateGeneral notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximumspeed permitted and overtaking restrictionsto the driver in COMAND Online. Traffic SignAssist detects traffic signs when a camerasystem is attached behind the top of thewindscreen. The data and general traffic reg-ulations stored in the navigation system arealso used to determine the current speedlimit.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicleis passed, the display of the speed limits andovertaking restrictions is updated.The display can also be updated without avisible traffic sign if:Rthe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorwayexit or slip road)Ra village or town boundary is passed whichis stored in the digital mapRthe last traffic sign detected by the camerahas not been repeatedIf a cancellation sign (speed limit or overtak-ing restriction) is passed, the cancellationsign is displayed for five seconds. The appli-cable traffic regulation then appears inCOMAND Online.The camera also detects traffic signs with arestriction indicated by an additional sign(e.g. in wet conditions).The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction appliesIf Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximum permitted speed from any of theavailable sources, no speed limit is displayedin COMAND Online.Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, display : is shown inCOMAND Online.Switching Traffic Sign Assist on/offXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.118 Map operation and map settingsNavigation
XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Traffic signs on map and pressW to confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª.Display on the map in COMAND OnlineSpeed limit with overtaking restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h(60 mph) : and an overtaking restric-tion ; apply.Speed limit with unknown restriction:Maximum permitted speed;Maximum permitted speed for vehiclesfor which the restriction in the additionalsign is relevant=Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h(80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h(60 mph) with an unknown restriction.Speed limits in wet conditions:Maximum permitted speed;Additional signs for wet conditionsA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h(80 mph) applies in wet conditions and whenTraffic Sign Assist has determined that therestriction must be observed.Cancelling the overtaking restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h(60 mph) : applies. The overtaking restric-tion has been cancelled ;. The traffic signfor cancelling the overtaking restriction is dis-played for five seconds.Map operation and map settings 119NavigationZ
Cancelling the speed limitNo speed limit : applies here.iThe unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you aredriving. In general it is not displayed eitheron traffic signs or in COMAND Online.Please take this into account when observ-ing the maximum permitted speed.Additional settingsAvoiding an areaGeneral notesCOMAND Online enables you to avoid areasyou do not wish to drive through.If you activate or deactivate a route blockwhile route guidance is active,COMAND Online will calculate a new route. Ifyou activate or deactivate a route block whileroute guidance is inactive, COMAND Onlinewill use the new setting for the next routeguidance.iMotorways within blocked areas arealways included in the route calculation.Defining an area for the first timeCalling up the area menuXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Avoid area and press W to con-firm.If you have not previously blocked an area,a menu appears.XSelect Using map, From memory or From personal POIs and press W to confirm.If you select Using map, the map with thecrosshair appears.If you select From memory or From per‐sonal POIs, either the destination mem-ory or the list of categories for POIsappears.RDestination memory (Y page 71)RList of categories for personal POIs(Y page 86)XSelect the desired destination or personalPOI and press W to confirm.XWhen the destination address is displayed,select Continue and press W to confirm.The map appears.120 Additional settingsNavigation
The crosshair marks the centre of the areathat is to be avoided.XTo scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ oraVb the COMAND controller.XTo set the map scale: as soon as you turncVd the COMAND controller, the scale barappears. Turning clockwise zooms out fromthe map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in.XTurn cVd until the desired scale is set.XTo apply a block: press W the COMANDcontroller.A red square appears on the map.XTo adjust the size of the square: turncVd the COMAND controller.The square is enlarged or reduced.XTo confirm the settings: press W.The list appears. The previously selectedarea to be avoided has been added andactivated.You can define additional areas that youwould like to avoid (Y page 121).Defining further areasCalling up the list of areasXTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Avoid area and press W to con-firm.If you have already selected one or moreareas to avoid, a list of areas appears.Example: list of areasiAvailable positions in the list are namedEmpty and are shown in grey.XSelect Avoid new area by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.XSelect Using map, From memory or From personal POIs and press W to confirm.If you select Using map, the map with thecrosshair appears.If you select From memory or From per‐sonal POIs, either the destination mem-ory or the list of categories for POIsappears.Additional settings 121NavigationZ
RDestination memory (Y page 71)RList of categories for personal POIs(Y page 86)XSelect the desired destination or personalPOI and press W to confirm.XWhen the destination address is displayed,select Continue and press W to confirm.The map appears.:New area to be avoided, the size of whichcan still be adjusted;Area currently being avoidedXTo avoid a new area: call up the area menuagain (Y page 120).The illustration shows an example with twoareas that are to be avoided.Switching an avoided area on/offXCall up the area list (Y page 121).XSelect an entry in the list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The avoided area is switched on O or offª depending on the previous status.Displaying and changing an avoidedareaXCall up the area list (Y page 121).XSelect an entry in the list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller.XSlide VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Display / Change and press W toconfirm.The area to be avoided is indicated on themap.XTo change the location of the area: slideXVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND control-ler.The area is moved on the map.XTo adjust the size of the area: turncVd the COMAND controller.The area is enlarged or reduced.XTo confirm the change: press W theCOMAND controller.The list appears and the change is entered.Deleting a set areaXCall up the area list (Y page 121).XSelect an entry in the list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller.XSlide VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A query appears asking whether the entryshould be deleted.XSelect Yes or No.If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Compass functionIn the compass view, you can see the currentdirection of travel, the current height abovesea level and the co-ordinates of the vehicleposition, for example.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd122 Additional settingsNavigation
the COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Compass and press W to confirm.Example: compass:Current direction of travel;Current elevation above average sealevel, rounded=Current vehicle position: longitude coor-dinates?Number of GPS satellites currently beingusedACurrent vehicle position: latitude coordi-natesBCurrently set steering angle of the frontwheelsiTo display current elevation ;, the sys-tem must be able to receive at least foursatellites. Steering angle B can be a max-imum of 35° in both directions.XTo exit the display: confirm Back by press-ing W or press the % back button.Country-specific informationYou can call up information on the traffic con-ditions in the country you are currently drivingin via the COMAND Online Internet and onlinefunction.The availability of information is country-dependent. Information can include maxi-mum speeds, driving with dipped-beam head-lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example.XTo switch to navigation mode: press theØ button.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Position in the navigation systemmenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Country information and pressW to confirm.When the connection has been made, theavailable country information appears.XTo return to navigation: press the %button.Showing the map data versionXTo show the map data menu: press Wthe COMAND controller.XSelect Navi in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Map version and press W to con-firm.The map data version number is shown.Information about new versions of the dig-ital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Additional settings 123NavigationZ
Updating the digital mapIntroductionThe digital maps generated by the map soft-ware become outdated in the same way asconventional road maps. Optimal route guid-ance can only be provided by the navigationsystem in conjunction with the most up-to-date map software.Information about new versions of the digitalmap can be obtained from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre. You can have the digital mapupdated there with a DVD, or you can updateit yourself.In some countries, it is possible to update themap data for COMAND Online free of chargefor a period of 3 years. Information on theavailability of this service for your vehicle canbe obtained from your Mercedes-BenzService Centre. If the free update is not avail-able in your country, please read the "Updat-ing process" section.Entitlement to the free updateFor the first three years after your vehicle isregistered, you are entitled to all availableupdates to the map software forCOMAND Online. They are usually installedduring a regular vehicle service. After thisperiod, you can purchase further updatesfrom your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.The free updates relate to the vehicle and notto an individual. If there is a change of own-ership within 3 years of first registration, thenew owner is entitled to the map softwareupdates.Availability of free updatesEnter your e-mail address at http://www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/comand-infomail. You will receive a one-off e-mail containing information on how to updatethe map software. Go to http://www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/navigation-updates also, to find out if mapsoftware updates for your vehicle are availa-ble at your Mercedes-Benz partner.Updating at the Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentreIf an update for your map software is availa-ble, you will receive it free of charge at yourMercedes-Benz Service Centre during yourvehicle's annual service. You can arrange aseparate appointment for this at yourMercedes-Benz Service Centre on request.The update can only be performed:Rat a Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRfor European navigation dataThe map software is not provided on DVD.Important safety notesGWARNINGNever run the engine in an enclosed space.The exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbonmonoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes is hazard-ous to your health and can lead to loss of con-sciousness and death.Carrying out the update yourselfiThe update process may take some time(over an hour), depending on the size of thedigital map. During this time, you will onlybe able to switch on radio mode and toaccept incoming calls. The update will becompleted more quickly if the vehicle isstationary.If you start the update with the engineswitched off and the starter battery hasinsufficient power, COMAND Online mayautomatically switch off. This preserves thebattery. If this occurs, restart the updatewith the engine running.XInsert the DVD:124 Additional settingsNavigation
Rin the single DVD drive (Y page 215)Rin the DVD changer (Y page 215)COMAND Online checks whether the digi-tal map on the DVD is compatible with thenavigation system and system software.A prompt then appears asking if you wantto install the database. Versions of thedatabase currently installed and the data-base that is to be installed are displayed.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.After selecting Yes, an activation codemust be entered when installing a databasefor the first time. You will receive the acti-vation code when you buy the navigationDVD.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XEnter the activation code.After entering the activation code cor-rectly, COMAND Online starts updating thedigital map. Once the update is finished,you will see a message.XTo confirm the message: press W theCOMAND controller.XTake the DVD out of the slot.While the update is running, you will see amessage to this effect and a progress bar.The navigation system is not operationaluntil the update is complete.iYou cannot eject the DVD during theupdate. If you switch off COMAND Onlineduring the update, the update is interrup-ted. It then continues from where it wasinterrupted when the system is restarted.COMAND Online may prompt you to changethe DVD during the update.XPress the V (for DVD changer) or8 (for single DVD drive) load/eject but-ton.XTake the DVD out of the slot.XInsert the requested DVD.Once the update has been successfullycompleted, you will see a message to thiseffect.XTo confirm the message: press W theCOMAND controller.XTake the DVD out of the slot.The update is complete.If the update is not successfully completed,you will see a message that the map updateis not possible.XTo confirm the message: press W theCOMAND controller.XTake the DVD out of the slot.Additional settings 125NavigationZ
Problems with the navigation systemProblem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsCOMAND Online isunable to continueroute guidance afterthe journey has beeninterrupted.Route guidance is cancelled if you interrupt the journey for morethan two hours."Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle."Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND Onlineback on and driving on.XContinue route guidance (Y page 96).Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsCOMAND Online isunable to determinethe vehicle's position.COMAND Online has to redetermine the position of the vehicle ifthe vehicle has been transported.Examples:Rafter transporting the vehicle by ferryRafter transporting the vehicle by motorailRafter the vehicle has been towedXStart the vehicle and pull away.COMAND Online determines the vehicle's position. Dependingon the driving situation, this may take some time.Route guidance may be restricted during the determination ofthe vehicle's position.When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed withnavigation announcements and route guidance displays.126 Problems with the navigation systemNavigation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe Navigation unavailable messageappears.COMAND Online has an integrated hard drive on which the digitalmap is stored.To protect the integrated hard drive against damage,COMAND Online deactivates it at very high and low temperatures.The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable.XLet the vehicle and COMAND Online cool down.XTo hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then onagain.If an area of the hard disk has a fault, COMAND Online can nolonger access the map data in this area. This may occur whencalculating a route, for example.XTo hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then onagain.The navigation system will be operational again until it has toaccess the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The messagewill then reappear.XConsult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsYou see a messageinforming you that theDVD containing the dig-ital map is incompatiblewith the system soft-ware.The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.XTo confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller.XEject the DVD.XHave the system database checked at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThe map softwareupdate has failed.The DVD is dirty.XClean the DVD.XRestart the update.The DVD is scratched.XConsult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Problems with the navigation system 127NavigationZ
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsThere is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicleinterior.XWait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.XRestart the update.COMAND Online's integrated hard disk is defective.XConsult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsCOMAND Online asksfor an activation codeduring the map update.The digital map is secured with an activation code.XConsult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.128 Problems with the navigation systemNavigation
Features of your COMAND Online ... 130General notes .................................... 130Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-face .................................................... 132Switching on and changing teleph-ony operating modes ........................ 137Reception and transmission volume 138Telephone operation ......................... 139Using the phone book ...................... 144Using call lists ................................... 148Using the speed dial list ................... 150Text messages (SMS) ....................... 152Using the address book ................... 154Mercedes-Benz Contact ................... 163Mercedes-Benz emergency callsystem ............................................... 164129Telephone
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.General notesImportant safety notesGWARNINGOperating communications equipment inte-grated into the vehicle while driving will dis-tract you from traffic conditions. You couldthen lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.GWARNINGIf you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle inan improper way, its electromagnetic radia-tion can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if:Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to anexterior aerialRthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or isnot a low-reflection aerialThis can jeopardise the operating safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted ata qualified specialist workshop. When oper-ating in the vehicle, always connect the RFtransmitter to the low-reflection exterior aer-ial.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating mobile communicationsequipment in the vehicle.Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and to thehealth of others.There is scientific discussion surrounding thepossible health risks posed by electromag-netic fields. You can reduce this risk by usingan exterior aerial.Therefore, only use mobile communicationequipment if it is connected to the exterioraerial of the vehicle.IntroductionCOMAND Online allows you to use two dif-ferent modes of telephony:Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface(standard equipment):Rpermanently installed/SAP telephony (onlyin conjunction with data-enabled MB SAPmodule)In telephony via Bluetooth® interfacemode, the mobile phone is connected directlyto COMAND Online via Bluetooth®.Enhancing this operating mode with theoptional mobile phone bracket allows you to:Rconnect the mobile phone to the exterioraerial on the vehicleRcharge the mobile phoneIn the permanently installed/SAP teleph-ony mode, the optional data-enabled MBSAP module is inserted into the fitting in thearmrest designed for housing the mobilephone bracket.When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobilephones with PBAP (Phone Book AccessProfile), the contacts are automatically down-loaded to COMAND Online.If your mobile phone supports the MAP Blue-tooth® profile (Message Access Profile),COMAND Online can receive and display textmessages.130 General notesTelephone
Further information on the following topicscan be obtained from your Mercedes-BenzService Centre or on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect:Rsuitable mobile phonesRavailable mobile phone bracketsRconnecting Bluetooth®-capable mobilephones to COMAND OnlineRoverview of the functions for the operatingmodesDisconnecting a call while the vehicleis in motionA call may be disconnected if:Rthere is insufficient GSM network coveragein certain areasRyou move from one GSM or UMTS trans-mitter/receiver area (GSM/UMTS cell) intoanother and no channels are freeRyou use a SIM card that is not compatiblewith the network availableRyou are using a mobile phone with "Twin-card" and the mobile phone with the sec-ond SIM card is logged into the network atthe same timeOperating optionsYou can operate the telephone by:Rusing the COMAND controller:turn cVdslide XVY or ZVÆpress WRusing the 6 or ~ button and usingthe telephone keypad on COMAND OnlineRthe 6 or ~ button on the multifunc-tion steering wheelRusing LINGUATRONIC (see the separateLINGUATRONIC operating instructions)Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions andillustrations in this section refer toCOMAND Online.Function restrictionsYou will not be able to use the telephone, willno longer be able to use the telephone, or youmay have to wait before using it in the follow-ing situations:Rif the mobile phone is switched offRif the "Bluetooth®" function is switched offin COMAND OnlineRif the Bluetooth® function is switched off onthe mobile phone while you are using Blue-tooth® interface telephonyRif the mobile phone is not logged into amobile phone networkiThe telephone automatically tries to logon to a network. If no network is available,you may not be able to make a "999" or"112" emergency call. If you attempt tomake an outgoing call, the No servicemessage will appear for a short while.If you switch COMAND Online off during a callin hands-free mode, the call will be termina-ted. You can prevent this as follows:XSwitch the mobile phone to private modebefore switching off COMAND Online (seethe mobile phone operating instructions)."999" or "112" emergency callThe following conditions must be fulfilled inorder to make a 999 or 112 emergency call:Rthe mobile phone must be switched onRa network must be availableRa valid and operational SIM card must beinserted in the mobile phoneRthe PIN must have been enteredIf you cannot make an emergency call, youmust arrange rescue measures yourself.iThe 999 or 112 emergency call numberis a public service. Any misuse is punisha-ble by law.General notes 131TelephoneZ
Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-faceConditionsFor telephony via COMAND Online's Blue-tooth® interface, a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone is required.On COMAND OnlineXActivate the Bluetooth® function inCOMAND Online (Y page 46).On the mobile phoneXSwitch on the mobile phone and enter thePIN when prompted to do so (see themobile phone operating instructions).XActivate Bluetooth® functions and, if nec-essary, Bluetooth® visibility on the mobilephone (see the mobile phone operatinginstructions).The battery of the mobile phone shouldalways be kept sufficiently charged in orderto prevent malfunctions.In preparation for telephoning via the Blue-tooth® interface, you should check the fol-lowing items on your mobile phone (see themobile phone operating instructions):RHands-Free ProfileThe mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above.RBluetooth® visibilityOn certain mobile phones, the device itselfmust be made "visible" to other devices, aswell as activating the Bluetooth® function(see the mobile phone operating instruc-tions).This visibility is for restricted periods oftime on some mobile phones.RBluetooth® device nameEvery Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®device name. This device name is freelydefinable, but can be identical for all devi-ces from the same manufacturer. It istherefore recommended that you changethis name so that you can easily recogniseyour mobile phone (see the mobile phoneoperating instructions).iNot all mobile phones available on themarket are equally suitable. Further infor-mation on suitable mobile phones andmobile phone brackets can be obtained atyour Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or onthe Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.iSome displays (e.g. the signal strength)depend on the supported version of theHands-Free Profile.Connecting a mobile phoneGeneral notesBefore using your mobile phone withCOMAND Online for the first time, you willneed to:Rsearch for it (Y page 133) and thenRauthorise (register) it (Y page 134).Device-specific information on authorisingand connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobilephones can be found on the Internet athttp://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.When you authorise a new mobile phone, it isconnected automatically.You can authorise up to 15 mobile phones.If the mobile phone supports PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile), the following contacts andmessages are downloaded into COMANDOnline when connecting:Rthe phone bookRthe call listsRtext messages (SMS)Further information on the conditions for con-necting (Y page 132).132 Telephony via the Bluetooth® interfaceTelephone
Searching for a mobile phoneEmpty Bluetooth® telephones listConditions for searchingBluetooth® telephones list after the search has fin-ishedXPress the % function button onCOMAND Online.XSelect Connect device from the tele-phone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Search for phones and press theW button to confirm.A message appears.XSelect Start search and press the Wbutton to confirm.The Searching for Bluetooth phones... message appears. COMANDOnline looks for Bluetooth® telephoneswithin range and adds them to the Blue-tooth® telephones list.If a new phone is found, it appears in thelist with the Ï symbol.The duration of the search depends on thenumber of Bluetooth® telephones withinrange and their characteristics.Symbols in the Bluetooth® phone listSym-bolExplanationÏNew mobile phone in range, butnot yet authorisedYAuthorised mobile phone#Currently connected mobilephoneÑMobile phone in range andauthorisedÑ(grey)Mobile phone not in range, butalready authorisedThe Bluetooth® telephones list shows allmobile phones within range and all previouslyauthorised mobile phones, whether or notthey are in range.iMobile phones that are connected to theoptional data-enabled MB SAP module areshown in a separate phone list. These canbe called up using the MB SAP moduleentry. See the data-enabled MB SAP mod-ule's separate operating instructions.iIf the Bluetooth® telephones list is alreadyfull, you will be requested to de-authorise amobile phone (Y page 136). If COMANDTelephony via the Bluetooth® interface 133TelephoneZ
Online does not find your mobile phone,external authorisation may be necessary(Y page 135).iWhen you call up the phone list again, de-authorised devices will be removed fromthe list. In this case, start a new search toupdate the Bluetooth® telephone list.Authorising (registering) a mobilephonePasscode entryTelephone basic menuOption 1: using the passcode (access number)XSelect the mobile phone with the Ïsymbol from the Bluetooth® telephones listby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The input menu for the passcode appears.The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit num-ber combination which you can choose your-self. You must enter the same number com-bination in COMAND Online and in the Blue-tooth®-capable mobile phone (see the mobilephone operating instructions).iSome mobile phones require a passcodewith four or more digits.iIf you want to re-authorise a mobile phonefollowing de-authorisation, you can selecta different passcode.iMercedes-Benz recommends de-authori-sation in COMAND Online and on themobile phone(Y page 136). Subsequentauthorisation may otherwise fail.XTo enter a passcode in COMAND Online: press the number keys in turn.orXSelect the digits in the digit bar one by oneby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand pressing W to confirm.¬is highlighted after the first numberhas been entered.XIn both cases, select ¬ and press W toconfirm.XTo enter the passcode on the mobile phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is suc-cessful, you will be requested to enter thepasscode (access code, passkey; see themobile phone operating instructions).XEnter the same passcode in the mobilephone as the one already entered inCOMAND Online.The Connecting Bluetooth pro‐files... message appears.The Authorisation successful mes-sage appears once authorisation is com-pleted.The mobile phone is authorised and connec-ted to COMAND Online. You can now makephone calls using the COMAND Online hands-free system.iAfter entering the passcode, you may alsoneed to enter a confirmation in your mobilephone in order to make calls. Please checkyour mobile phone display. On some mobile134 Telephony via the Bluetooth® interfaceTelephone
phones, this confirmation can be saved. Inthis case, you do not need to enter it again.If the COMAND Online display shows theAuthorisation failed. message, youmay have exceeded the prescribed timeperiod. Repeat the procedure.Option 2: using Secure Simple PairingTo connect via Secure Simple Pairing, themobile phone (or Bluetooth® audio equip-ment) must support Bluetooth® Version 2.1.COMAND Online creates a six-digit code,which is displayed on both devices that are tobe connected.XIf the code is the same on both devices,confirm Yes by pressing W.If you select Yes, authorisation is continuedand the mobile phone is connected.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XConfirm the message on the mobile phone.External authorisationIf COMAND Online does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone. In thiscase, you can test if your mobile phone canfind COMAND Online. The Bluetooth® devicename of COMAND Online is "MB Bluetooth".Please note the following: some mobilephones require that you establish the con-nection to COMAND Online again once youhave entered the passcode (see the mobilephone operating instructions). The mobilephone cannot otherwise be authorised.XPress the % function button onCOMAND Online.XSelect Connect device in the telephonebasic menu by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Bluetooth® telephones list appears.XSelect Search via telephone and pressW to confirm.The message on the left appears.XStart the Bluetooth® search on the mobilephone; see the mobile phone operatinginstructions.XSelect COMAND Online (MB Bluetooth)on the mobile phone.XOption 1: when requested to do so, enterthe passcode first on the mobile phone andthen in COMAND Online.X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes onthe mobile phone and in COMAND Online(Secure Simple Pairing).With both options, you see the prompt Do you want to authorise <device name> ? on the COMAND display.XIf you select Yes, the mobile phone will beauthorised. The messages Waiting for <name of B-tooth dev.> to be con‐nected... and Connecting Bluetooth profiles... are displayed. If the connec-tion is successful, you see the telephonebasic menu and the connected mobilephone is entered.Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface 135TelephoneZ
If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Reconnecting automaticallyCOMAND Online always searches for the lastconnected mobile phone.If no connection can be made to the mostrecently connected mobile phone, the systemsearches for the mobile phone that was con-nected before that one.Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorised more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.XSelect the mobile phone from the Blue-tooth® phone list by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The selected mobile phone is searched forand connected if it is within Bluetooth®range and if Bluetooth® is activated.Only one mobile phone can be connectedat any one time. The currently connectedmobile phone is indicated by the # dot inthe Bluetooth® telephones list.iYou can only switch to another authorisedmobile phone if you are not currently mak-ing a call.De-authorising (de-registering) a mobilephoneMercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisa-tion in COMAND Online and on the mobilephone. Subsequent authorisation may other-wise fail.XPress the % function button onCOMAND Online.XSelect Connect device in the telephonebasic menu by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Bluetooth® telephones listappears(Y page 133).XSelect the desired mobile phone in theBluetooth® telephones list.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect De-authorise and press W to con-firm.A prompt appears, asking whether youreally wish to de-authorise this device.XSelect Yes or No.If you select Yes, the device will be deletedfrom the Bluetooth® telephones list.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.iBefore re-authorising the mobile phone,you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue-tooth® list.Displaying connection detailsXPress the % function button onCOMAND Online.XSelect Connect device from the tele-phone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Bluetooth® telephones list appears.XSelect the desired mobile phone in theBluetooth® telephones list.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The following information concerning theselected mobile phone is shown:RBluetooth® nameRBluetooth® address136 Telephony via the Bluetooth® interfaceTelephone
Ravailability status (shown after a newsearch)Rauthorisation statusXTo close the detailed view: turn cVd orslide XVY the COMAND controller.Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth®interface)Basic menu displayTelephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface):Network provider's name (depends on theconnected phone);Signal strength of mobile phone networkÄ=Receiver icon ¢ or ¡?To display call listsACharacter barBBluetooth® name of the currently connec-ted mobile phoneCTo display the COMAND phone bookXPress the % function button.The telephone basic menu appears whenthe connected mobile phone is ready foruse.iDisplays : and ; are shown, dependingon the mobile phone connected.Bars ; show the current signal strength ofthe mobile phone network. If all bars arefilled, you have optimum reception.If there are no bars, there is very poorreception or none at all.The receiver symbol shows whether a callis active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.Displaying text messages in the tele-phone basic menuThe SMS menu item is only available if theBluetooth® phone supports the MAP Blue-tooth® profile (Message Access Profile). Thedownloading of text messages from the Blue-tooth® phone must have been completed.The menu item is otherwise greyed out. Fur-ther information on text messages(Y page 152).If you have an unread text message, the 1mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disap-pears once you have read the text message.The ú mail symbol is displayed as soon asthe text message memory is full. The symboldisappears once you delete at least one textmessage.Switching on and changing telephonyoperating modesOverviewIf your vehicle is equipped with conveniencetelephony, COMAND Online starts the teleph-ony mode depending on whether a telephonemodule with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) is inser-ted in the fitting or not.If neither a telephone module with Blue-tooth® (SAP profile) nor a mobile phonebracket is inserted, COMAND Online imme-diately starts the telephony via the Blue-tooth® interface.Activating with inserted telephonemodule with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)If a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAPprofile) is inserted, COMAND Online startsthe SAP telephony.iIf no telephone module with Bluetooth®(SAP profile) is inserted, COMAND OnlineSwitching on and changing telephony operating modes 137TelephoneZ
checks whether a mobile phone bracket isinserted and, if so, which type.iBefore using your telephone module withBluetooth® (SAP profile) for the first time,you need to set it up so that it will be rec-ognised by COMAND Online; see the sep-arate operating instructions of the data-enabled telephone module with Blue-tooth® (SAP profile).If no mobile phone is connected to the tele-phone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile),the Ready for Bluetooth telephony...message appears. Approximately twominutes after switching on COMAND Online,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto switch to Bluetooth® telephony.If you confirm by selecting Yes, the Ready for Bluetooth telephony... messagewill appear. COMAND Online will search forthe two mobile phones last connected via theBluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobilephones is found, the telephone basic menufor Bluetooth® telephony appears(Y page 137). If neither of the mobile phonesis found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐ephony... message remains in the display.You can now connect your mobile phone(Y page 132).If you choose No, the Ready for SAP con‐nectivity... message reappears.Activating without a telephone mod-ule with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)Bluetooth® telephony is startedCOMAND Online starts telephony via theBluetooth® interface and searches for the lasttwo mobile phones to have been connectedvia the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the twomobile phones is found, the telephone basicmenu for Bluetooth® telephony appears(Y page 137). If neither of the mobile phonesis found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐ephony... message remains in the display.You now have to connect your mobile phone(Y page 132).iIf you do not connect another mobilephone via the phone list, the Bluetooth®connection with the mobile phone remainsactive until the next time COMAND Onlineis switched off. While the Bluetooth® con-nection is active, only the Bluetooth® inter-face functions are available to you.Switching between modes of teleph-onyIf your vehicle is equipped with an optionaldata-enabled telephone module with Blue-tooth® (SAP profile), you can switch the tel-ephony mode.You can change the mode of telephony in theBluetooth® phone list by selecting either aBluetooth® telephone or an SAP telephone.XTo call up the phone list (Y page 133).XTo select the mobile phone with the con-troller: turn and press the controller.iSAP telephony: mobile phones which areconnected to an optional data-enabledtelephone module with Bluetooth® (SAPprofile) are shown in the telephone listunder the title Telephones of the SAP module. By selecting an SAP telephone,you change to SAP telephony.Reception and transmission volumeOnce the mobile phone has been authorised,you can optimise the transmission and recep-tion volume settings. To find out about thebest possible settings for your mobile phone,contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre orvisit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.138 Reception and transmission volumeTelephone
XPress the % function button.XSelect Connect device in the telephonebasic menu by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect an authorised mobile phone fromthe list by turning cVd.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Reception volume or Transmis‐sion volume and press W to confirm.XSelect a volume setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XTo close the setting scale: press W orslide XVY.iIncorrect settings may have an impact onthe quality of calls.Telephone operationIncoming callsAccepting a callExample: incoming callXTo accept: confirm Accept by pressingW.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.iYou can also accept the call by voice com-mand using LINGUATRONIC (see the sep-arate operating instructions).Once you have accepted the call, you can usehands-free mode.The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 30).Other functions during a call (Y page 141)If the phone number of the caller is transfer-red, it appears in the display.If there is an entry for the caller in the phonebook, you will also see the name.If the phone number is not transferred or the"Hide data" function is activated, Unknownappears in the display.iYou can also accept a call as describedabove when another main function isswitched on in COMAND. Once you haveaccepted the call, the display switches totelephone mode. After the call is finished,you see the display of the previous mainfunction again.Telephone operation 139TelephoneZ
The display does not switch to the tele-phone display if you:Rpress the % back button next to theCOMAND controller and thenRaccept the call using the 6 button onthe multifunction steering wheelRejecting a callXTo reject: select Reject by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.orXPress the ~ button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.Making a callUsing the number keypadXCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XEnter the digits using the number keypad.XTo connect the call: press the 6 but-ton on COMAND Online or on the multi-function steering wheel.Using the telephone basic menuXCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XSelect the digits one by one by turningcVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo make a call: select ° in the characterbar and press W to confirm.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.RediallingXCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XSelect ° in the character bar and pressW to confirm.orXIf the telephone basic menu is displayed,press the 6 button on COMAND Online.In both cases, the calls dialled list appears.The most recently dialled number is at thetop.XTo select a call: turn cVd the COMANDcontroller.XTo connect the call: press W theCOMAND controller.For redialling using the multifunction steeringwheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Man-ual.Using the call list or COMAND phonebookXOpen a call list and select an entry(Y page 148).orXCall up the COMAND phone book andselect an entry (Y page 145).XTo make a call: press W the COMANDcontroller or the 6 button.Select and place a call using the multifunctionsteering wheel, see the separate vehicle Own-er's Manual.Using speed dial presets to make a callThe speed dial list contains stored entriesfrom the phone book (Y page 150).Option 1:XPress one of the number keys for longerthan two seconds.The telephone basic menu displays theselected entry. This initiates dialling.140 Telephone operationTelephone
Option 2:XCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XSelect Call lists by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Speed dial preset list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The speed dial list appears.XSelect the preset and press W to confirm.The telephone basic menu displays theselected entry. This initiates dialling.Functions available during a callOverviewTelephone operation with a single call:Person you are calling;Icon for active telephone connection=To switch the hands-free microphone off/on (Y page 141)?To send DTMF tones (not possible with allmobile phones) (Y page 141)ATo end the callSwitching the hands-free microphoneon/offThis function is also available during an activephone call.XCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XTo switch off: select Mike off and pressW to confirm.If the microphone is switched off, the dis-play shows the Q icon, and the The microphone is off message appears fora short period.XTo switch on: select Mike on and pressW to confirm.The Q symbol disappears. You will brieflysee the The microphone is on message.Sending DTMF tonesThis function is not supported by all mobilephones.Answering machines or other devices can becontrolled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remotequery functions.XIf you would like to listen to the messageson your answering machine, for example,select the corresponding number.XTo transmit individual characters: oncea connection has been established to theanswering machine, select the desiredcharacters in the character bar, pressingW to confirm each of them.orXPress the corresponding key on theCOMAND Online number keypad.Every character selected will be transmit-ted immediately.Telephone operation 141TelephoneZ
XTo send a phone book entry as a DTMF sequence: select Name by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect the desired phone book entry andpress W to confirm.The entry is sent as a DTMF characterstring.XTo return to the call display: selectBack and press W to confirm.iDTMF tones can also be transmitted usingLINGUATRONIC; see the separate operat-ing instructions.Calls with several participantsRejecting or accepting a waiting callThe mobile phone network provider must sup-port and activate the call-waiting function.Depending on the mobile phone used, thesystem behaviour differs when accepting acall.If you have a call in progress and receiveanother call, a new window appears in thedisplay. You also hear a tone. You can acceptor reject the call.XTo reject: select Reject and press W toconfirm.orXPress the ~ button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.XTo accept: select Accept and press W toconfirm.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.The system behaviour after accepting theincoming call depends on your mobile phone.RThe mobile phone supports the call waitingfunction (via Bluetooth®) when:the previously active call is held. You canthen switch back and forth between bothcalls (call waiting) (Y page 143).RThe mobile phone does not support the callwaiting function (via Bluetooth®) when:the previously active call is ended.This is also the case if you accept the wait-ing call using LINGUATRONIC (see the sep-arate operating instructions).Valid in both cases: if you accept the waitingcall using the mobile phone, the active call isput on hold. You then have two calls. The callyou have just accepted is active.The COMAND display changes. If you con-tinue to operate functions on the mobilephone, the COMAND Online display may dif-fer from that of the mobile phone.Making a second callIf the following requirements are met, you canmake another call while on the phone withsomeone else:Rthe mobile network must permit this func-tion.Rthe mobile phone must allow you to makea second call via Bluetooth®. This actionputs the previous call on hold if the mobilephone supports this function.Rthe corresponding setting must be activa-ted on the mobile phone.:Symbol for making a second call142 Telephone operationTelephone
XSelect symbol : by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Online.XEnter the phone number:Rmanually (Y page 140)Rusing the phone book (Y page 145)Rusing the call lists (Y page 148)Rusing speed dial (Y page 140)Call waiting and conference callsYou can switch back and forth between twocalls with the call waiting function. The func-tion is available if your mobile phone supportsthe toggling function (via Bluetooth®).You can interconnect various callers to createa conference call with the Conference func-tion.You can use the function if you are answeringa second call or making a second call whiletalking to someone else.:Active call;Call on hold=Interconnects the call on hold and theactive call to create a conference call.To switch between the active call and the callon hold (call waiting):XSelect call on hold ; and press W to con-firm.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.The previous call on hold is activated.XTo end the active call: select ¢ in thetelephone basic menu and press W to con-firm.orXPress the ~ button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.The call on hold is active.To interconnect the call on hold and the activecall to create a conference call:XSelect Conference and press W to con-firm.To call other participants:XSelect symbol : and press W to confirm.You can now switch between the new par-ticipant and the conference call or add theparticipant to the conference call.Telephone operation 143TelephoneZ
Switching between a new participant and theconference call:XSelect Conference call and press W toconfirm.You will change to a conference call. Thenew participant is placed on hold.Adding a new participant to the conferencecall:XSelect Conference and press W to con-firm.Transferring a callIf you want to continue a call in private mode,you will need to carry out the necessary stepson the mobile phone.See the mobile phone operating instructionsfor further information.Using the phone bookIntroductionThe phone book displays the names andphone numbers of all address book entriessaved in the COMAND address book. If anaddress book entry does not have a tele-phone number, it does not appear in thephone book.In addition, MB Contact is listed as the firstentry. This allows you to place a call to theMercedes-Benz Service hotline(Y page 163).The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-matically downloaded to COMAND Onlineafter connection.In the telephone book, you can:Rsave phone numbers (Y page 147)Rsearch for entries (Y page 145)Rdelete entries (Y page 146)Rimport contacts (Y page 160)Rdelete contacts (Y page 161)Rreceive vCards (Y page 161)iThe stored phone book and the vCardsremain in COMAND Online even if you useCOMAND Online with another mobilephone. The entries can be viewed withouta mobile phone. For this reason, you shoulddelete any phone book entries before hand-ing over or selling the vehicle.Calling up the phone bookOpening the phone bookXPress the % function button.XSelect Name in the telephone basic menuby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.If the phone book contains entries, they willbe displayed in alphabetical order. Thecharacter bar at the bottom of the displayis active.The character bar is used for fast selectionof an entry.Enter the character using the character bar(Y page 34).144 Using the phone bookTelephone
iYou can also call up the telephone bookwith the multifunction steering wheel, seethe separate vehicle Owner's Manual.To close the phone bookXSelect the & symbol in the main functionbar by sliding ÆV and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.orXPress the % back button.Using the multifunction steering wheelXUse the = or ; button to select theTel menu.XUse 9, : or 9 to call up the phonebook.Symbol overviewSym-bolExplanationÆAddress book entry that has beenentered or changed via COMANDOnlineImported contact that has beensaved in the phone or address book\Address book entry with voice tagThese entries have also beenassigned a voice tag. Voice tags areavailable in vehicles with LINGUA-TRONIC (see the separate operat-ing instructions).ÃContact imported from a mobilephone that supports PBAP¯Entry which has been importedfrom the SD memory card or USBdevice®Entry imported via the Bluetooth®interfaceSearching for a phone book entrySearching with the character barYou determine the first letter of the entry youare looking for with the first character youenter.XSelect a character by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The first entry in the list that starts with theletter selected is highlighted. If there aresimilar entries, the next different characteris shown. For example, with entries such asChristel and Christine, the beginningsof the names are similar. In this case, youwill be offered a choice between E and I.XSelect the characters of the entry you aresearching for one by one and press W toconfirm.When the selection is clear,COMAND Online switches automatically tothe selection list.XTo complete the search: slide VZ theCOMAND controller repeatedly or pressand hold W until the character bar disap-pears.The selection list appears.Information about character entry(Y page 34)Searching with the number keypadYou determine the first letter of the entry youare looking for with the first character youenter.XPress the corresponding number keys inrapid succession.More information on entering charactersusing the number keypad (direct entry)(Y page 37).Directly from the listYou can switch to the list at any time duringcharacter entry.Using the phone book 145TelephoneZ
XSlide VZ the COMAND controller repeat-edly or press and hold W until the charac-ter bar disappears.orXSelect¬and press W to confirm.XTo select an entry: turn cVd theCOMAND controller until the desired entryis highlighted and press W to confirm.To select a phone number: the G symbolindicates that an entry contains more thanone phone number.XSelect a phone book entry with the G sym-bol and press W to confirm.The sub-entries appear. The G symbolchanges to I.Phone book entry with several entriesXSelect a sub-entry by turning cVd andpress W to confirm.XTo return to the phone book using the character bar: select & in the list andpress W to confirm.orXPress the % back button.Using the multifunction steering wheelXSelect a number from the telephone book;see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual.Displaying the details of an entryXSelect an entry in the selection list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The detailed display appears.XTo close the detailed display: slideXVY repeatedly until the entry is highligh-ted again.orXPress the % back button.Deleting an entry from the phonebookIf the entry contains only phone numbers, itis deleted from the phone book and addressbook.If it contains additional data, such as a navi-gable destination, the entry is deleted in thephone book. However, the entry is retained inthe address book.XSelect an entry in the selection list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether the entryshould be deleted.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the entry is deleted inaccordance with the rules described above.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.146 Using the phone bookTelephone
Creating a new entry in the phonebookXSlide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-edly in the phone book until the selectionlist appears.XSelect the list symbol on the right in theselection list by sliding VY the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect New entry and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the number, e.g.Home, and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the phone, e.g.Mobile, and press W to confirm.XSelect Continue and press W to confirm.The input menu with data fields appears.:Selected data field with cursor;Character barXEnter characters (Y page 34)XTo save an entry: select the¬symbolin the character bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The entry is created in the phone book andin the address book.Adding to a phone book entryYou can add telephone numbers to an exist-ing phone book entry.XSelect an entry in the selection list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Add telephone no. and press Wto confirm.XSelect a category for the number, e.g.Home, and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the phone, e.g.Mobile, and press W to confirm.XSelect Continue and press W to confirm.COMAND Online stores the data if there arefewer than five numbers assigned to theentry you are searching for in the selectednumber category.If five numbers are stored for the entry inthe selected number category, a promptwill appear. You can then choose whetherto overwrite one of the existing numbers.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, a selection list will appearcontaining the five existing numbers.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XSelect the number to be overwritten byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.An input menu appears. The data field forentering the new phone number is high-lighted.XEnter characters (Y page 34)XStore an entry (Y page 35)Using the phone book 147TelephoneZ
Using call listsIntroductionWhile the telephone is being used,COMAND Online stores individual lists forboth incoming and outgoing calls (includingmissed calls). Call lists are not availableunless a mobile phone is connected toCOMAND Online.COMAND Online supports the PBAP Blue-tooth® profile. For this reason, note that thesystem behaviour differs, especially when tel-ephoning via the Bluetooth® interface:Rphone with PBAP Bluetooth® profileThe call lists are downloaded automaticallyfrom the mobile phone byCOMAND Online as soon as the mobilephone is connected to COMAND Online.RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Blue-tooth® profile:The call lists are created and displayed byCOMAND Online.iFor Bluetooth® telephones without thePBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists inCOMAND Online are not synchronised withthose on your mobile phone. These callsmay or may not be listed on your mobilephone, depending on the model.iIf no mobile phone is connected, then theCall lists menu item is greyed out andcannot be selected. If you connect a mobilephone other than the previous one toCOMAND Online, the previously availablecall lists and their entries will be deletedautomatically. These are still available onthe mobile phone itself.iYou will only be able to select the respec-tive menu items once calls have beenreceived or dialled from COMAND Online.Displaying missed calls in the COMANDdisplay is not supported by all mobilephones.Opening the call list and selecting anentryXPress the % function button.XSelect Call lists in the telephone basicmenu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A menu appears.Example: list of selected phone numbers:To close the list;Date/time (if available), symbols (ifassigned) and telephone number of theentry highlighted=To call up optionsXSelect Incoming calls or Calls dial‐led by turning cVd and press W to con-firm.The corresponding list appears.iYou can also call up the list of dialled callsby pressing the 6 button when the tele-phone basic menu is shown. In this case,the list will only show phone numbers.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XTo dial a phone number: press W.XTo close the list: select the & symboland press W to confirm.orXPress the % back button.148 Using call listsTelephone
Displaying details from a list entryCOMAND Online can also show a shortenedlist entry in full.XSelect a list entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The detailed display appears.XTo go back to the list: slide XVY repeat-edly until the list is highlighted.Storing a phone numberNew address book entryFor incoming calls from a person who is notin the address book, COMAND Online dis-plays the phone number in the call list. Youcan save this entry.XOpen a call list and select an entry(Y page 148).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.XSelect New entry and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the number, e.g.Home, and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the phone, e.g.Mobile, and press W to confirm.Number category Display (phonebook and addressbook)Not classified No symbolHome ¸Work ·Phone category Display (phonebook and addressbook)Not classified ;Landline ¬Mobile ÏCar ´XSelect Save and press W to confirm.An input menu with data fields is shown.The data field for the telephone number isfilled in automatically.:Data field with cursor;Telephone number and symbol for thephone category are automatically entered=Character barAdding information to an address bookentryFor incoming calls from a person who is notin the address book, COMAND Online dis-plays the phone number in the call list. Youcan save this entry.XOpen a call list and select an entry(Y page 148).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.Using call lists 149TelephoneZ
iSave is shown in grey if the selected listentry has already been saved.XSelect Add telephone no. and press Wto confirm.XSelect a category for the number, e.g.Home, and press W to confirm.XSelect a category for the phone, e.g.Mobile, and press W to confirm.XSelect Save.The search menu for address book entriesappears.XSearch for the desired entry (Y page 145).XPress W when you have finished searching.COMAND Online stores the data if there arefewer than five numbers assigned to theentry you are searching for in the selectednumber category.You will see a message to this effect.If five numbers are stored for the entry youare searching for, a prompt will appear ask-ing whether you wish to overwrite one ofthe existing numbers.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, a selection list with thefive existing numbers is displayed.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.XSelect the number to be overwritten in thelist by turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.COMAND Online overwrites the selectednumber with the new data.Deleting call listsIf you are using a Bluetooth® phone that doesnot support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, thecall lists are generated and managed byCOMAND Online. You can delete these calllists in COMAND Online.If you download call lists from a Bluetooth®phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth®profile, you cannot delete them fromCOMAND Online.XSelect Call lists in the telephone basicmenu by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Delete call lists and press Wto confirm.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto delete all call lists.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.iIf you delete these call lists from themobile phone (see the separate mobilephone operating instructions),COMAND Online updates the call list dis-play the next time it connects.Using the speed dial listStoring an entryYou can assign ten speed dial presets (0 to 9)in the speed dial list. There are two optionsavailable for this purpose.Option 1:XSearch for a phone book entry in the phonebook (Y page 145).XIf an entry has several phone numbers,select the desired number by turningcVd the COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Speed dial by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A menu appears.150 Using the speed dial listTelephone
Speed dial menuXSelect Assign speed dial preset andpress W to confirm.The speed dial list appears. The selectedphone book entry appears at the top. Thenext free speed dial preset is highlighted.XSelect the speed dial preset by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The phone book entry is saved in the speeddial preset.Option 2XCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XSelect Call lists by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Speed dial preset list andpress W to confirm.The speed dial list appears.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Assign speed dial preset andpress W to confirm.The speed dial list appears. The selectedphone book entry appears at the top. Thenext free speed dial preset is highlighted.XSelect the speed dial preset by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The phone book entry is saved in the speeddial preset.Using speed dial presets to make acallThe speed dial list contains stored phonebook entries (Y page 150).Option 1:XPress one of the number keys for longerthan two seconds.The telephone basic menu displays theselected entry. This initiates dialling.Option 2:XCall up the telephone basic menu(Y page 137).XSelect Call lists by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The speed dial list appears.Using the speed dial list 151TelephoneZ
XSelect Speed dial preset list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The speed dial list appears.XSelect the preset and press W to confirm.The telephone basic menu displays theselected entry. This initiates dialling.Deleting a speed dial presetXTo delete a speed dial number: selectDelete speed dial preset in the"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The speed dial preset is deleted.XTo delete all speed dial numbers: selectDelete all speed dial presets in the"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will be asked if you would like to con-tinue.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, all speed dial presets willbe deleted from the speed dial list.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Text messages (SMS)Information and requirementsIn order to be able to use the text messagefunction, the mobile phone has to supportBluetooth® Profile MAP (Message AccessProfile).When the mobile phone is connected, the 30most recent text messages that are currentlystored on the phone are loaded to theCOMAND Online text message inbox and dis-played.If the above conditions are met, new incomingtext messages appear in the COMAND Onlinetext message inbox. The / symbolappears in the status bar. The symbol is nolonger displayed once you have read the textmessage. The ú mail symbol is displayedif the text message memory is full. The symbolis no longer displayed once you delete at leastone text message.iFor telephony via a data-enabled MB SAPmodule; see the data-enabled MB SAPmodule's separate operating instructions.iCOMAND Online may not load all of themost recent text messages:This may occur in exceptional cases, forexample when using certain mobilephones/brackets and if the mobile phoneinbox holds a large number of text mes-sages.iYou can obtain further information aboutsuitable mobile phones from yourMercedes-Benz Service Centre or on theInternet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.Displaying the text message (SMS)inboxCalling up the inboxText message (SMS) inboxXPress the % function button.XSelect SMS in the telephone basic menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The text message inbox appears.152 Text messages (SMS)Telephone
Reading a text message (SMS)XCalling up the text message (SMS) inbox(Y page 152)XSelect a text message in the text messageinbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.The text message appears.XTo scroll through the display or select phone numbers in a text message: turncVd the COMAND controller.The display scrolls up or down line by line,or skips to the next or previous telephonenumber and automatically highlights it.XTo return to the list: select the & sym-bol and press W to confirm or press the% back button.Text message read-aloud functionSettings for the read-aloud function:Rlanguage (Y page 47)Rspeed (Y page 46)XPress W while a text message is being dis-played, select Read aloud and press W toconfirm.COMAND Online reads out the text mes-sage.XTo cancel the read-aloud function: pressthe 8 button.orXPress W, select Cancel read-aloud function and press W to confirm.Sender or text displayYou can switch between displaying the textmessage sender or the text message content.The sender display shows the sender of thetext message. If the sender is stored in theCOMAND phone book, the name is displayed.The text display shows the first few words ofa text message.XSelect a text message in the text messageinbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller.XTo switch to the text display: select thelist symbol to the right of the text messageby sliding VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Display text and press W to con-firm.The view changes.XTo switch to the sender display: selectthe list symbol to the right of the text mes-sage by sliding VY the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Display sender and press W toconfirm.The view changes.XTo return to the telephone basic menu: press the % button.Displaying details and phone numbersCOMAND Online can also show a shortenedsender display in full.XSelect a text message in the text messageinbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of the textmessage by sliding VY the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The detailed display appears.XTo close the detailed display: slideXVY the COMAND controller.XTo return to the telephone basic menu: press the % button.Text messages (SMS) 153TelephoneZ
Managing text messages (SMS)Calling a text message (SMS) senderXPress W the COMAND controller while thetext message is being displayed.XSelect Call sender and press W to con-firm.The telephone makes the call to the sender.Using phone numbers in the text:Usable numerical sequenceNumbers in text messages that are highligh-ted in red can be used.XSelect a usable number when the text mes-sage is displayed.XPress W the COMAND controller andselect Use.XSelect Call.The telephone makes the call.iIt is possible that a highlighted numericalsequence may not contain a telephonenumber.iYou can use the "New entry" or "Add no."functions to save this telephone number orto add it to an existing entry.Storing the sender of a text message inthe address bookThis function is not available if the sender’stelephone number is already stored in theaddress book.XPress W the COMAND controller while thetext message is being displayed.XSelect Save number and press W to con-firm.XSelect New entry and press W to confirm.XStoring a phone number (Y page 149)Adding the sender of a text message toan address book entryXPress W the COMAND controller while thetext message is being displayed.XSelect Save number and press W to con-firm.XSelect Add telephone no. and press Wto confirm.XProceed from the step "Selecting a numbercategory" (Y page 147).Deleting a text message (SMS)XSelect a text message in the text messageinbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of the textmessage by sliding VY the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A deletion prompt appears.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the text message isdeleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.iThis delete function is not supported byall mobile phones. The Delete failedmessage appears.Using the address bookIntroductionThe address book organises and storesentries that are entered from different sour-ces (mobile phone, memory card, USB device,154 Using the address bookTelephone
COMAND telephone book, navigation sys-tem).You can use these entries to make telephonecalls and to navigate.iNumber of contacts in the address book: the address book can store a total of4,000 contacts.1,500 entries each are reserved in theaddress book for:Rcontacts from the mobile phoneRcontacts that you create inCOMAND Online or import from othersources.The remaining 1,000 entries are assignedby COMAND Online as necessary.iDisplay of mobile phone contacts: con-tacts downloaded from the mobile phoneremain in the address book even if you dis-connect the mobile phonefrom COMAND Online. Contacts that havepreviously been available can be displayedas soon as the mobile phone is reconnec-ted. COMAND Online downloads the con-tacts again so that any new contacts thathave been added to the mobile phone canbe displayed.As soon as you connect a new mobilephone to COMAND Online all the contactsfrom the previous mobile phone arereplaced by those from the new phone'saddress book.Address book entries remain stored if themobile phone is disconnected. For this rea-son, delete your personal data using thereset function before selling your vehicle,for example (Y page 49).Calling up the address bookUsing the function button:XPress the % function button.You see either the telephone basic menu orthe address book, depending on which waslast active.XIf the telephone basic menu is displayed,press the % function button again.Using the telephone basic menu:XWhen the telephone basic menu is dis-played select Tel by sliding VZ theCOMAND Controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Address book from the menu andpress W to confirm.Address book with ¥ address book entry and Lnavigable dataXTo browse in the address book: turncVd the COMAND controller.XTo close the address book: press the% button.iAn address book entry can contain thefollowing information:RsurnameRfirst nameRcompanyRtwo addressesRgeo-coordinatesRup to five telephone numbersUsing the address book 155TelephoneZ
Searching for an address book entrySearch menu with character bar:¥ Address book entry;L Complete address data from the nav-igation system=Character bar?d Phone book entry on the mobile phoneAEntry with voice tagFor more symbols, see the symbol overview(Y page 145)XFind entry (Y page 145)Creating a new entry in the addressbookYou can enter address data directly into theaddress book. If you store telephone num-bers in the COMAND phone book, these arealso saved in the address book. If you store anavigation destination, COMAND Online cre-ates an address book entry which includesthe complete navigable address data.XCalling up the address book (Y page 155)XSelect New in the address book by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.An input menu with data fields appears.Input menu with data fields:Selected data field with cursor;Character barXEnter the characters (Y page 34)XSave the entry (Y page 35)Deleting an address book entryXOption 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XOption 2: search for an address book entry(Y page 145).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.Irrespective of the option chosen, a promptwill appear.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.156 Using the address bookTelephone
Displaying details for an address bookentrySelecting an entryDetailed display of address book:To go back to the previous menu;\ Business details=List symbol (to call up options)XSearch for an address book entry(Y page 145)XMake selection in the selection list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.orXCall up the address book (Y page 155)XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XPress W the COMAND controller.The detailed display appears.Starting route guidance to an addressXSelect the address data field by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The route to the destination address is cal-culated and route guidance starts(Y page 68).Calling a telephone numberXSelect the phone number data field by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.This initiates dialling and you can thenmake your call (Y page 141).Showing the details of an address bookentryXSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The display is shown in full.XTo close the detailed display: press the% back button.Changing an address book entryXOption 1: search for an address book entry(Y page 145).XSelect in the selection list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Edit and press W to confirm.XOption 2: call up the detailed view for anaddress book entry (Y page 157).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Edit and press W to confirm.In both cases, the input menu containingdata fields appears.Information about character entry(Y page 34)Using the address book 157TelephoneZ
Changing the category of a telephonenumber data fieldXDisplay details for an address book entry(Y page 157).XSelect the telephone number data field.XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Change category and press W toconfirm.XSelect a number category, e.g. Home.XSelect a telephone category, e.g. Mobile.XIf desired, select Preferred and press Wto confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchthe option on O or off ª. The phone num-ber is displayed as the first number in thephone book and can be dialled immedi-ately.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.The new category is stored.Calling a number stored in an entryConditionsThe mobile phone must be connected via theBluetooth® interface (Y page 132).Dials a numberXDisplay details for an address book entry(Y page 157).XSelect the phone number data field by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.XPress W the COMAND controller to con-firm.orXSelect the list symbol to the right of thedata field by sliding VY the COMAND con-troller.XPress W the COMAND controller to con-firm.XSelect Call and press W to confirm.The telephone makes the call. The displayswitches to telephone mode.Storing the phone number as a speeddial numberXDisplay details for an address book entry(Y page 157).XSelect the phone number data field by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller.XSelect the list symbol to the right of thedata field by sliding VY the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Speed dial and press W to con-firm.You can now store the number in one of theten speed dial presets (Y page 150).Starting route guidance to an entryAddress book entry with navigable dataThis function is available as soon as you havestored a destination in the destination mem-ory (Y page 108).XSearch for an address book entry with theL symbol and select it from the list(Y page 156).XDisplay details for an address book entry(Y page 157).XSelect the address data field by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Route guidance begins.orXSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Navigate and press W to confirm.Route guidance begins.158 Using the address bookTelephone
Address book entry without navigabledataRoute guidance can also be started for anaddress book entry without the L symbol. Ifthe address data or designations do notmatch the digital map, COMAND Onlineprompts you to re-enter the address.XEnter the destination address (Y page 65)XStart route guidanceThe navigable address is added to theaddress book entry automatically.iThis will provide you with an address bookentry that is suitable for navigation. Onceyou have altered the address data in theaddress entry menu, the altered address inthe navigation system will be used the nexttime the system is started instead of thepostal address. Therefore always ensurethat the destination address is indeed therequired destination when navigationstarts from the address book.Voice tagsIntroductionYou can enter voice tags via LINGUATRONIC(see the separate operating instructions).Once you have assigned a voice tag to anaddress book entry, you can vocally call upthis entry and dial a phone number, for exam-ple. You can add one voice tag per addressbook entry.Adding or changing a voice tagXSearch for an address book entry with orwithout a voice tag (¦) (Y page 156).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Voice tag and press W to confirm.XSelect Add or Change and press W to con-firm.Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.LINGUATRONIC guides you through thedialogues.Deleting a voice tagXSearch for an address book entry with avoice tag (Y page 156).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Voice tag and press W to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A deletion prompt appears.XSelect Yes or No and press the 9 buttonto confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online deletesthe voice tag.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Listening to a voice tagXSearch for an address book entry with avoice tag (Y page 156).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Voice tag and press W to confirm.XSelect Listen and press W to confirm.You hear the voice tag.Importing phone book entriesThis function allows you to store phone bookentries from the mobile phone in the addressbook.Possible sources are:Rthe mobile phoneRthe memory cardUsing the address book 159TelephoneZ
Rthe USB deviceRthe Bluetooth® interfaceImported phone book entries are indicated inthe phone book by different symbols(Y page 145).XSearch for an entry in the phone book onthe mobile phone d(Y page 145).XSelect the list symbol to the right of theentry by sliding VY the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XSelect Save entry and press W to con-firm.The Data saved. message appears. Thephone book entry is now saved as anaddress book entry.The d symbol is replaced by the ¥ sym-bol.Importing contactsInformation and requirementsYou can import contacts (vCards) from thememory card and from a USB device into theaddress book, or receive vCards via Blue-tooth®.iUp to 2,500 entries can be imported intothe address book. A message notifies youwhen the maximum number is reached.You then have to delete existing entries inorder to import new entries (Y page 156).Depending on the source of the contact data,different requirements apply:Source ConditionsMemory card The SD memory card isinserted (Y page 217). Itcontains importable con-tact details.USB device The USB device is insertedinto the USB port(Y page 218). It containsimportable contact details.Requirements for receiving vCards via Bluetooth®You can receive vCards from devices (e.g.from a PC) that support the sending of vCardsvia Bluetooth®.It is not necessary to authorise the device inCOMAND to do so.Please bear the following in mind:RBluetooth® must be activated in COMANDand on the Bluetooth® device; see the oper-ating instructions for the device.Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to sendvCards via Bluetooth® (see the operatinginstructions for the device).Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle mustbe switched on.Importing from the memory card or USBdeviceEntries imported from the memory card orfrom a USB device have the ¯ symbol.The following conditions must be fulfilled inorder to import vCards:RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the maindirectory or in folders. COMAND Onlineallows you to select the relevant foldersdirectly.RvCards must have the ".vcf" file extension.iOne vcf file may contain several vCards.COMAND Online supports vCards in ver-sions 2.1 and 3.0.XSelect Address book in the address bookor, if the telephone basic menu is shown,select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Import contacts and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.XSelect From the memory card or From USB device in the menu by turning cVd160 Using the address bookTelephone
the COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Add or Overwrite and press W toconfirm.Add imports the entries from the memorycard or USB device into the address book.Overwrite imports the entries from thememory card or USB device and overwritesall entries in the address book with the¯ symbol. The previous entries are thenno longer available.After the contact data has been importedsuccessfully, you will see a message to thiseffect. The address book or the respectivetelephone basic menu is displayed.iYou can select Overwrite if the addressbook already contains correspondingentries. A message notifies you if theaddress book is full.Receiving vCards via Bluetooth®XSelect Address book in the address bookor, if the telephone basic menu is shown,select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Import contacts and press W toconfirm.XSelect Receive business cards in themenu by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.This interrupts the Bluetooth® connectionbetween COMAND Online and your activemobile phone. COMAND Online is, how-ever, ready to receive vCards from anotherBluetooth® device (PC, mobile phone).XStart the data transfer on the external Blue-tooth® device (see the operating instruc-tions for the device).The number of vCards received is dis-played.XTo end reception: press W or the %back button.COMAND Online then reconnects to themobile phone.Received vCards are identified by the ®symbol in the address book.iIf you switch to another main function,e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, thereception of vCards will be terminated.Deleting contactsXSelect Address book in the address bookor, if the telephone basic menu is shown,select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Delete contacts and press W toconfirm.XSelect one of the following options:RInternal contactsRContacts from storage deviceRReceived business cardsRDelete allA prompt corresponding to your selectionappears.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the contacts are deletedaccording to your selection.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Using the address book 161TelephoneZ
Switching import of contacts on/offYou can choose to have contacts downloadedautomatically when a mobile phone is con-nected with COMAND Online or to have thisfunction suppressed.Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)XSelect Tel in the telephone basic menu bysliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.A menu appears.XSelect Import contacts from <my phone> and press W to confirm.You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-matic download.Proceed as follows if you do not want to havesensitive contacts saved in the address book:XConnect the mobile phone with COMANDOnline.The contacts are automatically downloa-ded to the address book.XDelete the sensitive contacts in theaddress book.XSwitch off the Import contacts from <my phone> function ª.Then no contacts will be downloaded andtherefore no new ones will be added whenyour mobile phone is reconnected withCOMAND Online.Switching the display of contact detailson/off (privacy)Using the Hide data setting, you can decidewhether the phone and address book data areto be visible on the screen. You can therefore,for example, prevent a passenger from seeingthe name of a caller.Activating the function has the followingeffects:RPhone book and address book data fromthe mobile phone are hidden. Therefore,you cannot use the data to make a call,send text messages or navigate.You still have access to the phone andaddress book data saved in COMANDOnline.RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name isnot displayed even if there is an addressbook entry for the number that is calling.RDuring outgoing calls where the number isentered manually, the recipient's name isnot displayed, even if there is an addressbook entry for the entered number.RThe call list is hidden.RRedialling is not possible.RThe received text messages list is hidden.There is still a notification for incoming textmessages. For this to be the case, the con-nected mobile phone must support theMAP profile. However, it is not possible forthe passenger, for example, to view thephone number or quickly access the data.Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)XSelect Tel in the telephone basic menu bysliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.A menu appears.162 Using the address bookTelephone
X To hide details: select Hide data andpress W to confirm.You can allow ª or prevent O access toaddress data.Mercedes-Benz ContactIntroductionMercedes-Benz Contact offers fast assis-tance at the touch of a button – around theclock. For any queries about the vehicle,Mercedes-Benz Contact offers a fast and easyconnecting call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Centre. You can request an appoint-ment, or call for help in the event of a break-down.All important vehicle data is sent via mobilephone to ensure that you receive optimumsupport. The mobile phone must be connec-ted to COMAND Online via the Bluetooth®interface.The following data is transmitted:Rthe vehicle identification numberRthe total distance recorder readingRthe vehicle positionRthe telephone numberRthe service code (only when required formaintenance)iPlease note that Mercedes-Benz Contactis a Mercedes-Benz customer service. Inemergencies, always call the nationalemergency services first, using the stand-ard national emergency service telephonenumbers.iCurrently, this service is available for vehi-cles from the following European countries:RBelgiumRGermanyRFranceRUnited KingdomRIrelandRItalyRLuxembourgRNetherlandsRAustriaRPolandRSwitzerlandRSlovakiaRSpainRCzech RepublicRHungaryCalling the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentreGWARNINGPay attention to the traffic conditions. Youmay otherwise be distracted from the trafficconditions, cause an accident and injure your-self and others.XCall up the COMAND phone book(Y page 144).The MB Contact entry is the first entry inthe COMAND phone book. The entry ishighlighted.There are two ways to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:XPress W the COMAND controller.orXPress the 6 button on COMAND Online.This initiates a call. When the call is con-nected, a voice message prompts you toconfirm the data transmission by pressingthe stated number on the COMAND Onlinekeypad. After confirmation, COMANDOnline sends the required vehicle data.iAlternatively, you can initiate a call usingthe multifunction steering wheel (see thevehicle Owner's Manual).During data transmission, you will see a cor-responding symbol in the display. This maytake a moment. Then, you can select thedesired service and be connected to a spe-cialist from the Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Mercedes-Benz Contact 163TelephoneZ
iContact your Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre for further information onMercedes-Benz Contact, the range of serv-ices offered and on using the function.Demand-actuated service messageTo attain the optimal level of support in main-taining your vehicle, you can arrange a serviceappointment directly with the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Centre. As well as a warning in theinstrument cluster, a window appears in theCOMAND display. Here, a message activelyindicates that a service is required and thismessage enables you to contact theMercedes-Benz Customer Centre directly.You will see the message: <Service_name> is due soon. Would you like to make a workshop appointment?XTo arrange a service appointment:select Call now by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.After your confirmation, the vehicle data issent via Mercedes-Benz Contact, and aCustomer Centre employee personallydeals with your appointment. The informa-tion is then sent to your desired serviceoutlet.They will then contact with you within 24hours to confirm the following details:Rscope of serviceRlength of stayRpriceXTo arrange a service appointment later: select Call later and confirm withW.The window is hidden, then reappears aftera certain amount of time.XTo not arrange a service appointment:select No and confirm with W.The window is hidden and does not showthis maintenance requirement again.Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-temOverviewThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemcan help to decisively reduce the timebetween an accident and the arrival of emer-gency services at the site of the accident. Itcan also help locate an accident site in placesthat are difficult to see.The emergency call can be made automati-cally or manually and is transmitted to theEurope-wide private Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call number. The vehicle position datais simultaneously transmitted by text mes-sage and DTMF to the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call centre transmits the vehicle posi-tion data to one of the Europe-wide publicemergency call centres. In almost all coun-tries, the voice connection can be made in therespective country's language. This allowsmeasures for rescue, recovery or towing to aMercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiatedquickly.If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemfunction is operational, you see the SOS READY display message in the basic tele-phone menu (Y page 167).Information on service availability in Europe(Y page 164).iNote that manual emergency calls shouldonly be used if you or others are in need ofrescue, not e.g. in the event of a break-down.Service availability in EuropeThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system isavailable for your vehicle for 15 years afterthe initial date of production, if:Rit is equipped with COMAND OnlineRit was originally produced for the Europeanmarket164 Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemTelephone
You can find more information on the regionalavailability of the Mercedes-Benz emergencycall system at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect_ecall.ConditionsEquipment requirementsYou need:Ra Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone which,if possible, supports the MAP profile (Mes-sage Access Profile) for sending text mes-sages, orRif the vehicle is equipped with permanentlyinstalled/SAP telephony, a SIM card or asuitable mobile phoneFunctional requirementsThe vehicle has GPS reception.Check the following:RCOMAND Online is switched onRwhen using the Bluetooth® interface, themobile phone must be authorised for andconnected with COMAND Online, and log-ged into a mobile phone networkConnecting a mobile phone (Y page 132)Reconnecting the mobile phone automati-cally (Y page 136)If your vehicle is equipped with permanentlyinstalled/SAP telephony, one of the followingconditions must be fulfilled:Rin "telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAPprofile)", a SIM card has been entered andis logged into the mobile phone network.SAP (SIM Access Profile)Ra suitable SAP-capable mobile phone isconnected to "telephone module with Blue-tooth® (SAP profile)" via the SAP profile andis logged into the mobile phone network.iSAP telephony is described in the sepa-rate operating instructions.iIf your vehicle is equipped with a mobilephone bracket, the bracket should be inser-ted and the mobile phone should be placedin the bracket.This provides you with the following advan-tages:Rthe mobile phone is protected from anymechanical damage in the event of anaccident.Rthe mobile phone remains charged.Rin most cases, the transmitting andreceiving power of a mobile phone is bet-ter if the mobile phone is placed in itsbracket.If the mobile phone is connected, you see theSOS READY display message in the basic tele-phone menu in front of the name of the mobilephone (Y page 167).iFurther information on suitable mobilephones can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.iBefore using this function, make sure thatyour mobile phone contract:Rpermits calls, text messages and roam-ing from both your country of residenceand from abroad, andRthat these functions have been activatedAutomatic emergency call! If an emergency call has been made: pro-vided the road and traffic conditions at theaccident site allow it, remain in the vehicleuntil the voice connection with the operatorat the emergency call centre has beenestablished.On the basis of the call, the operator candecide whether it is necessary to deployrescue teams and/or the police to the acci-dent site.iDepending on the severity of the acci-dent, it can take between one and threeminutes until the operator can speak withyou.Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 165TelephoneZ
REQUIREMENT: the ignition is switched on.If restraint systems have been triggered dur-ing an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call system can automatically dial theEurope-wide private Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call number. Restraint systemsinclude, for example, airbags or belt tension-ers. The emergency call system can establisha voice connection between the vehicle occu-pants and the Mercedes-Benz emergency callcentre.The accident data is sent to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre by SMS andDTMF while the voice connection is operat-ing. The accident data contains metre-preciseGPS positioning data for the moment it issent, as well as the type of vehicle involved inthe accident.iIf your vehicle is equipped with an SOSbutton in the overhead control unit, itflashes until the emergency call has beencompleted.iIt is not possible to end an automaticemergency call.iIn the following cases, you see a corre-sponding message on the COMAND dis-play:Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre could not be madeRnor has a call been automatically forwar-ded to the public emergency call centreIn such circumstances, dial the emergencynumber 112 on your mobile phone.Manual emergency call! If an emergency call has been made: pro-vided the road and traffic conditions at theaccident site allow it, remain in the vehicleuntil the voice connection with the operatorat the emergency call centre has beenestablished.On the basis of the call, the operator candecide whether it is necessary to deployrescue teams and/or the police to the acci-dent site.Vehicles equipped with an SOS buttonIf your vehicle is equipped with the SOS but-ton in the overhead control unit:XPress and hold the SOS button for at leastone second.The manual emergency call is triggered.The indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.iIn the following cases, you see a corre-sponding message on the COMAND dis-play:Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre could not be madeRnor has a call been automatically forwar-ded to the public emergency call centreIn such circumstances, dial the emergencynumber 112 on your mobile phone.In the address bookXCall up the address book (Y page 155).The 1st entry, Mercedes-Benz emer‐gency call, is highlighted.XPress W the COMAND controller.The emergency call to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre is triggered.iIf you have accidentally made a manualemergency call, you can end it in the fol-lowing ways:Rby pressing the ~ button onCOMAND OnlineRby pressing the ~ button on the mul-tifunction steering wheeliIn the following cases, you see a corre-sponding message on the COMAND dis-play:Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre could not be madeRnor has a call been automatically forwar-ded to the public emergency call centre166 Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemTelephone
In such circumstances, dial the emergencynumber 112 on your mobile phone.Transmitted dataDepending on how the data is transmitted(text message or DTMF), different data istransmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call centre.Text messages transmit the following:Rthe vehicle's GPS position dataRthe direction of travelRthe vehicle identification numberRa Mercedes-Benz Contact codingRan indication of whether the call was trig-gered automatically or manuallyRa time stampRthe language settings on COMAND OnlineDTMF sends a reduced data package thatdoes not contain the vehicle identificationnumber and time stamp.Displays in the COMAND display:Mercedes-Benz emergency call system isoperationalIf the Mercedes-Benz emergency call is avail-able, you see the SOS READY display messagein the basic telephone menu.If a Mercedes-Benz emergency call is trig-gered either automatically or manually, youalso see the Mercedes-Benz emergency call active display message.If position and vehicle data are sent to theMercedes-Benz emergency call centre, yousee the Mercedes-Benz emergency call Sending data display message.If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call con-nects with the Mercedes-Benz emergencycall centre, you see the Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call Connected display mes-sage.Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 167TelephoneZ
168
Features of your COMAND Online ... 170General notes .................................... 170Setting access data .......................... 171Establishing/ending the connection 178Google™ Local Search ...................... 179Destination/route download ........... 182Weather ............................................. 186Options .............................................. 191Additional services ........................... 195Internet radio .................................... 196Internet .............................................. 197169Online and Internet functions
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.General notesConditions for accessGWARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating COMAND Online.The COMAND Online Mercedes-Benz Appsand Internet access are available via the Blue-tooth® interface or via the data-enabled MBSAP module.In order to use the functions, the followingconditions are necessary:RThe mobile phone supports the DUN Blue-tooth® profile (Dial-Up Networking) and isconnected to COMAND Online via the Blue-tooth® interface (Y page 132). The DUNBluetooth® profile enables the mobilephone to establish a dial-up connection tothe Internet.RYou need a valid mobile service contractwith a data option, which is used to calcu-late the associated connection costs.RThe access data of the mobile phone net-work provider must be set on COMANDOnline for the connected mobile phone(Y page 171).iIf the connected mobile phone supportsthe PAN Bluetooth profile (Personal AreaNetwork), you can use the automatic con-figuration function (Y page 172).iYou can obtain more detailed informationabout suitable mobile phones on the Inter-net at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from yourMercedes-Benz Service Centre.iIf you use incorrect access data, addi-tional costs may be incurred. This can hap-pen when you use details that are differentfrom the contract or details from anothercontract/data package.iThe availability of individual Mercedes-Benz Apps may vary depending on thecountry.iThe terms of use are shown whenCOMAND Online is used for the first timeand then once a year thereafter. Only readand accept the terms of use when the vehi-cle is stationary.iInternet pages cannot be shown on thedriver's side while the vehicle is in motion.Connection difficulties while the vehi-cle is in motionThe following could be the cause of call dis-connection:Rinsufficient GSM/UMTS network coverageRthe vehicle has moved into a GSM cell withno free channels170 General notesOnline and Internet functions
Rthe SIM card used is not compatible withthe network availableRyou are using a mobile phone with "Twin-card" and the mobile phone with the sec-ond SIM card is logged into the network atthe same time.Function restrictionsYou will not be able to use the mobile phone,will no longer be able to use the mobile phone,or you may have to wait before using it, in thefollowing situations:Rif the mobile phone is switched offRif the "Bluetooth®" function is switched offin COMAND OnlineRif the Bluetooth® function is switched off onthe mobile phone while you are using Blue-tooth® interface telephonyRif the mobile phone is not logged into amobile phone networkRif neither the mobile phone network nor themobile phone allow simultaneous use of aphone and an Internet connectioniIt is possible that you may not be able toreceive calls when an Internet connectionis active. This depends on the mobile phoneand the mobile phone network used.RoamingWhen you are driving your vehicle in a differ-ent country and using the COMAND OnlineInternet and online functions, you may incuradditional costs (roaming fees). When you arein a different country, your SIM card must beenabled for data roaming. If your mobilephone network provider does not have a dataroaming agreement with the roaming partner,it may not be possible to establish an Internetconnection. Deactivate this function on yourmobile phone if you want to avoid data roam-ing when you are in a different country.Setting access dataIntroductionTo use online and Internet functions, youneed Internet access data for the connectedmobile phone. You can obtain this from yourmobile phone network provider.A selected/manually set mobile phone net-work provider is only valid for the mobilephone connected when the selection/settingis made. The mobile phone network provideris set automatically upon reconnection.iWhen you are driving your vehicle in a dif-ferent country and using the online andInternet functions on COMAND Online, youmay incur additional costs (roaming fees).iWhile initialising the mobile phone for theInternet connection, access data which isalready on the mobile phone may be over-written. You should therefore check thesettings on the mobile phone (see themobile phone operating instructions).iAdjust the access data settings when thevehicle is stationary. You may otherwise bedistracted from the traffic conditions,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.Selecting/setting Internet accessdataCalling up the list of mobile phone net-work providersXSelect the ® icon in the main function barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.Setting access data 171Online and Internet functionsZ
XSelect Settings by sliding ÆV and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.When you connect the mobile phone toCOMAND Online for the first time, there isno mobile phone network provider preset(Y page 132). Provider: is followed by thewords not selected.If a mobile phone is connected and a mobilephone network provider has been selected,the name of the mobile phone network isshown after Provider.XPress W the COMAND controller.The list of mobile phone network providersappears.List of mobile phone network providers (empty)In order to set the access data of the mobilephone network provider you can:Rselect the predefined access data of themobile phone network provider(Y page 173)Rfor automatic configuration – this optiononly appears in the list of providers if theconnected mobile phone supports theBluetooth® PAN (Personal Area Network)profile (Y page 172).Rmanually set the access data of the mobilephone network provider (Y page 175)Configuring access data automaticallyRequirement: your telephone must be con-nected to COMAND Online via Bluetooth®and must support the Bluetooth® PAN profile.Option 1 if your telephone is not yet config-ured for Internet access:XSelect the ® icon in the main function barby sliding ZV and turning cVd the172 Setting access dataOnline and Internet functions
COMAND controller and press W to con-firm.You will see a message informing you thatautomatic configuration is possible.XSelect Yes and press W to confirm.Option 2:XIn the list of mobile phone network provid-ers, select Autom. configuration <Device_name> by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm (Y page 171).The configuration data is transferred fromthe mobile phone. If the configuration issuccessful, a # dot appears in front ofAutom. configuration <Device_name>.Selecting access data of the mobilephone network providerSearching for providersXSelect Search for providers in themobile phone network providers list byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm (Y page 171).A list of countries appears.XSelect the country of your mobile phonenetwork provider, e.g. Germany, and pressW to confirm.The list of available mobile phone networkproviders appears.iThe access data for the mobile phone net-work provider is selected once for themobile phone connected and is loadedagain each time the mobile phone is con-nected (Y page 171).iYou must set the access data of themobile phone network provider who pro-vides the SIM card and the associated datapackage (access settings) for the connec-ted mobile phone. The access data remainsthe same if you are in a different country(roaming). The access data of another net-work is not selected.There are mobile phone network providerswho offer multiple access data. Thisdepends on the data package used, forexample.The mobile phone network provider only has one access settingXSelect the mobile phone network providerby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.A menu appears.Setting access data 173Online and Internet functionsZ
XTo check preset access data: selectEdit and confirm with W.The list of access data appears(Y page 175).XCheck the access data.X If the access data is correct: press the% reset button or the & symbol andpress W to confirm.You can now accept the access data of themobile phone network provider.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.The list of mobile phone network providersappears; the access data of the providerhas been accepted.X To edit the access data: proceed asdescribed for manually entering the accessdata (Y page 175).When you confirm the edited access data,the list of mobile phone network providersappears and displays the selected provider.If, after selecting a mobile phone network provider, several access settings are dis-played:XSelect the appropriate access setting byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.A menu appears.XTo check access settings: select Editand press W to confirm.The list of access data appears(Y page 175).XCheck the access data.XIf the access data is correct: press the% reset button or the & symbol andpress W to confirm.You can now accept the access data of themobile phone network provider.XSelect Save and press W to confirm.The list of mobile phone network providersappears; the access data of the providerhas been accepted.XTo edit the access data: proceed asdescribed in "Manually setting the accessdata of the mobile phone network provider"(Y page 175).When you confirm the edited access data,the list of mobile phone network providersappears and displays the selected provider.List of mobile phone network providers with theselected providerThe currently selected access settings (# dotin front of the entry) are used for the connec-ted mobile phone.XTo return to the carousel view: press the% back button twice.orXPress W the COMAND controller and thenthe % back button.174 Setting access dataOnline and Internet functions
Manually setting the access data of themobile phone network providerList of access data (new provider)Calling up the list of access dataXConfirm Create new provider in the listof mobile phone network providers bypressing W the COMAND controller.The list of access data appears. The stand-ard name Provider <x> is automaticallyentered into the Provider field. You cannow make the entries.iThe access data of the mobile phone net-work provider is set once for the connectedmobile phone.Explanation of the access dataInput field MeaningProvider: Name of the provider tobe displayed in the list ofmobile phone networkproviders. The name canbe freely selected.The standard entry isProvider <x>.Ph. number: Access number for estab-lishing the connectioniThe access numberdepends on the mobilephone used. For GSM/UMTS mobile phones,*99***1# is used as astandard.Access point:APN network access point(Access Point Name)You can obtain this infor-mation from your mobilephone network provider.iEntry is not necessaryfor all mobile phonenetwork providers andmobile phones.User ID: The user identificationcan be obtained from yourmobile phone networkprovider.iEntry is not necessaryfor all mobile phonenetwork providers.Password: The password can beobtained from yourmobile phone networkprovider.iEntry is not necessaryfor all mobile phonenetwork providers.Setting access data 175Online and Internet functionsZ
Input field MeaningDNS address: The DNS addresses(Domain Name Service)can be negotiated auto-matically or entered man-ually. The required infor-mation can be obtainedfrom your mobile phonenetwork provider.iMost mobile phonenetwork providers sup-port the Automaticfunction. If you selectedthe Manual option, youare usually required toenter a DNS address.DNS 1:DNS 2:Fields for entering theDNS server addressesmanually. The addresscan be obtained from yourmobile phone networkprovider.Entering access dataXIn the list of access data, confirm the Pro‐vider input field by pressingW(Y page 175).An input menu appears.XEnter the provider (Y page 34).XTo enter the phone number: in the list ofaccess data, select the Ph. number: inputfield by sliding ÆV or turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The input menu for the phone numberappears.XEnter the telephone number.XTo enter the access data: in the list ofaccess data, select the Access point:input field and confirm by pressing W .XEnter the access data.XTo enter the user ID: in the list of accessdata, select the User ID: input field andconfirm by pressing W .XEnter the user ID.XTo enter the password: in the list ofaccess data, select the Password: inputfield and confirm by pressing W .XEnter the password.XTo set the DNS address: select Auto‐matic or Manual with the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.Automatic: the DNS address is set auto-matically.176 Setting access dataOnline and Internet functions
Manual: uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS2.Entering the DNS1Entering the example DNSXAfter selecting Manual, select the DNS1input field with the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XEnter 172.28.4.81, for example.Internet access data for other mobilephonesIf the access data is already available in thelist of mobile phone network providers, youcan use it for additional mobile phones.The following prerequisites are required forthis:Rthe additional mobile phone must be con-nected.Rthe access data must apply to the mobilephone contract of the currently connectedmobile phone.XSelect a provider from the list of mobilephone network providers by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm (Y page 173).After you select the provider, the list ofmobile phone network providers is closed.The selected provider is entered.Managing access data of the mobilephone network providerOverviewThe access data of the mobile phone networkprovider can be:ReditedRcopied, then edited and accepted for a newprovider nameRdeletediChanges that you make to the accessdata of a mobile phone network providerapply to all mobile phones that use thisaccess data.iWhen the Internet connection is active,you cannot edit or delete the access dataof the currently set mobile phone networkprovider.Editing the access dataXSelect a provider from the list of mobilephone network providers by turning cVdthe COMAND controller (Y page 173).XSelect the symbol to the right of the entryby sliding VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XConfirm Edit by pressing W.The access data is displayed.XEdit the access data. A description of theentry can be found under "Manually settingthe access data of the mobile phone net-work provider" (Y page 175).Setting access data 177Online and Internet functionsZ
Saving access data under a new pro-vider nameXSelect a provider from the list of mobilephone network providers by turning cVdthe COMAND controller (Y page 173).XSelect the symbol to the right of the entryby sliding VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XConfirm Copy provider entry by press-ing W.The access data is displayed.XEdit the access data. A description of theentry can be found under "Making entries"in the "Manually setting the access data ofthe mobile phone network provider" sec-tion (Y page 175).Deleting the access data of the mobilephone network providerXSelect a provider from the list of mobilephone network providers by turning cVdthe COMAND controller (Y page 173).XSelect the symbol to the right of the entryby sliding VY the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XConfirm Delete by pressing W.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto delete the access data.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.Selecting the length of time for auto-matic disconnection from the InternetIf a preset time has elapsed during which nei-ther the online functions nor the Internet havebeen used, COMAND Online automaticallydisconnects from the Internet.XSelect Settings in the carousel view bysliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Disconnect automatically after: and press W to confirm.The # dot indicates the current setting.XSelect 5 min, 15 min or Off and pressW to confirm.Off switches the function off.An active Internet connection is identified bythe double arrows on the top right of the dis-play.Establishing/ending the connectionEstablishing the connectionThe conditions for establishing a connectionare described in "General notes"(Y page 170).XOption 1: select the ® icon in the mainfunction bar by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XTurn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-troller until the Mercedes-Benz Appspanel or a favourite is brought to the front,if these have been previously created(Y page 202).178 Establishing/ending the connectionOnline and Internet functions
XOption 2: enter a web address(Y page 197).XFor both options, press W the COMANDcontroller.The Internet connection is established. Anactive Internet connection is identified withsymbol :. The example shows the menuin theGoogle™ Local Search(Y page 180) func-tion.XTo cancel the connection: while the con-nection is being established, confirm Can‐cel by pressing W.orXPress the ~ button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.iIf a phone call is made at the same timeas the active Internet connection, the ¡symbol is displayed in :. The Internet con-nection remains active depending on themobile phone and mobile phone networkused.Ending the connectionXPress the ~ button on COMAND Onlineor on the multifunction steering wheel.orXSelect the scissors symbol on the bottomright of the carousel view and press W toconfirm.iIf the mobile phone Internet connection iscancelled, COMAND Online tries to recon-nect. You should therefore always close theconnection on COMAND Online or via themultifunction steering wheel.Google™ Local SearchCalling up the local search menuXSelect the ® icon in the main function barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel tothe front by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and pressing W to confirm.The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.XBring the Google Local Search panel tothe front and press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: select Back by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.Google™ Local Search 179Online and Internet functionsZ
SearchEntry restrictionIt is only possible to enter a search term inthe input menu when the vehicle is stationary.Entering a search termInput menuXConfirm Search in the Local search menuby pressing W.The input menu appears.XTo enter using the character bar: enterthe search term.XTo enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid suc-cession.The character appears when the key ispressed. The first available character ishighlighted.XAfter entering the search term, select¬ by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.A menu appears. Here, you can selectwhere the destination search should begin.Selecting a search positionXAfter a search term has been entered andconfirmed, a menu appears.COMAND Online searches for availablePOIs for the search term entered:Rnear the current vehicle positionRalong the calculated routeIf a destination has previously beenentered, the function is available.Rnear the destinationIf a destination has previously beenentered, the function is available.Rnear an addressXAfter selecting Near destination, enteran address and confirm.The search results are displayed.Example: Google™ search results180 Google™ Local SearchOnline and Internet functions
Using search resultsXSelect an entry in the list of search resultsby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.A menu appears.XTo show the detailed view: confirmDetails by pressing W the COMAND con-troller.The address of the selected entry is dis-played.XTo use a search result as the destina-tion: select Navigate to by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.You then switch to navigation mode andcan start route calculation (Y page 68).You then switch to navigation mode andcan start route calculation.iThe search result is stored in the"Last destinations" memory at the sametime (Y page 110). You can take the desti-nation from this memory and save it per-manently in the destination memory(Y page 108).XTo call up a destination: select Call withthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.You then switch to the telephone functionand make the call (Y page 140).You then switch to the telephone functionand make the call.iIf there is no phone number available, themenu item cannot be selected.XTo import a destination: select Importwith the COMAND controller and press Wto confirm.You can choose whether you want to savethe POI as a personal POI on the SD mem-ory card or in the address book.iIf there is no SD memory card in the slot,the As personal POI menu item cannotbe selected.XInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo save as a personal POI: confirm Save as personal POI by pressing W theCOMAND controller.The entry is saved as a personal POI on theSD memory card.iYou can use a personal POI in navigationmode for route calculation (Y page 86).If the personal POI is saved on the SD mem-ory, you can also use it for route calculationin another vehicle.XTo save to the address book: select To address book by turning cVd theGoogle™ Local Search 181Online and Internet functionsZ
COMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The entry is stored in the address book.Popular searchesThis function allows you to search using pre-defined search criteria.XBring Popular searches in the localsearch menu to the front by turning cVd(the COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.A menu displays the available search crite-ria.Example: popular Google™ searchesXSelect the search criteria and press W toconfirm.XProceed as described in the "Selecting thesearch position" section (Y page 180). Ifthe vehicle is stationary, the search resultscan be supplemented manually, e.g. "HotelAdler".Search historyThis function offers you the previous searchqueries.XBring Search history in the local searchmenu to the front by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The previous search queries are shownwith the most recent at the top.XSelect the search criteria and press W toconfirm.XProceed as described in the "Selecting thesearch position" section (Y page 180). Ifthe vehicle is stationary, the search resultscan be supplemented manually, e.g. "HotelAdler".Destination/route downloadIntroductionYou can send destinations and routes fromGoogle™ maps to the server and downloadthese via this function. You can use the des-182 Destination/route downloadOnline and Internet functions
tinations and routes for route guidance andsave them for further use.Step 1: sending destinations/routesto the serverXCall up the website for Google™ Maps onthe Internet.XSelect the destination.XSelect "Mercedes-Benz" as the companyentry.XSelect identification for the download (vehi-cle identification number or e-mailaddress).XConfirm "Send" on the Google™ Maps web-site.The destinations/routes are sent to theserver.iThe vehicle identification number (VIN) ispreset at the factory as identification fordownload. Instead of the vehicle ID, youcan also enter your e-mail address here(Y page 194).The availability of the Google™ Maps func-tion is country-dependant.Step 2: downloading destinations/routes from the serverProceed as follows to use destinations/routes that have been sent to the server:XSelect the ® symbol in the main functionbar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel tothe front by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.XBring the Destination/route downloadpanel to the front and press W to confirm.iWith Exit, you quit the destination/routedownload.With Options, you set the options for thedestination/route download(Y page 194).XConfirm the Destination/route down‐load panel by pressing W.Available routes and destinations areshown in the list.You can save up to 20 routes and 50 desti-nations for your vehicle on the server and dis-play these in the list. If you send further routesor destinations to the server, the existingentries are deleted from the list.iThe routes/destinations sent from Goo-gle™ maps to the server are automaticallydeleted from there after seven days.Destination/route download 183Online and Internet functionsZ
Step 3: using destinations/routesCalling up a menuXSelect an entry in the list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.Displaying detailsExample for start and destinationExample of a destination addressXConfirm Details in the menu by pressingW the COMAND controller.The route or destination is displayed.XTo call up a POI: confirm the entry bypressing W.iYou can use the function if:Ra mobile phone is connected(Y page 132)Rthe destination address contains a tele-phone number184 Destination/route downloadOnline and Internet functions
Using as a destinationXSelect Navigate to in the menu by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You then switch to navigation mode andcan start route calculation (Y page 68).iA route can only be stored as a personalPOI on an SD memory card or taken directlyfor route calculation (Y page 185).Placing a call at the destinationXSelect Call in the menu by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.You then switch to the telephone functionand make the call (Y page 140).Importing a destination/routeWhen importing, you can choose whether youwant to save the destination as a personal POIon an SD memory card or in the address book.You can only save routes as personal POIs toan SD memory card, but not in the addressbook.XSelect Import in the menu with theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.iIf there is no SD memory card in the slot,the As personal POI menu item is greyedout.XInsert the SD memory card (Y page 217).XTo save as a personal POI: confirm As personal POI by pressing W theCOMAND controller.The entry is saved as a personal POI on theSD memory card.iYou can use a personal POI in navigationmode for route calculation (Y page 86).You can also use a personal POI in anothervehicle for route calculation.XTo save to the address book: select To address book by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The entry is stored in the address book.Destination/route download 185Online and Internet functionsZ
Deleting a destination/route from theserverXSelect an entry in the list by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A query appears asking whether the desti-nation or the route should be deleted.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.WeatherIntroductionCOMAND can receive weather forecasts any-where in the world via online connection anddisplay them in an information chart (currentday, 5-day forecast) or in the weather map.The weather map can display the followingweather data with symbols:Rhazard icons (e.g. storms, slippery condi-tions)Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)Ratmospheric pressure conditionsRtemperaturesRcloud coverRwind direction and speedsSwitching the weather display on/offXTo switch on: select the ® icon in themain function bar by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The carousel view appears.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller untilMercedes-Benz Apps is brought to thefront and press W to confirm.The Mercedes-Benz Apps carousel viewappears.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller untilWeather is brought to the front and pressW to confirm.The information chart shows the currentweather at the current vehicle position (fac-tory setting). You can change the defaultview and the default location in the Optionsmenu (Y page 192).You see the following information:Rthe time of the current weather reportRthe current temperatureRinformation on the weather (e.g. cloudy,rain)Rthe maximum daytime temperatureRthe minimum daytime temperature186 WeatherOnline and Internet functions
Rthe probability of rainRthe forecast for the current day (three timeintervals)XTo switch to a five-day forecast: confirm5-day by pressing W.The information chart displays the forecastfor the next five days in the currently selec-ted location.XTo return to the current weather infor-mation: confirm Current by pressing W.XTo deactivate: press the % back but-ton.orXSelect Back by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Irrespective of the option chosen, the car-ousel view will appear.Displaying additional informationIn addition to the current temperatures, youcan also display information such as humidityand air quality (if the information is available).XSelect Info in the information chart byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The information chart displays informationfor the selected location.Selecting the locationIntroductionYou can select the following options for theweather forecast:Rthe current vehicle positionRthe destinationRa winter sports areaRa location anywhere in the worldYou can select the location in the informationchart (option 1 (Y page 187)) or in the map(option 2) (Y page 189). Weather informationis supplied by the nearest weather station.Option 1: selecting the location in theinformation chartXSelect Position in the information chartby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.A menu appears.XTo select the current vehicle position:confirm Current position by pressingW.XTo select the destination: select Near destination by turning cVd theWeather 187Online and Internet functionsZ
COMAND controller and press W to con-firm.iIf a route has been calculated, you canselect Near destination(Y page 68). Themenu item is otherwise greyed out.XTo select a winter sports area: select In winter sports areas in the menu andpress W to confirm.A list of countries appears.XSelect a country, e.g. ANDORRA, and pressW to confirm.The available winter sports areas are dis-played.XSelect a winter sports area from the menuand press W to confirm.The information chart shows informationon:Rtype of skiingRsnow conditionsRtemperaturesXTo select the location: select Other location in the menu by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.An input menu appears.XEnter the search area. Character entry(Y page 36).The information chart with the weatherforecast appears when the search area hasbeen entered.Entry ExamplePostcode 10117City BerlinAddress Unter den LindenAirport code TXL (Tegel Airport)188 WeatherOnline and Internet functions
Option 2: selecting the location in theweather mapXCall up the weather map and move to thedesired location (Y page 189).XPress W the COMAND controller.The menu bar is shown.XPress W the COMAND controller again andconfirm Display weather.The information chart displays the currentweather for the selected location.Weather mapCalling up the weather mapXSelect Map in the information chart by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The map appears in a scale of 20 km.XTo display the crosshair: slide ZV theCOMAND controller.XTo scroll the weather map: slide XVY,ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.The weather map moves in the correspond-ing direction under the crosshair.XTo change the map scale: as soon as youturn cVd the COMAND controller, thescale bar appears.XTurn cVd until the desired scale is set.iThe data is downloaded again from theserver for these functions. This can delaythe display of the weather map.Showing/hiding the menu in theweather mapXTo show: press W the COMAND controllerin the weather map.XTo hide: slide up ZV the COMAND con-troller.Switching to the weather informationdisplay in the mapXDisplay the menu on the weather map(Y page 189).XSelect View by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Weather char-acteristicDisplay in the mapHazard icons Shows warningsWeather radarDisplays the rain radar asa coloured area on themapWeather 189Online and Internet functionsZ
Weather char-acteristicDisplay in the mapAtmospheric pressureDisplays air pressurewith isobars and as a col-oured area on the mapTemperatures Displays the tempera-turesCloud cover Displays the cloud coverWinds Displays wind directionwith an arrow and windspeed with colouringiThe hazard icon display is preset in thefactory. This presetting can be changed inthe Options menu (Y page 192).XSelect a weather characteristic by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The # dot indicates which weather charac-teristic is currently displayed on the map.You can select one weather characteristicat a time.LegendXDisplay the menu on the weather map(Y page 189).XSelect View by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Legend and press W to confirm.The legend is displayed in accordance withthe currently selected weather character-istic.Legend for warningsLegend for precipitation radarXTo switch back to the information chart: display the menu on the weathermap. (Y page 189)XSelect Display weather and press W toconfirm.Memory functionsStoring a location in the memoryYou can save locations that are called up fre-quently in ten preset positions (0, 1 – 9).XSelect the location (Y page 187).XPress and hold a number key.When the location is saved, the number ofthe selected preset comes before the nameof the place in the caption.Selecting a location from the memoryXQuick select: when the weather display(COMAND Online) is switched on and an190 WeatherOnline and Internet functions
entry is available, press a number key, e.g.l.The information chart appears and displaysthe weather information.XFrom the weather memory: select Posi‐tion in the information chart by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Presets and press W to confirm.XSelect a preset position that has an entryby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The information chart appears and displaysthe weather information.OptionsIntroductionYou can select options for the followingMercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND Online:RLocal search (Y page 191)RWeather (Y page 192)RDestination/route download(Y page 194)You can reset the selected options to thedefault settings (Y page 195).Calling up the Options menuOptions menuXSelect the ® symbol in the main functionbar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel tothe front by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and pressing W to confirm.XSelect Options by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Selecting options for the local searchSetting the search radiusXSelect Local Search in the Options menuby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The menu shows the current settings.XConfirm the entry after Search radius:by pressing W.The # dot indicates the currently selectedsearch radius.Options 191Online and Internet functionsZ
XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The selected setting is accepted.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Selecting a service providerXSelect Local Search in the Options menuby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The menu shows the current settings.XSelect the entry after Service pro‐vider: by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.The # dot indicates the currently selectedservice provider.iIf the entry is greyed out, you cannotselect the service provider.XSelect an entry and press W to confirm.The selected service provider is accepted.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Deleting/saving search queriesXSelect the Delete all searches entry byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.A prompt appears, asking whether youreally wish to delete the search queries.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.Selecting options for the weather dis-playSetting the default viewYou can specify which view is called up afteractivating the weather display (Y page 186).You can make the following settings:Rcurrent weatherRfive-day forecastRinfo viewRlast viewXSelect Weather in the options menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm (Y page 191).The menu shows the current settings.XConfirm the entry after Default view: bypressing W.The # dot indicates the currently selecteddefault view.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The selected view is accepted.192 OptionsOnline and Internet functions
XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Setting the default locationYou can make the following settings:Rcurrent positionRcurrent destinationRpresetsXSelect Weather in the options menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm (Y page 191).The menu shows the current settings.XSelect the entry after Default loca‐tion: by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.The # dot indicates the currently selecteddefault location.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The selected location is accepted.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Selecting weather data for the mapviewThe weather map can display the followingweather data:Rhazard icons (e.g. storms, slippery condi-tions)Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)Ratmospheric pressure conditionsRtemperaturesRcloud coverRwind direction and speedsYou can select one feature each for the mapview.The availability of weather information iscountry-dependent.XSelect Weather in the options menu byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm (Y page 191).The menu shows the current settings.XSelect the entry after Default map view: by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.The # dot indicates the currently selectedfeature.XSelect an entry and press W to confirm.The selected feature is accepted.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Options 193Online and Internet functionsZ
Setting options for destination/routedownloadSpecifying the ID for the downloadYou can replace the vehicle identificationnumber (ID) with your e-mail address. Thevehicle identification number is usuallyentered.XSelect Destination/route download inthe Options menu by sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm (Y page 191).The menu shows the current settings.XConfirm the entry next to ID: by pressingW.An input menu appears.XEnter an e-mail address. Enter the charac-ters (Y page 34).XAfter entry, select ¬ and press W toconfirm.The e-mail address is entered in the menu.An e-mail will be sent to your e-mail addressshortly afterwards. You must confirm itwithin 48 hours. Otherwise, your previousID will continue to be used.XTo complete the settings, check your mail-box and follow the link in the e-mail.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Setting the type of importYou can choose between manual and auto-matic importing.XSelect the entry after Import: by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The # dot indicates the current setting.XSelect Manual or Automatic and pressW to confirm.The setting is accepted.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Deleting/keeping POIs after they havebeen imported to the serverXSelect the entry after Import & delete:by turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The # dot indicates the current setting.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.The setting is accepted.Yes deletes the POIs after importing to theserver.194 OptionsOnline and Internet functions
No does not delete the POIs on the server.XTo exit the menu: select Back by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.iRoutes and destinations are automati-cally deleted on the server after sevendays.Resetting adjustmentsThe reset function resets all Mercedes-BenzApps settings to the factory settings. Afterresetting, Google™ can only send routes anddestinations to the vehicle identification num-ber (ID) once you have activated your e-mailaddress again (Y page 194).XSelect the ® symbol in the main functionbar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel tothe front by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and pressing W to confirm.XSelect Options by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Reset and press W to confirm.A prompt appears asking whether youreally wish to reset.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, the settings are reset.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Additional servicesMercedes-Benz Mobile WebsiteThe COMAND Online functions contain theMercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a prede-fined favourite.XSelect the ® icon in the main function barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐site panel to the front by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressing W toconfirm.The Mercedes-Benz home page appears.iYou cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website panel.Further Mercedes-Benz AppsYou can call up additional Mercedes-BenzApps, such as Facebook, or Google™ serv-ices, such as Street View or Panoramio, here.Additional services 195Online and Internet functionsZ
The following examples show how to call upa Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook,and generally how to call up Google™ serv-ices.To call up Facebook:XSelect the ® icon in the main function barby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel tothe front by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and pressing W to confirm.The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears.XSelect Facebook by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The Facebook homepage appears.XTo call up Google™ services: this is donethrough Google™ Local Search(Y page 182).iFacebook is a social networking website.This App allows you to log in from yourvehicle and use Facebook's many func-tions.Google™ Street View allows you to viewstreets in 360-degree panoramas.Google™ Panoramio expands Google LocalSearch to include photos at the selectedposition.Internet radioGeneral notesA good Internet connection is required totransmit audio data efficiently. To ensure thebest-possible reception, your mobile phoneshould be connected to the vehicle's exterioraerial via the phone bracket (optional).Bear in mind that a relatively large volume ofdata can be transmitted when using the Inter-net radio. An average 128 kBit per seconddata transfer rate can transfer 56 MB of datain one hour.The data transfer rate of a station is displayedwhile receiving data.Calling up the Internet radioXSelect the ® icon in the main function barby sliding ZV and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The carousel view appears.XBring the Internet Radio panel to thefront by turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.The Internet radio menu appears.Searching for stationsXSelect Search in the Internet radio menu.A list with search criteria appears.XSelect criterion and press W to confirm.iFor example as a search criterion, you canset an Internet radio station that is locatedclose to your navigation destination.Connecting to a stationXSearch for a station (Y page 196).XSelect Internet radio ; (play) in themenu and press W to confirm.The call is placed.If the data stream is interrupted, an automaticattempt is made to re-establish the connec-tion.196 Internet radioOnline and Internet functions
Manually re-establishing a connectionXSelect Internet radio ; (play) again inthe menu and press W to confirm.Ending data transfer:XSelect Internet radio É (stop) in themenu and press W to confirm.orXChange to another audio source, for exam-ple Disc.If you change to a main function that is not anaudio source, e.g. navigation, the data con-nection remains on. You can continue listen-ing to the set station.InternetDisplay restrictionInternet pages cannot be shown while thevehicle is in motion.Calling up a websiteCalling up the carousel viewXSelect the ® symbol in the main functionbar by turning cVd the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.You can now enter a web address (option 1(Y page 197)) or select it in the carousel view(option 2 (Y page 198)).To select in the carousel view, you must firstcreate favourites (Y page 202).Option 1: entering the web addressYou can enter the web address using eitherthe character bar or the number keypad(Y page 36).XCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XSelect www by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.An input menu appears.XTo enter using the character bar: enterthe web address in the input line. Characterentry (Y page 34).As soon as the first letter has been enteredin the input line, a list appears below it. Thelist shows web addresses that begin withthe letters you have entered and webaddresses that have already been calledup.The list is empty the first time you call it up.Internet 197Online and Internet functionsZ
XTo enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid suc-cession.The character appears when the key ispressed. The first available letter is high-lighted. Enter the character using the char-acter bar (Y page 37).XAfter entering the web address, select the¬ symbol by turning cVd or slidingXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The website is called up.XTo select a web address in the list: slideZV the COMAND controller in the inputmenu with character bar.The list is activated.XSelect the web address by turning cVd orsliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The web address is entered in the input line.XPress W the COMAND controller.The website is called up. The Establish‐ing data connection to <provider name>... message appears.Option 2: selecting favouritesYou must create at least one favourite in thecarousel view for this function (Y page 202).XCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XIn the carousel view, bring a favourite to thefront by turning cVd or sliding XVY theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The website is called up.198 InternetOnline and Internet functions
Navigating the websiteOverviewStep ActivityXTurn cVd thecontroller.Navigates from oneitem that can beselected (e.g. link,text field or selec-tion list) to the nextand highlights therespective elementon the website.Sliding the control-ler:XLeft or right XVYXUp or down ZVÆXDiagonally aVbMoves the pointeron the page.XPress W the con-troller.Calls up the menu oropens the selecteditem.XPress %. Calls up the previ-ous page.XPress j. Closes the Internetbrowser. If severalwindows are open,the current windowis closed.Example: highlighting an item that canbe selectedXTurn cVd COMAND Controller.A button is highlighted in the example.Example: entering textXSelect an input line by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The character bar appears.XEnter the text using the character bar or thenumber keypad. Character entry(Y page 34).XIf the text has been entered, selectthe¬symbol by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The text has now been entered.Internet 199Online and Internet functionsZ
Menu functionsCalling up a menuXTo call up the shortcut: highlight theselectable item on the page by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Start of menuEnd of menuXTo call up the entire menu: when theshortcut is displayed, slide VÆ theCOMAND controller downwards.orXSelect a free area on the website by slidingZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.OpeningOpens the website to the selectable item.XCall up the menu (Y page 200).XConfirm Open by pressing W the COMANDcontroller.Entering a URLXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Enter URL by turning cVd or slid-ing ZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XEnter a web address (URL) (Y page 197).Calling up the previous websiteXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Previous by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Calling up the next websiteXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Next by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.ViewYou can use this function to:Rposition a selection window on websitesthat are larger than the displayRselect a window that is already open200 InternetOnline and Internet functions
XCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect View by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress the z key on the number keypad.iYou cannot use the z key if a phonecall is being made.XTo position the selection window: con-firm Full-screen view of current page by pressing W the COMAND control-ler.A selection window appears on the web-site.XSlide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMANDcontroller and position the selection win-dow on the website.XPress W the COMAND controller.The selected section is enlarged.XTo display and select open windows:select Display open windows by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The carousel view appears.XPress W the COMAND controller.The website is displayed.Exiting the menuXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Exit by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Internet browser is closed. If other win-dows are opened in the background,another prompt appears.Other menu functionsOpening in a new windowYou can open up to five windows simultane-ously.XCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Open in new window by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.XTo select a window: select View and pressW to confirm.XSelect the website in the carousel view byturning cVd or sliding XVY the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Add to favouritesAdds the current website to the favourites.The website can then be called up using theInternet 201Online and Internet functionsZ
carousel view. You can save up to 20 favour-ites in the carousel view.XCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Add to favourites by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The following message appears: The page has been added as a favourite.Display favouritesXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Display favourites by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.The favourites are shown in the carouselview.Further information on favourites(Y page 202).Reloading a websiteXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Reload by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Close active windowXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Close active window by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.orXPress the j button to the right of theCOMAND controller.iYou cannot use the j button if aphone call is being made.Displaying the complete web address of theselected linkXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Link details by turning cVd orsliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The web address (URL) appears.XPress W the COMAND controller and closethe display.SettingsThe settings are described in a separate sec-tion (Y page 205).FavouritesIntroductionFavourites are frequently visited websites.You have the following options for creating afavourite:Rin the carousel view (Y page 202)Rvia the menu item Add to favour‐ites(Y page 201)Before creating a favourite in the carouselview, you must first close active connections(Y page 179).You can select and edit favourites that youhave created.Creating favouritesCreating favourites in the carousel viewXCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XBring the Create new favourite panel tothe front by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe COMAND controller.XPress W the COMAND controller.An input menu appears.202 InternetOnline and Internet functions
XEnter the web address (URL) and nameusing either the character bar or the num-ber keypad. Character entry (Y page 34)XSelect the ¬ symbol and press W toconfirm.The favourite has been created.Adding a favourite via the menuXWhen a website is displayed, call up themenu.XSelect Add to favourites in the menuand press W to confirm (Y page 201).Selecting favouritesXCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XSelect the favourite in the carousel view byturning cVd or sliding XVY the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The favourite is opened.Editing favouritesEditing favourites in the carousel viewXCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XSelect Edit by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.An input menu appears.XEnter the web address (URL) and nameusing either the character bar or the num-ber keypad (Y page 34).Editing favourites in the Favourites menuXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Display favourites by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The favourite is displayed.XPress W the COMAND controller.The Favourites menu appears.Favourites menuXSelect Edit by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress the g key on the number keypad.An input menu appears.Internet 203Online and Internet functionsZ
XEnter the web address (URL) and nameusing either the character bar or the num-ber keypad. Character entry (Y page 34).Other functions in the Favourites menuOpening current favouritesXCall up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).XConfirm Open by pressing W the COMANDcontroller.Opens the current favourites in a new win-dow.Opening in a new windowXCall up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).XSelect Open in new window by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.Calling up detailsXCall up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).XSelect Details by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress the z key on the number keypad.The detailed display appears.ExitingXCall up the Favourites menu (Y page 203).XSelect Exit by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress the % back button on the left nextto the COMAND controller.The Favourites menu closes.Deleting favouritesDeleting favourites in the carousel viewXCall up the carousel view (Y page 197).XSelect Delete by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A query appears.XSelect Yes and press W to confirm.The favourite is deleted.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Deleting favourites in the Favourites menuXSelect Delete by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress the j button to the right of theCOMAND controller.The favourite is deleted.204 InternetOnline and Internet functions
SettingsSettings menuXCall up the menu (Y page 200).XSelect Settings by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You can activate/deactivate the followingsettings:RDownload images automaticallyIt may take some time to download thecontents of websites that contain a largenumber of images. Therefore, it may beuseful to deactivate this option.RBlock popupsPopups are windows (usually with adver-tisements) which are displayed automati-cally when you call up a website. You canblock these displays.REnable JavaScriptJavaScript makes it possible to display andinteract with dynamic content on the web-site.REnable cookiesSome websites save information in smalltext files (cookies) in COMAND Online. Youcan determine whether cookies may bestored.RCharacter sizeYou can select the font size which is usedwhen displaying the website.RCharacter codeYou can select a different character sethere, e.g. if the characters of a websiteappear distorted.RDeleting private dataDeletes data which has been saved by thebrowser during Internet use.Changing settingsXSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Switch the setting on O or off ª.XSelect Character size or Character code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect a setting using the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.iIf you change the settings, the websitesmay not be displayed correctly.Deleting private dataXSelect Delete private data and pressW to confirm.A menu appears.Internet 205Online and Internet functionsZ
XSelect the setting by turning cVd or slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The # dot in front of an entry indicateswhich setting is active.orXSelect Delete all data on exiting andpress W to confirm.Switch the setting on O or off ª.Option FunctionAll Deletes all privatedata.Cache Deletes data in thetemporary storage.Cookies Deletes cookies thatare created by web-sites which you havecalled up.Websites visited Deletes all websitesvisited (path).ODelete all data on exitingIf this function isactivated O, all pri-vate data is deletedwhen you exit theInternet browser.iIf you reset COMAND Online to the fac-tory settings (reset function), these set-tings are deleted (Y page 49).Calling up the carousel view and clos-ing the Internet browserXTo call up the carousel view: press the% back button for longer than two sec-onds.XTo close the Internet browser: press the% back button again for longer than twoseconds.206 InternetOnline and Internet functions
Features of your COMAND Online ... 208Radio mode and DAB radio mode .... 208Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 214Music search ..................................... 227MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 230Operation with Bluetooth® audio .... 234Media Interface mode ...................... 240Audio AUX mode ............................... 247207Audio
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.Radio mode and DAB radio modeIntroductioniPortable electronic devices in the vehiclemay seriously impair radio and DAB radioreception.DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an opti-mised digital transmission standard designedfor the mobile reception of radio transmis-sions. Several programmes are combinedinto so-called ensembles and transmitted ona single frequency. Digital radio stations canbe transmitted nationally, regionally orlocally.Some stations only transmit programmes atcertain times. If you have selected a stationthat has subsequently been removed fromthe ensemble, it will no longer be received.You will continue to receive the other pro-grammes in the ensemble. You will then needto select a different programme.iDAB cannot be received everywhere inEurope.Switching to radio mode and DABradio modeSwitching on with the function buttonXPress the $ function button.The radio or DAB radio display appears.Radio mode: you will hear the last stationplayed on the last waveband selected.DAB radio mode: you will hear the last sta-tion played from the last ensemble selec-ted.iRepeatedly pressing the $ functionbutton switches between the FM, MW, SWand LW wavebands in that order. It thencalls up DAB radio mode. Pressing the but-ton again takes you back to FM radio mode.Switching on with the audio menuXSelect Audio in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If radio mode or DAB radio mode was thelast mode selected, it will now be active.If another audio mode is switched on, youcan now switch to radio mode in the audiomenu.You can select DAB radio mode in the radiodisplay.XSelect Audio by sliding ZV the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The audio menu appears.:Current audio operating mode;Main function bar=Audio menuXSelect Radio by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.208 Radio mode and DAB radio modeAudio
FM radio display:Waveband and frequency of the selectedstation;Station name or station frequency of theselected station=Memory position of a station?Radio text plus display (if available)ARadio mode menu barXTo switch on DAB radio mode: select FMin the radio display by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect DAB and press W to confirm.DAB radio display:Name of the ensemble to which the selec-ted station belongs;Name of the selected station=Memory position of a station?Radio text plus display (if available)ADAB radio mode menu bariIf reception is poor (e.g. in tunnels ormountain valleys), affected stations areshown in grey. Playback of the currentlyselected station is interrupted. As soon asthe reception quality is adequate, displaysand playback return to normal.Switching wavebandsOption 1You can switch the radio between the FM,MW, LW and SW wavebands.XPress the $ function button repeatedlyuntil the desired waveband is selected.Option 2XSelect FM, DAB, MW, SW or LW in the radiodisplay by sliding VÆ and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect a waveband and press W to confirm.You will hear the last station played on theselected waveband.Radio mode and DAB radio mode 209Audio
iIn the MW, LW and SW wavebands,COMAND Online shows the station fre-quency instead of the station name.EnsemblesAn ensemble consists of multiple radio pro-grammes. Every ensemble is transmitted in acertain area (national, regional or local) in thesame way as a traditional AM/FM radio sta-tion.Switching to an FM station automati-callyIf the reception of a DAB radio station dete-riorates, COMAND Online automaticallychanges to the corresponding FM station. Forthis to happen, the following conditions mustbe met:Rthe FM station's frequency is available.Rthe Station fix menu item(Y page 212) is switched off.iIf you want to use this function, do notswitch to FM radio mode.If there is no reception, the display shows theNo reception message.Setting a stationSetting a station from the station listThe station list is available in the FM wave-band and in DAB radio mode.Radio mode: the station list contains all thestations that can currently be received and issorted alphabetically. For stations without aprogramme service, the list shows the fre-quency instead of the name.DAB radio mode: the station list containsstations from all ensembles that can currentlybe received. It shows the current programmeand a programme preview if the station oper-ator supports this function. The station list issorted alphabetically.XQuick select: turn cVd or slide XVY theCOMAND controller while the display/selection window for the radio display isactive.orXPress the E or F button.The needle jumps to the left or right.XTo make a selection in the station list:select Radio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XConfirm Station list by pressing W.The station list appears.Example: radio mode:Currently selected station;Memory slot in station presetsExample: DAB radio mode:Alphabetical browser;DAB radio station=Current programme?Start and end times of the programme210 Radio mode and DAB radio modeAudio
XSelect the station by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XTo call up the programme preview: slideVY the COMAND controller.The next programmes are shown for thedisplayed DAB radio stations.XSwitch back by sliding XV.XTo activate the alphabetical browser:slide XV the COMAND controller.XSelect the initial letters of the desired sta-tion name by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller.The station list changes to the appropriatestation.XSwitch back by sliding VY.XTo select the station using the multifunc-tion steering wheel, see the separate vehi-cle Owner's Manual.Setting a station using the stationsearch functionIn radio mode, the station search function isonly available for the MW, LW and SW wave-bands.XPress the E or F button.Station search scans up or down and stopsat the next station.XTo select the station using the multifunc-tion steering wheel, see the separate vehi-cle Owner's Manual.Setting stations via the station presetsXQuick setting: press a number key, e.g.l.XDirectly in the station presets: selectPresets by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.orXPress W the COMAND controller when thedisplay/selection window is active.The station preset memory appears. The# dot indicates under which preset thecurrently selected station is stored.XSelect a station by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.orXPress a number key, such as l.XTo select the station using the multifunc-tion steering wheel, see the separate vehi-cle Owner's Manual.Setting stations by entering the fre-quency manuallyThis function is available in radio mode.XOption 1: press the l button.XOption 2: select Radio in the radio displayby sliding VÆ and turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Frequency entry and press W toconfirm.Irrespective of the option chosen, an inputmenu will appear.XEnter a frequency using the number keys.COMAND Online sets the frequencyentered.Waveband FrequencyFM (VHF) 87.5 – 108.0 MHzMW (medium wave) 531 – 1620 kHzSW (short wave) 5800 – 6250 kHzLW (long wave) 153 – 282 kHziYou can only enter currently permittednumbers.Radio mode and DAB radio mode 211Audio
iIf you enter a frequency in the MW, SW orLW wavebands that is outside the fre-quency range, COMAND Online sets thenext lower frequency.Storing a stationStoring stations manuallyThere are 10 presets available for each wave-band as well as for DAB radio mode.XQuick save: press and hold a number key,e.g. l, until you hear a tone.The station is stored.XDirectly in the station presets: press Wthe COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.orXSelect Presets by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.In both cases, the station presets appear.The # dot indicates under which presetthe currently selected station is stored.Station presets in DAB radio modeXSelect a preset by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press and holdW until you hear a tone.The station is stored under the preset.Storing stations automaticallyThis function automatically stores stationswith adequate reception under the presets.The search starts at the lowest frequency.COMAND Online stores any stations found,beginning with preset 1. The storing processends once the highest frequency has beenreached or once 10 stations have been found.Any stations stored manually under the pre-sets will be lost. COMAND Online may notoccupy all memory slots when storing.XOption 1: press W the COMAND controllerwhen the display/selection window isactive.XSelect Autostore in the presets by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XOption 2: select Presets by sliding VÆand turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Autostore and press W to confirm.In both cases, COMAND Online searchesfor stations that can be received. You willsee a message to this effect. The availablestations are automatically stored in the pre-set positions.XTo cancel storing: select Cancel andpress W to confirm.Radio Data System (RDS)General notesThe Radio Data System (RDS) provides inaud-ible additional information in the FM wave-band. The system consists of a listeningreceiver and a monitoring receiver.The monitoring receiver permanently scansthe FM waveband and collects certain datafrom all receivable stations. This includes, forinstance, reception quality and RDS datasuch as programme names and alternativefrequencies. COMAND Online stores the dataand constantly updates the memory. Theaudio receiver is therefore able to switchautomatically to an alternative frequency witha better signal.212 Radio mode and DAB radio modeAudio
iRDS only functions for stations whichtransmit RDS data.Switching RDS on/offYou can use the Frequency fix (radio mode)or Station fix (DAB mode) functions to preventCOMAND Online from switching between thealternative frequencies of a station. This isuseful, for example, when the same contentis broadcast with a time delay, or when thereis interference on one of the frequencies.XSelect Radio in the radio display by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Frequency fix or Station fix byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.Depending on the previous status, switchFrequency fix on O or off ª.Traffic ProgrammeNoteMany FM stations transmit traffic announce-ments (TA). You can also hear these in DABradio mode.Switching traffic announcements on/offXOption 1: select Radio by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The tick next to TA indicates that trafficannouncement reception is switched on.You see the TA symbol in the status bar.XSelect TA and press W to confirm.TA is switched on or off, depending on theprevious status.XOption 2: on COMAND Online or on themultifunction steering wheel, press andhold the 8 button until the TA icon lightsup or goes out in the status bar.A warning tone sounds.Once traffic announcements have beenswitched on, COMAND Online selects an RDSstation.Traffic Programme is retrieved from:Rthe currently selected FM stationRan RDS station from the network of thecurrently selected FM stationRthe RDS station with the best receptionqualityWhen traffic announcements are switchedon, a traffic announcement will interrupt theaudio signal from the currently activatedaudio or video source.iTelephone conversations and navigationannouncements are not interrupted.A display message appears in the display inall audio operating modes.Interrupting a traffic announcementDuring a traffic announcement:XOn COMAND Online or on the multifunctionsteering wheel, briefly press the 8 but-ton.orXPress the 9, : or 9 button on themultifunction steering wheel.COMAND Online switches back to theaudio source that was selected before theannouncement. Any subsequent newannouncements will continue to interruptthe audio source.Radio text/radio text plusMessages in the displayThe function is available in FM mode and inDAB radio mode.Radio text/radio text plus consists of addi-tionally transmitted data, e.g. information onthe current programme, which is displayed inthe COMAND display.If the station supports radio text plus, theartist and track are displayed.Radio mode and DAB radio mode 213Audio
Radio text plus (display: artist and track)XTo show/hide the artist and track:select Radio in the radio display by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Display artist and track andpress W to confirm.Switch the display on O or off ª.XTo display radio text: select Info in thecorresponding radio display by sliding VÆand turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.If the station supports radio text and infor-mation is available, the system displays it.Radio text (display for additional information onprogramme)XTo return to the radio display: confirmInfo by pressing W.XSlide ZV the COMAND controller up.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeImportant safety notesGWARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. Thereis a risk of injury.You must not open the casing. Always havemaintenance work and repairs carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.GWARNINGHandling discs while driving will distract youfrom traffic conditions. You could then losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-ary.Bear in mind that, at a speed of only50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering adistance of 14 m per second.Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDsNotesIf the CD/DVD has a printed side, this mustface upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.If neither side is printed, the side to be playedshould face downwards. CDs/DVDs withcopy protection may not be able to be playedby the system.iIf a medium contains other files in addi-tion to music files, the loading time beforethe first track starts to play may be longer.214 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
Inserting a disc into the single DVDdriveXPress the 8 eject button.If there is a disc already inserted, it will beejected.XTake the disc out of the slot.XInsert a disc into the slot.The disc is drawn in and playback starts ifthe disc has been inserted correctly and itis a permissible type.Ejecting a disc from the single DVDdriveXPress the 8 eject button.XTake the disc out of the slot.If you do not take the disc out of the slot, itis drawn in again automatically after a shortwhile and reloaded.Inserting discs into the DVD changerThe DVD changer has a fixed magazine withsix trays.XTo insert a CD/DVD into the magazine tray: press the V load/eject button.A menu shows the current load status ofthe magazine trays. The last tray selectedis identified by a red digit.XSelect a magazine tray to be filled by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.orXPress a number key, e.g. j.The DVD changer switches to the selectedmagazine tray. You see the Please wait... message.You then see the Please insert disc <x> message.XInsert a disc into the disc slot with the prin-ted side facing upwards.The DVD changer loads the disc into theselected magazine tray. The Loading disc <x>... message appears.iIt may take some time for the disc to beloaded, depending on the type of disc. If nodisc is inserted for approximately 20 sec-onds, the display returns to the magazinemenu.The DVD changer plays the disc if:Rit has been inserted correctlyRit is a permissible type of discAudio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 215AudioZ
:Full magazine tray (eject function is avail-able);Empty magazine tray (disc can be inser-ted)XTo exit the menu: press the V eject/load button again or press the % backbutton.orXSelect Back by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XTo fill empty magazine trays: press theV load/eject button.The magazine menu appears.XSelect Fill empty slots.You see the Please wait... message.COMAND Online switches to the next freemagazine tray. You then see the Please insert disc <x> message.iDo not insert a disc into the magazine trayuntil you have seen this prompt.XInsert a disc into the disc slot with the prin-ted side facing upwards.You see the Please wait... message.Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changerswitches to the next empty tray. You seethe Please insert disc <x> message.XRepeat this step until all trays are loaded.The DVD changer plays the last disc youloaded if it has been inserted correctly andit is a permissible type.XTo cancel loading: press the V eject/load button again or press the % backbutton.iIf you cancel loading with the % backbutton, the system loads and plays the lastCD you inserted.Ejecting discs from the DVD changerIf you remove one disc while playing anotherdisc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.Playback continues once the disc has beenejected.XTo eject a CD/DVD: press the V load/eject button.The magazine menu appears. The magazinetray with the current disc is highlighted.:Eject possible;Data medium type=Disc name (only if stored on the disc)?Current discXSelect a magazine tray containing a disc byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.orXPress a number key, e.g. j.You see the message: Ejecting disc <x>.... You then see the following mes-sage:216 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
XTake the disc out of the slot.If you do not take the disc out of the slot,COMAND Online will draw it in automati-cally after a short while and load it again.XTo eject all CDs/DVDs: press the Vload/eject button.The magazine menu appears.XSelect Eject all by sliding ÆV and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The DVD changer ejects the last disc selec-ted. You see the Ejecting disc <x>...message.XTake the disc out of the disc slot when yousee the Please remove disc <x>. mes-sage.The DVD changer switches to the next loa-ded magazine tray and ejects the disc.XRepeat the last step until the magazine isempty.XTo exit the menu: press the V eject/load button again or press the % backbutton.orXSelect Back by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Inserting and removing an SD mem-ory cardGeneral notesCOMAND Online supports SD memory cards(Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards(Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXCmemory cards (Secure Digital eXtendedCapacity.iNot all memory cards available on themarket are designed for the temperatureswhich may be reached in the vehicle.If the SD memory card is no longer in use,you should remove it fromCOMAND Online. High temperatures candamage the card.Due to the wide range of SD memory cardsavailable on the market, playback cannotbe guaranteed for all brands of SD memorycard.The readable storage capacity depends onthe memory card used. You can obtain fur-ther information at any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.Inserting an SD memory cardXInsert the memory card into the slot on thecontrol panel until it engages in place. Theside with the contacts must face down-wards and point towards the slot.If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will seea message to this effect.The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. Thefirst MP3 track is then played. An hourglasssymbol indicates that further tracks arebeing loaded in the background.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 217AudioZ
Ejecting an SD memory cardXPress the memory card.The memory card is ejected.XRemove the memory card from the slot.Connecting a USB deviceThe USB port is located in the stowage com-partment in the centre console.Electrical consumption at this connectionmust not exceed a continuous current of500 mA. If the electrical consumption ishigher, use a separate source to providepower for the USB device (e.g.12 V power supply).XConnect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) tothe USB port.If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will seea message to this effect.The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. Thefirst MP3 track is then played. An hourglasssymbol indicates that further tracks arebeing loaded in the background.iDue to the wide range of USB devicesavailable on the market, playback cannotbe guaranteed for all brands of USB device.Information about suitable USB devicescan be obtained from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.MP3 players must support Media TransferProtocol (MTP). The MTP mode must beactive.Switching to audio CD/audio DVD orMP3 modeInserting or connecting a data mediumXInsert CDs/DVDs (Y page 214)orXInsert an SD memory card (Y page 217)orXConnect a USB device (Y page 218).COMAND loads the medium inserted andstarts to play it.Switching on with the function buttonXPress the h function button one or moretimes.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:RAudio CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3DVD in the DVD changer or single DVDdrive (disc mode)RMemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeROperation with Bluetooth® audioXSelect an audio medium from the media list(Y page 220).Switching on with the audio menuXSelect Audio in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The last active audio source is now activa-ted.You can activate a different audio sourceusing the audio menu.XSelect Audio by sliding ZV and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The audio menu appears.XSelect Disc, Memory card, Music Regis‐ter, USB storage or Media Interfaceand press W to confirm.This switches to the desired audio source.XSelect an audio medium from the media list(Y page 220).218 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
Example display: audio CD mode:CD cover (if available);Gracenote data found, then the elapsedtrack time=Track number and track name (if storedon the disc as CD text or if Gracenote®data is available)?Graphic time and track displayADisc type, disc position in the media listand disc name (if stored on the disc as CDtext or if Gracenote® data is available)BArtist (if stored on the disc as CD text orif Gracenote® data is available)CCD mode menuExample display: audio DVD mode:Cover (if available);Track time=Track number?Graphic time and track displayADisc type, disc position in the media list,disc name (only if stored on the disc)BAudio DVD mode menuExample display: MP3 mode:Cover (if available);Track time=Track number and name?Graphic time and track displayAMedium type, position of medium in themedia list, current folder or current albumBArtist (if available)CMP3 mode menuiIf no Media Interface is connected duringoperation with a DVD changer, C displaysChanger instead of Media(Y page 240).Pause functionIn CD/audio DVD and MP3 modeXTo pause playback: briefly press the8 button.The , symbol appears at the top left inthe status bar.XTo continue playback: briefly press the8 button again.The , symbol disappears.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 219AudioZ
Only in audio DVD modeXTo pause playback: switch on audio DVDmode (Y page 218).XSelect Ë by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Ë symbol changes to Ì.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress W to confirm.Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted. The Ì symbol changesto Ë.Stop functionThis function is only available in audio DVDmode.XSwitch on audio DVD mode (Y page 218).XTo interrupt playback: select É bysliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The Ë symbol changes to Ì. TheÉ symbol remains highlighted.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress W to confirm.Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted.XTo stop playback: while playback is inter-rupted, select É again and press W toconfirm.orXSelect É and confirm by pressing Wtwice in rapid succession.Ì is highlighted.XTo restart playback: select Ì andpress W to confirm.Playback starts at the beginning of theDVD.Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discsSelecting via the media listMedia list when equipped with a DVD changerXIn CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: selectMedia or Changer by sliding VÆ and turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: selectMedia by sliding VÆ or turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The media list appears. The # dot indicatesthe current medium being played.The media list shows the discs currentlyavailable.View in ::RG magazine tray not shownRI magazine tray shownXTo switch the display: select 1...6 changer by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Depending on the previous setting, themagazine trays are shown or not shown.iIf a disc cannot be read, an entry appearsnext to the corresponding magazine tray.220 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
Media list showing all magazine traysXSelect the data medium by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The following tables list the selection optionsin the media list for the respective equipmentvariants.For DVD changerMagazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readabledata media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDsMemory card, position 7MUSIC REGISTER, position 8USB storage device, position 9Media Interface, position 0Bluetooth® audioFor a single DVD driveDVD drive, position 1: readable data mediaare audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs,audio DVDs and video DVDsMemory card, position 2MUSIC REGISTER, position 3USB storage device, position 4Media Interface, position 5Bluetooth® audio, position 6iIf you select a video DVD, the systemswitches to video DVD mode(Y page 259).Selecting a track using the number key-padXWhen the display/selection window isactive, press a number key, e.g. n.The medium at the corresponding positionin the media list is loaded and then played.Selecting a trackSelecting by skipping to a trackXTo skip forwards or back to a track: turncVd the COMAND controller when the dis-play/selection window is active.orXPress the E or F button.The skip forward function skips to the nexttrack.The skip back function skips to the begin-ning of the current track if the track hasbeen playing for more than 8 seconds. Ifthe track has been playing for less than 8seconds, it skips to the start of the previoustrack.If the Random tracks or Random folderplayback option has been selected, thetrack order is random.XMake selection on the multifunction steer-ing wheel and view in the multifunction dis-play; see separate vehicle Owner's Manual.Selecting a track using the number key-padXPress the ¯ key on the number keypad.A numerical entry field appears. The num-ber of positions offered corresponds to thenumber of tracks on the CD/DVD. OnlyAudio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 221AudioZ
numbers that correspond to a track num-ber on the CD/DVD can be entered.XEnter the desired track number using thenumber keys.The track plays after the last possible num-ber is entered.iPressing and holding a number key formore than 2 seconds completes the entry,and the corresponding track is played.Selecting a track using music searchXSelect Current track list, Folder or acategory and press W to confirm.Select music via categories (e.g. albums,artists etc.) with the music search function.If you select a category, COMAND Onlinestarts a search for track information if the fol-lowing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected.Rthe track information from these data car-riers is not yet contained in the COMANDmusic database.COMAND Online imports track informationfrom the following data carriers:Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)Rmemory cardRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB storage deviceThe Track information is completemessage appears once the search is comple-ted. COMAND Online stores the music datain its own database. You can now select theavailable music data within the desired cate-gory.You will find further information on searchingfor music in the "Music search" section(Y page 227).XIn audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,select Search by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The category list appears.Example: current track listXSelect the track by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The basic display appears and the track isplayed.Fast forward/rewindXWhile the display/selection window isactive, slide XVY and hold the COMANDcontroller until the desired position hasbeen reached.orXPress and hold the E or F buttonuntil the desired position is reached.Gracenote Media DatabaseIntroductionThis function is only available in audio CDmode.222 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
There is a version of Gracenote® music rec-ognition technology on the COMAND Onlinehard drive. You will recognise this by the logoin the bottom right-hand corner of certainaudio displays.Many audio CDs contain CD text.COMAND Online uses the information con-tained therein to display the artist, album andtrack name.If the audio CD does not contain any CD textinformation, COMAND Online can use theGracenote® Media Database to identifyunknown audio tracks when in audio CDmode. This is only possible if the relevantinformation is saved in the Gracenote MediaDatabase and if the Gracenote Media Data-base function is activated.If this is the case, COMAND Online will displaythe corresponding data such as artist, albumand track name in the relevant displays andlists.Selecting Gracenote® data to be dis-playedXSwitch on audio CD mode (Y page 218).XSelect CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Gracenote Media Database byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.A menu appears.The # dot indicates the current selectionfor the display.If several entries exist for the CD of a partic-ular artist, you can select which of the entriesshould be shown.If the inserted CD does not contain anyGracenote® data, the Gracenote Media Database menu item is shown in grey andcannot be selected.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Switching the Gracenote® data displayon/offXSwitch on audio CD mode (Y page 218).XSelect CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Gracenote Media Database byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XTo switch off the display: select None andpress W to confirm.In the basic display, Track 1, Track 2 etc.are shown instead of the Gracenote® data,for example (Y page 219).XTo switch on the display: select an entryin the menu by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 223AudioZ
Updating Gracenote® music recogni-tion technology and the GracenoteMedia DatabaseDue to the release of new CDs, the digital dataon the Gracenote Media Database must beupdated. Optimum functionality can only beattained with up-to-date Gracenote® musicrecognition technology. Information aboutnew versions can be obtained from aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.You can have your music recognition soft-ware updated there with a DVD, or you canupdate it yourself.iThe Gracenote Media Database is upda-ted in conjunction with the navigation sys-tem's digital map (Y page 124).Displaying the track and albumXPress the z button.The current track and album are displayedin a window.Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)COMAND Online can also display the albumname and artist (metadata) during playbackif this information has been entered into thesystem.For all media that contain MP3 data (e.g. MP3CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), youcan determine whether:Rthe metadata contained in the tags of theencoded music data should be displayedRthe file and directory names should be dis-played during playbackXTo display the album and artist name:select MP3 or USB in the basic display bysliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect Display track information andpress W to confirm.Selecting a group (DVD audio)The content of an audio DVD can be dividedinto up to nine groups. The availability andtype of group depends on the respective DVD.A group can contain music in different soundqualities (stereo and multichannel formats,for example), or bonus tracks.Each group can contain up to 99 tracks.If an audio DVD only contains one audio for-mat, the Group menu item(s) cannot be selec-ted.XSwitch on audio DVD mode (Y page 218).XSelect DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Group by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.The # dot indicates the group currentlyselected.XSelect the desired group by turning cVdand press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: slide XVY the COMANDcontroller or press the % back button.Selecting an active partition (USBmass storage devices only)You can select this function for USB massstorage devices when the storage device ispartitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or log-ical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported.XSelect MP3 in the basic display by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect active partition and press W toconfirm.224 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
Playback optionsXTo select options: switch on audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 218).XSelect CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The options list appears. The # dot indi-cates the option selected.XSelect an option by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.The option is switched on. For all optionsexcept Normal track sequence, you willsee a corresponding display in the display/selection window.The following options are available to you:RNormal track sequenceThe tracks are played in the normal order(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).In MP3 mode, the track order is determinedby the order in which the tracks are writtento the MP3 data carrier when it is created.Alphabetical order is the most common.Once all the tracks in a folder have beenplayed, the tracks in the next folder areplayed.RRandom mediaAll the tracks on the medium are played inrandom order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)You will hear the tracks in the current play-list or currently active folder (including allsubfolders) in random order.iThe Normal track sequence option isautomatically selected when you changethe disc you are currently listening to orwhen you select a different medium. If anoption is selected, it remains selected afterCOMAND Online is switched on or off.Notes on MP3 modeGeneral notesDepending on the volume and format of theMP3 data, the length of time required forreading the data may increase.Permissible data carriersRCD-R and CD-RWRDVD-R and DVD-RWRDVD+R and DVD+RWRSD memory cardRUSB storage devicePermissible file systemsRISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDsRUDF for audio and video DVDsRFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memorycard and USB storage mediaMultisession CDsFor multisession CDs, the content of the firstsession determines how COMAND Online willprocess the CD. COMAND Online plays onlyone session and gives priority to the audio CDsession.If possible, only play CDs that have been writ-ten in one session on COMAND Online.File structure of a discWhen you create a disc with compressedmusic files, the tracks can be organised infolders. A folder may also contain subfolders.The disc may contain no more than eightdirectory levels. Files beyond the eighth levelwill not be recognised by the system.iCOMAND Online loads up to 15,000tracks from the SD memory card or USBstorage medium.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 225AudioZ
Track and file namesWhen you create a disc with compressedmusic files, you can assign names to thetracks and folders.COMAND Online uses these names accord-ingly for the display. Folders that contain dataother than MP3 or WMA tracks are not dis-played by COMAND Online.If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the rootdirectory itself, the root directory will also betreated as a folder. COMAND Online will thenshow the name of the root directory as thefolder name.You should observe the following whenassigning track names:Rtrack names must have at least one char-acter.Rtrack names must have the extension"mp3" or "wma".Rthere must be a full stop between the trackname and the extension.Example of a correct track name:"Track1.mp3".Permissible formatsCOMAND supports the following formats:RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9(WMA) without copy protectionMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8and V9 (WMA)Radditional music files in AAC format withthe file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4aand .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunesmusic files with the extension .m4piIf, in addition to MP3 files, there are othermusic files in these audio formats stored onthe disc, the loading process may require alonger time before the first track is played.iThe MP3 audio encoding method is underlicence from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integ-rierte Schaltungen – Institute for IntegratedCircuits) and Thomson.Permissible bit and sampling ratesCOMAND supports MP3 files of the followingtypes:Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/sto 320 kbit/sRsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHzCOMAND Online supports WMA files of thefollowing types:Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/sRsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHzCOMAND Online does not support WMA filesof the following types:RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encryp-ted filesRVariable bit rateRWMA ProR5.1 SurroundiOnly use tracks with a bit rate of at least128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least44.1 kHz. Lower rates may cause a notice-able deterioration in quality. This is espe-cially the case if you have activated a sur-round sound function.Notes on copyrightMP3 or WMA tracks that you create or playback are generally subject to copyright pro-tection in accordance with the applicableinternational and national regulations.In many countries, reproductions, even forprivate use, are not permitted without theprior consent of the copyright holder.Make sure that you know about the applicablecopyright regulations and that you complywith these.If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for yourown compositions and recordings, or if thecopyright holder has granted you permission,these restrictions do not apply.226 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeAudio
Notes on CDs/DVDs! COMAND Online is designed to play discswhich comply with the EN 60908 standard.Therefore, you can only use discs with amaximum thickness of 1.3 mm.If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those thatcontain data on both sides (DVD on oneside and audio data on the other), they can-not be ejected and can damage the device.Only use round discs with a diameter of12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of8 cm, even with an adapter.Discs with copy protection are not compati-ble with the CD standard and therefore maynot be able to be played by COMAND Online.You may encounter playback problems whenplaying copied discs. There is a wide range ofdata carriers, disc-writing software and writ-ers available. This variety means that there isno guarantee that the system will be able toplay discs that you have copied yourself.There may be playback problems if you playCDs that you have copied yourself with a stor-age capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs ofthis type do not conform to the currentlyapplicable standards.iOn many DVD audio discs, the last trackdoes not contain any music. IfCOMAND Online therefore switches to thenext disc, it is normal system behaviour anddoes not mean that there is a malfunction.iCOMAND Online is able to play backaudio CDs in multichannel audio format.Music searchCalling up the category listCategory listXSwitch on an audio source and call up thebasic display, e.g. MP3 mode(Y page 218).XSelect Search by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The category list appears.The categories are displayed according to thedata available. The categories Current tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available)and Photos (if available) are alreadyassigned. The other available categories arefilled by the music search.Selecting a categoryStarting a music searchSelect music via categories (e.g. albums,artists etc.) with the music search function.If you select a category, COMAND Onlinestarts a music search under the followingconditions:Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected.Rthe music tracks on these data carriers arenot yet in the COMAND music database.COMAND Online reads music tracks from thefollowing data carriers:Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)Rmemory cardMusic search 227AudioZ
RMUSIC REGISTERRUSB storage deviceXSelect a category in the category list byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The Reading data... message appears.The search may take some time, dependingon the number of tracks available.The Track information is completemessage appears once the search is comple-ted. Playback then starts with the previouslyactive audio source.XTo cancel the music search: confirmCancel by pressing W.Selecting artistsXSelect Artists in the category list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The available artists are displayed alpha-betically.Selecting an albumXSelect Albums in the category list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The available albums are displayed alpha-betically. If there is a cover available for analbum, it is displayed in front of the albumname.Selecting a trackXSelect Tracks in the category list(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The available tracks are displayed.Selecting a year of publicationXSelect Year in the category list(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.XSelect an entry and press W to confirm.The genre list is displayed.228 Music searchAudio
XSelect a genre, e.g. pop, and press W toconfirm.The track list is displayed.XSelect a track and press W to confirm.Playback starts.Selecting composersXSelect Composers in the category list byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The available composers are displayedalphabetically.Selecting music genresXSelect Genres in the category list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The available music genres are displayedalphabetically.Selecting a coverXSelect Select by cover in the categorylist (Y page 227) by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The available covers are displayed in alpha-betical order of the artists.XSelect the desired cover by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The corresponding album is played.Selecting via keyword searchXSelect Keyword search in the category listby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.An input menu appears.XTo change the character set used in the character bar: highlight Select by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.A list of available character sets is shown.XSelect the desired character set and pressW to confirm.XEnter characters and confirm the entry.Character entry (Y page 34).Depending on the entry, the hits are shownin a list.XSelect an entry by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Music search 229AudioZ
XSelect an entry, e.g. Artists, and pressW to confirm.The album and cover (if available) are dis-played.XConfirm the album with W.The tracks on the album are displayed.XSelect a track and press W to confirm.Playback starts and the basic displayappears.MUSIC REGISTERGeneral notes! Retain the original music files in a securelocation. An error in COMAND Online mightresult in the loss of the music files storedin the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz isnot liable for any loss of data.You can store music files in a compressedformat in the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 231). The memory has a capacity of10 GB.Switching to the MUSIC REGISTERMUSIC REGISTER basic displayExample: MUSIC REGISTER:Cover (if available);Track time=Track number and name?Graphic time and track displayAPosition of the medium in the media listand name of the medium, followed by thecurrent playback option (no display forNormal track sequence)BArtistCMUSIC REGISTER menu bar230 MUSIC REGISTERAudio
Switching on with the function buttonXPress the h function button repeatedlyuntil the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:RAudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)RMemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeROperation with Bluetooth® audioIf music files are available, playback begins atthe point last listened to.If there are no music files, you will see a mes-sage to this effect.XConfirm the message by pressing W theCOMAND controller and then copy themusic files to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 231).Switching on with the audio menuXSelect Audio in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If the MUSIC REGISTER was the last modeselected, it is now switched on.If another audio source is switched on, youcan now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER inthe audio menu.XSelect Audio by sliding ZV and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The audio menu appears.XSelect Music Register and press W toconfirm.Switching on using the number keysXPress the r (for a DVD changer) orm (for a single DVD drive) number key.The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.Copying music data to the MUSICREGISTERIntroductionYou can copy music files in the file formatsMP3, WMA and AAC (with the file exten-sions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from thefollowing media:Rdiscs in a DVD changer or a single DVDdriveRmemory cardRUSB memoryiWhile copying, several functions will notbe available. If this is the case, you will seea message to this effect.1. Selecting a data mediumXSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Copy MP3 music files and pressW to confirm.The media list appears. A data mediumfrom which files can be copied is selectedautomatically.XSelect the data medium by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.The data medium is loaded.If the data carrier contains music files thatcan be copied, you see a menu.MUSIC REGISTER 231AudioZ
2. Selecting music filesXTo select all music files: select All tracks and press W the COMAND con-troller to confirm.This function copies all music files on theselected data carrier. The icon in front ofAll tracks is filled in and all followingentries have a tick O beside them.XTo select a folder: turn cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.A tick O next to the folder entry highlightsthe selection.3. Confirming your selectionXSelect Continue by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The copying menu appears.4. Starting the copying process! Under no circumstances should youremove the medium while you are copyingdata from it (SD memory card, USB storagedevice, CD/DVD). Doing so will generateunusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER.In the example, music files are copied fromthe memory card to the MUSIC REGISTER.XTo select a target folder: select Desti‐nation folder by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Folder and press W to confirm.The folder is selected O.XSelect Continue and press W to confirm.XConfirm Start by pressing W.Copying begins. The progress bar indicatesthe status of the copying procedure.iIt may take some time for the copyingprocess to be completed, depending on theamount of data. If there is not enough mem-ory space, you will see a message to thiseffect.Once copying is complete, you hear the firsttrack of the copied album. The MUSIC REG-ISTER display appears. Now you can copymore music files to the MUSIC REGISTER.XTo cancel the copying process: selectCancel and press W to confirm.Music files are stored in the MUSIC REGIS-TER up until the point of cancellation.Deleting all music files! In order to prevent malfunctions, do notuse COMAND Online during this time.This function deletes all music files from theMUSIC REGISTER.232 MUSIC REGISTERAudio
XSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Delete all music files andpress W to confirm.A query appears. No is highlighted.If you select Yes, all music files are deleted.You see the Please wait... message.You will then see the Data deleted mes-sage.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Calling up memory space informationXSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Memory info and press W to con-firm.The following is displayed:Rstorage capacityRavailable memoryRoccupied memoryRcontent (folders, tracks)Music searchIntroductionThe music search finds tracks via all availablemedia. The search begins with the audiosource that is currently active.The music search covers the following media:Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)Rmemory cardRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryXSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Search by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The category list appears.XSelect a track in a category (Y page 227).Example: opening a folderXSelect Folder in the category list by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You see the contents of the current folder.The name of the current folder is at the topand the track currently playing is indicated bya # dot.XTo switch to the next folder up: press the% back button or slide XV theCOMAND controller.Changing the folder/track nameXSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Rename / delete files and pressW to confirm.XSelect a folder/track by turning cVd.XSelect Options by sliding VY and pressW to confirm.XSelect Change and press W to confirm.MUSIC REGISTER 233AudioZ
XEnter a name for the folder/track(Y page 34).XTo save the changes: select ¬ andpress W to confirm.Deleting folders/tracksXSwitch to the MUSIC REGISTER(Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Rename / delete files and pressW to confirm.XSelect a folder/track by turning cVd.XSelect Options by sliding VY and pressW to confirm.XSelect Delete and press W to confirm.A query appears. No is highlighted.If you select Yes, the folders/tracks aredeleted. You see the Please wait...message. You will then see the Data deleted message.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.Playback optionsThe following options are available:RNormal track sequenceThe tracks are played in the normal order(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).RRandom mediaAll the tracks on the medium are played inrandom order.RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)The tracks in the currently active folder orthe current track list are played in a randomorder.XTo select options: switch to the MUSICREGISTER (Y page 230).XSelect Music Register by sliding VÆ andturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The options list appears. The # dot indi-cates the option selected.XSelect an option and press W to confirm.The option is switched on. For all optionsexcept Normal track sequence, you willsee a corresponding display in the display/selection window.iThe Normal track sequence option isautomatically selected when you changethe disc you are currently listening to orwhen you select a different medium. If anoption is selected, it remains selected afterCOMAND Online is switched on or off.Operation with Bluetooth® audioPreconditions for the Bluetooth®audio deviceBluetooth® audio mode requires a Blue-tooth®-capable audio device. Observe theinformation in the Bluetooth® audio device'soperating instructions.Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, youshould check your Bluetooth® audio devicefor the following:RBluetooth® audio profileThe Bluetooth® audio device must supportthe A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audioprofiles.RBluetooth® visibilityCertain Bluetooth® audio devices requiremore than simply activating the Blue-tooth® function. In addition, your devicemust be made "visible" to other devices.RBluetooth® device nameThis device name is predetermined but canusually be changed. To make a clear selec-tion of the Bluetooth® device possible,234 Operation with Bluetooth® audioAudio
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you cus-tomise the device name.iA2DP (Advanced Audio DistributionProfile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audiodata transmissionAVRCP (Audio Video Remote ControlProfile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audiodata playbackiNot all Bluetooth® audio devices availableon the market are equally suitable.Information on suitable Bluetooth® audiodevices and on connecting Bluetooth®audio devices to COMAND Online:Ris available from your Mercedes-BenzService CentreRor visit the website http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connectXActivate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibil-ity on the Bluetooth® audio device.Preconditions in COMAND OnlineXActivate the Bluetooth® function inCOMAND Online(Y page 46).Connecting Bluetooth® audio devicesGeneral notesBefore using your Bluetooth® audio devicewith COMAND Online for the first time, youwill need to authorise it.When you authorise a new Bluetooth® audiodevice, it is connected automatically. Con-nection involves first searching for a Blue-tooth® audio device and then authorising it.You can authorise up to fifteen Bluetooth®devices.iIf you authorise a mobile phone that sup-ports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP andAVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are con-nected automatically.The mobile phone is then entered:Rin the Bluetooth® telephone list(Y page 134)Rin the Bluetooth® device list(Y page 235)Mercedes-Benz recommends authorising amobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony(Y page 134).Searching for and authorising a Blue-tooth® audio deviceExample: Bluetooth® device list:Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-tooth® audio function in range;Bluetooth® audio player not within rangebut previously authorised (symbolappears in grey)The Bluetooth® device list displays all author-ised devices, whether they are within rangeor not. After a device search, devices whichare within range but not authorised are alsodisplayed.Operation with Bluetooth® audio 235AudioZ
XSwitch on Bluetooth® audio mode(Y page 238).If you see the No Bluetooth audio device authorised message, you willneed to authorise the Bluetooth® audiodevice first.XSelect BT audio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XConfirm Bluetooth audio device listby pressing W the COMAND controller.XTo search: confirm Search for BT audio devices by pressing the COMANDcontroller W.COMAND Online searches for Bluetooth®audio devices within range and adds themto the Bluetooth® device list. Bluetooth®audio devices are detected if they supportthe Bluetooth® audio profiles (A2DP,AVRCP).The duration of the search depends on thenumber of Bluetooth® audio devices withinrange and their characteristics.XTo authorise: select an unauthorised Blue-tooth® audio device from the list(: in the example) by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XSelect the symbol to the right of the Blue-tooth® audio device by sliding VY theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Authorise and press W to confirm.Depending on the Bluetooth® audio deviceused, you now have two options for con-tinuing with authorisation.XOption 1: enter the passkey (Y page 134).After successful authorisation, the Blue-tooth® audio device is connected andstarts playing.XOption 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if thedigit codes displayed in COMAND Onlineand on the Bluetooth® audio device are thesame, confirm Yes by pressing W.If you select Yes, authorisation continuesand the Bluetooth® audio device is connec-ted. Playback starts.If you select No, authorisation will be can-celled.iThe Bluetooth® audio device must sup-port Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connectionvia Secure Simple Pairing.COMAND Online creates a six-digit code,which is simultaneously displayed on bothdevices that are to be connected.External authorisationIf COMAND Online does not find your Blue-tooth® audio device, this may be due to par-ticular security settings on your Bluetooth®audio device. In this case, check whether yourBluetooth® audio device can locate theCOMAND Online system. The Bluetooth®device name of COMAND Online is MB Blue‐tooth.XSwitch on Bluetooth® audio mode(Y page 238).XSelect BT audio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XConfirm Bluetooth audio device listby pressing W the COMAND controller.236 Operation with Bluetooth® audioAudio
XTo search: confirm Connect via BT audio device by pressing the COMANDcontroller W.The duration of the search depends on thenumber of Bluetooth® audio devices withinrange and their characteristics.XTo authorise: start the authorisation onthe Bluetooth® audio device; see the oper-ating instructions of the Bluetooth® audiodevice.After successful authorisation, the Blue-tooth® audio device is connected andstarts playing.iWith some Bluetooth® audio devices,playback must first be started on the deviceitself so that COMAND Online can play theaudio files.Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audiodeviceThe Bluetooth® audio profiles are connectedautomatically under the following circum-stances:Rone of the last two mobile phones to havebeen connected has also been used as aBluetooth® audio player (if this function issupported by the mobile phone).Rthe mobile phone takes over the automaticconnection itself.A Bluetooth® audio player without telephonefunctions is not automatically reconnected,even if it was the last device connected.If the No Bluetooth audio device con‐nected message appears, you have twooptions to connect a Bluetooth® audiodevice:Connecting the last deviceXConfirm Connect last device in thebasic display by pressing W the COMANDcontroller.If COMAND Online can locate the Blue-tooth® audio device, it will be connectedand will start playing.iWith some Bluetooth® audio devices,playback must first be started on the deviceitself so that COMAND Online can play theaudio files.Connecting a device from a listXSelect BT audio by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XConfirm Bluetooth audio device listby pressing W the COMAND controller.XSelect a Bluetooth® audio device by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.If COMAND Online can locate the Blue-tooth® audio device, it will be connectedand will start playing.iWith some Bluetooth® audio devices,playback must first be started on the deviceitself so that COMAND Online can play theaudio files.Bluetooth® audio device and simultane-ous search for mobile phonesDuring the search for mobile phones, the con-nection with the Bluetooth® audio device isterminated (Y page 133). In the Bluetooth®audio basic display, you will see the No Blue‐tooth audio device connected messageand the Connect last device menu itemcannot be selected.Displaying detailsXSelect a Bluetooth® audio device in theBluetooth® device list.XSelect the symbol to the right of the Blue-tooth® audio device by sliding VY theOperation with Bluetooth® audio 237AudioZ
COMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect Details and press W to confirm.The following information concerning theselected mobile phone is shown:RBluetooth® nameRBluetooth® addressRavailability status (shown after anupdate)Rauthorisation statusXTo close the detailed view: turn cVd orslide XVY the COMAND controller.De-authorising (de-registering) a Blue-tooth® audio deviceXSelect a Bluetooth® audio device in theBluetooth® device list.XSelect the symbol to the right of the Blue-tooth® audio device by sliding VY theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect De-authorise and press W to con-firm.A prompt appears, asking whether youreally wish to de-authorise this device.XSelect Yes or No.If you select Yes, the device will be deletedfrom the Bluetooth® device list.If you select No, the process will be cancel-led.iBefore re-authorising the Bluetooth®audio device, you should also delete thedevice name MB Bluetooth from yourBluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list.See the Bluetooth® audio device's operat-ing instructions.Switching to Bluetooth® audio modeThe Bluetooth® audio basic displayExample: Bluetooth® audio basic display:Track name;Current playback settings (no symbol for"Normal track sequence")=Album name?Sound settingsAMedia listBArtistCTo stop É or start Ì playbackDTo connect a Bluetooth® audio device, toswitch traffic announcements on/off, toincrease the volume on COMAND OnlineEBluetooth® audio data carrier typeFData carrier position in the media listiIf the Bluetooth® audio device connectedsupports metadata and corresponding datais available, then the artist, track and albumname can be displayed.Using the Bluetooth® audio basic dis-playXTo connect Bluetooth® audio devices(Y page 235)orXReconnect the Bluetooth® audio device(Y page 237).COMAND Online activates the Bluetooth®audio device. The basic display appearsand the device starts playing.238 Operation with Bluetooth® audioAudio
Using the function buttonXPress the h function button one or moretimes.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:RAudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)RMemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeROperation with Bluetooth® audioUsing the media listXSelect Bluetooth audio in the media listby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm (Y page 220).COMAND Online activates the connecteddevice. You will see a message to thiseffect. The basic display then appears.Starting/stopping playbackXTo start playback: select Ì by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.Playback starts. É is selected.XTo stop playback: select É by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A message appears. Ì is selected.XTo continue playback: select Ì byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.A message appears. É is selected.Restarting playback after stoppingDuring the search for mobile phones, the con-nection with the Bluetooth® audio device isterminated (Y page 133). In the Bluetooth®audio (Y page 238) basic display, you will seethe No Bluetooth audio device connec‐ted. message, and the Connect last device menu item cannot be selected.When the search is finished, the Bluetooth®audio device can be reconnected.XConfirm Connect last device by press-ing W.Depending on the Bluetooth® audio deviceused, playback starts immediately or youneed to start playback manually.In this case, you will see the Bluetooth audio device paused message.XTo start playback: select Ì by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.Playback resumes from the beginning.Operation with Bluetooth® audio 239AudioZ
Selecting a trackThis function is not supported by all Blue-tooth® audio devices.XTo skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the E or F button onCOMAND Online.orXPress the 9 or : button briefly onthe multifunction steering wheel.XRapid scroll: press and hold the 9or : button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel until the desired track is reached.If you press and hold the 9 or : but-ton, the rapid scrolling speed increasesafter a short time.Selecting playback optionsIf the Bluetooth® audio device supports thecorresponding function, the following optionsare available:RNormal track sequenceThe tracks are played in the normal order(e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).Audio data playback is determined by theorder in which the tracks are written to thedata carrier. Alphabetical order is the mostcommon. Once all the tracks in a folderhave been played, the tracks in the nextfolder are played.RRandom tracksAll the tracks on the medium are played inrandom order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).XSelect BT audio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The # dot indicates the option selected.XSelect the option by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.If you select Random tracks, you will seea corresponding symbol in the display/selection window.Increasing the volume on COMANDOnlineXSelect BT audio by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Volume and press W to confirm.A menu appears. The # dot indicates thecurrent setting.XSelect Standard or Boost and press W toconfirm.Information about sound settings(Y page 31)Information about Traffic Programme(Y page 213)You will find further information in the "AudioAUX mode" section (Y page 247)Media Interface modeConnection optionsOverviewThe connection sockets are located in thestowage compartment in the centre console.Device-specific adapter cables are requiredto connect external devices to the MediaInterface. Country-specific versions are sup-plied with the Media Interface (Y page 241).You can connect the following data carriersto COMAND Online via the Media Interface:RiPod®RiPhone®Rcertain MP3 players240 Media Interface modeAudio
iStore individual parts in a safe place.Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connec-tion cables.iiPod® and iPhone® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California,USA.iMP3 players that support MTP (MediaTransfer Protocol) can be used.This allows the MP3 player to be easily con-nected to the Media Interface and removedafter use. Audio data is played withoutproblem.On some MP3 players, you have to activatethe relevant function; see the MP3 playeroperating instructions.Supported devicesFor further details and a list of supporteddevices, contact a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre or visit the website at http://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/connect. Then, follow the instructions in the"Media Interface" section.Connecting an external deviceDo not leave external devices in the vehicle.At extreme temperatures, they cannot beguaranteed to function correctly (see theoperating instructions of the device in ques-tion). Examples of extreme temperatures aredirect sunlight or very low outside tempera-tures. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage to external devices.iNever connect more than one device at atime. You will otherwise not be able to playback from the external device.USB hubs (devices with several USB con-nections) are not supported.:4-pin socket for 3.5 mm stereo jack, e.g.for MP3 players (audio and video):4-pin socket for ⅛ inch stereo jack, e.g.for MP3 players (audio and video);iPod® plug, to connect an iPod®=USB socket, to connect an MP3 player?Example of device (iPod®)XConnect the external device with suitablesocket :, ; or =.COMAND Online activates the device, adisplay appears (when connecting aniPod® plug or USB socket).If you remove a device, the No device con‐nected message appears.iA connected iPod® or MP3 player shouldnot be simultaneously operated via theMedia Interface and the remote control(e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directlyvia the device itself. Doing so may causeunforeseen technical difficulties.Applications (Apps) that are activated onthe connected device may lead to malfunc-tions.iConnecting a fully discharged iPod® orMP3 player can result in an extended initi-alisation period.Error messages appear while the device isbeing activated if:Rthe connected device is not supported(External device unavailable mes-sage).Rthe connected device consumes too muchpowerMedia Interface mode 241AudioZ
Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty.Ra mass storage device (e.g. USB memorystick or USB hard drive) is connected to theMedia Interface.In this case the message Please con‐nect the device to the other USB port appears.iThe separate USB connection ensuresquick access and expanded media contentoptions.iInformation is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Switching to Media Interface modeGeneral notesIn extreme cases, starting up individual func-tions can take up to several minutes; thisdepends on the external device and its con-tent (e.g. video podcasts).Only use the original software to save files oniPods® or MP3 players. Otherwise, some orall functions may not be available.Switching on automaticallyXConnect an external device (Y page 241).COMAND Online activates the device (ifconnected via the iPod® connector or USBsocket). . The basic display then appears.Switching on with the function buttonThe external device is connected to the MediaInterface.XPress the h function button one or moretimes.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:RAudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)RMemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeROperation with Bluetooth® audioSwitching on using a number keyXPress the i number key (for a DVDchanger) or the o number key (for asingle DVD drive) number key.This selects the connected external audiodevice directly.Switching on via the media listMedia Interface mode (iPod® mode) when equip-ped with a DVD changer:Cover (if available) or representation ofdevice;Track number=Elapsed track time (also in format00:00:00 for audio books)?Track nameAGraphic time displayBTrack position in playlistCAlbum name (if available)DArtist (if available)EMusic searchFPosition in the media listGData medium typeHPlayback optionsXSelect the entry under position 0 (DVDchanger) or position 5 (single DVD drive) inthe media list by turning cVd the COMAND242 Media Interface modeAudio
controller and press W to confirm(Y page 220).COMAND Online activates the connecteddevice. You will see a message to thiseffect. The basic display then appears.If no device is connected, you will see theMedia Interface entry instead of adevice name.The type of device connected is indicated bythe corresponding symbol for iPod®(iPhone®) or MP3 player.The current playback option is shown with asymbol behind album name (no display forNormal track sequence) (Y page 246).iIf the device connected does not containany playable tracks, a message appears tothis effect.Selecting music filesNoteCOMAND Online displays the data stored onthe iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player accordingto the file structure used in the respectivemedium.Selecting by skipping to a trackXTo skip forwards or back to a track: turncVd the COMAND controller when the dis-play/selection window is active.orXPress the E or F button.The skip forward function skips to the nexttrack. The skip back function skips to thebeginning of the current track if the trackhas been playing for more than eight sec-onds. If the track has been playing for lessthan eight seconds, it skips to the start ofthe previous track. If you have selected aplayback option other than Normal track sequence, the track sequence is random.XOn the multifunction steering wheel:switch to Media Interface mode inCOMAND Online(Y page 242).XOn the multifunction steering wheel, pressthe = or ; button to select theAudio menu.XPress the 9 or : button briefly.If you hold down the 9 or : button,the system scrolls through the list morequickly. Not all media players support thisfunction.If track information is available on themedia player, the multifunction displayshows the number and name of the track.Selecting using the number keypadXTo make an entry: press the l button.An input menu appears. The number ofcharacters available for input depends onthe number of stored tracks.XTo enter a track number: press a numberkey, e.g. q.The digit is entered in the first position inthe input line.iCOMAND Online will ignore and not dis-play an invalid digit.XEnter more numbers if desired.The track plays after the last possible num-ber is entered.iPressing and holding a number key formore than two seconds completes theentry, and the corresponding track isplayed.Fast forward/rewindXWhile the display/selection window isactive, slide XVY and hold the COMANDcontroller until the desired position hasbeen reached.orXPress and hold the F or E buttonuntil the desired position is reached.Media Interface mode 243AudioZ
iOn an iPod® or iPhone®, fast rewind onlyfunctions within the current track.Selecting a category/playlist/folderOverviewFor an iPod®, iPhone® or certain MP3 players,you can select tracks using categories or fold-ers.Depending on the device connected, the fol-lowing categories may be available, for exam-ple:RCurrent tracklistRSelect by coverRKeyword searchRPlaylists (e.g. All)RArtistsRAlbumsRTracksRPodcastsRGenresRComposersRAudiobooksRVideosiSome playback categories contain theentry All. If this entry has been selected,the entire content of the category selectedwill be played.The Videos category is available foriPods® and iPhones®.iThe functions are available as soon as theentire media content has been read andanalysed. For certain functions, such askeyword search and selection by cover, thiscan take several minutes, depending on thescope of media and the connected device.If the same device is reconnected withunchanged media content, these functionsare available much more quickly.However, if you change the media content,it has to be read and analysed again.Calling up the category listExample: category listXSelect Search in the basic display by slid-ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The category list appears.iSearch is not available until the devicehas been activated.iReading: if the media content of the con-nected device is being read, this is indica-ted on the upper right by a symbol. Whenreading has ended, the categories Select by cover and Keyword search are avail-able.Depending on the connected device andthe size of the media content, reading maytake several minutes. When the device isnext started or reconnected, the advancedfunctions will be quickly available.However, if you change the media contenton your iPod®/iPhone®, it has to be readand analysed again.244 Media Interface modeAudio
Example: current track list:Symbol for next folder up;Device symbol and device name=Track symbol?Current trackExample: current track list:Symbol for next folder up;Device symbol and device name=Track symbol?Current trackXSelect Current tracklist by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The content of the current track listappears.XSelect the track by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The track is played.XTo switch to the next folder up: slideXV the COMAND controller.orXPress the % back button.Playing back the contents of a categoryor folderXSelect the category or folder by turningcVd the COMAND controller.XPress W the COMAND controller for longerthan two seconds.The content of the category or folder selec-ted is played according to the playbackoption selected (Y page 246).Alphabetical track selectioniPod®, iPhone® and MP3 playerThis function is available for alphabeticallysorted categories and folders. This functionis not available for albums or playlists, forexample.XSelect a category, e.g. Artists, by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The available artists are displayed.XPress the corresponding number key onceor repeatedly to select the initial letter ofthe desired artist. For example, to select anartist whose name begins with C, press thel number key three times.The available letters are listed at the loweredge of the display.After a message, the first entry in the listthat matches the letter entered is highligh-ted.iIf no corresponding entry exists, the lastentry corresponding to a previous letter ishighlighted instead.iiPods and MP3 players: the quality of thesearch results is highly dependent on theversion and language variant of the soft-ware used to populate the device. A well-Media Interface mode 245AudioZ
known example of such software isiTunes®.If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. iniTunes®), the search is cancelled withoutany result.Additional selection functionsRSelect by coverAlbums can be chosen by cover using themenu item.The first time the Select by cover func-tion is used, additional data must be loadedfrom the iPod®/iPhone®. The currentmusic playback is interrupted to allowaccess to this data. The process may takea few minutes and should not be cancelled.Otherwise it will start again from the begin-ning the next time Select by cover isselected. Covers are initially searched forin the Gracenote Media Database and arethen added to during playback from theconnected device (Y page 222). The avail-ability depends on the use and the tracksalready selected.RKeyword searchSelecting keyword search allows you tosearch through all categories on the con-nected device for keywords.iFor more information on Select by cover and Keyword search can be foundunder "Music search, selecting category"(Y page 244).iFor an iPod®/iPhone®, the available cov-ers are added most efficiently if the entiremedia content is in the current playlist. Thisis the case if you have selected the play-back option Title or Random media(Y page 246).Special feature in iPod®/iPhone® modeiIf the connected iPod®/iPhone® is notfunctioning or paused, you can search fortracks but cannot select them. After con-firming a new track, the Function unavailable message appears.Playback optionsXTo select a playback option: selectMedia Interface in the basic display bysliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The options list appears. The # dot indi-cates the option selected.XSelect an option and press W to confirm.The following options are available:RNormal track sequenceNormal track sequence: you hear thetracks in their normal order (e.g. numericalor alphabetical).RRandom mediaAll the tracks on the medium are played inrandom order.RRandom tracksThe tracks in the currently active categoryor folder, including any subfolders, areplayed in random order.iIf the connected iPod®/iPhone® is notfunctioning or paused, the playbackoptions are inactive. The display of optionsis greyed out.MP3 player instructionsGeneral informationUp to 30,000 tracks per medium are suppor-ted.You can speed up some functions andimprove the search results by:Rmaking sure the names of tracks, albumsand artists, for example, are written thesame wayRlabelling albums featuring various artists as"compilations"246 Media Interface modeAudio
iMultiple entries of tracks in playlists arefiltered out for some players.Data formatsMP3 and WMA are supported as data formatswith fixed and variable bit rates (up to320 kbit/s).Special considerations when using MP3playersUp to 8 directory levels with up to 1,000tracks per directory are supported.Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.They can impair functionality.iDRM (Digital Rights Management) protec-ted files are not supported by the MediaInterface.Audio AUX modeNotes on audio AUX modeThe varying volumes of external audio sour-ces can mean that system messages (e.g.traffic and navigation announcements) areplayed at a noticeably increased volume. Ifnecessary, deactivate the system messagesor adjust their volume manually.You can connect an external audio source(AUX) to COMAND Online. You will find thesocket in the centre console stowage com-partment.If COMAND Online is equipped with a MediaInterface, external audio sources are connec-ted using the cable set provided. The cableset then replaces the audio AUX socket. Theconnections for the Media Interface are loca-ted in the stowage compartment in the centreconsole.iYou can find more information on theInternet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect and in the "MediaInterface mode" section (Y page 240).Switching to audio AUX modeSwitching on with the function buttonThe external device is connected to the AudioAux source.XPress the h function button one or moretimes.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:RAudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)RMemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeROperation with Bluetooth® audioSwitching on with the audio menuWhen you connect an external audio source,audio AUX is not selected automatically.XSelect Audio in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If AUX mode was the last mode selected, itwill now be active.If another audio source is switched on, youcan now switch to audio AUX mode in theaudio menu.XSelect Audio using ZV and press W toconfirm.The audio menu appears.XSelect Aux using cVd and press W to con-firm.The audio AUX menu appears. The mediumin the external audio source is played if thesource is connected and playback selec-ted.Audio AUX mode 247AudioZ
Please see the respective operating instruc-tions for how to operate the external audiosource.Information on:RVolume settings (Y page 30)RSound settings (Y page 31)Increasing the volume on COMANDOnlineXSelect Volume in the AUX display by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.A menu appears. The # dot indicates thecurrent setting.XSelect Standard or Boost and press W toconfirm.Standard: the volume of the external audiosource is adjusted to a standard value.Boost: the volume of the external audiosource is raised by approximately 10 dB.A device which is connected as an externalaudio source may seem quieter or louder inthe vehicle, or the usual maximum volumecannot be achieved. On some devices, it ispossible to adjust the volume separately. Inthis case, start at a medium volume andincrease it gradually. This enables you todetermine whether the system is able to playthe music at high volume without distortingit.248 Audio AUX modeAudio
Features of your COMAND Online ... 250General notes .................................... 250Basic settings .................................... 250TV mode ............................................. 251Video DVD mode ............................... 259Video AUX operation ........................ 265Picture viewer ................................... 266249Video
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.General notesAutomatic picture shutoffIf the vehicle is travelling faster than approx-imately 5 km/h, the picture automaticallyswitches off in the following modes:RTV mode (with teletext)RVideo DVD modeThe following message appears in the display:In order not to distract you from the traffic situation, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion.As soon as the vehicle speed drops belowabout 5 km/h, the picture switches back onagain.Background video modeIf another main function is active, e.g. navi-gation, you can perform the following opera-tions in TV and video DVD mode. A windowshows information about the selected func-tion.Using the E or F button, you can:Rselect a TV channelRselect a scene or chapter (video DVDmode)Rfast forward or rewind (video DVD mode)Where operating steps can be carried out inthe active main function using the numberkeys, the following functions are not possi-ble:Rselecting TV channels from the channelpresetsRstoring TV channels in the channel presetsBasic settingsAdjusting the brightness, contrast orcolourThe following describes the TV, video DVDand video AUX modes.XIn TV or video DVD mode, press W theCOMAND controller.The menu is shown.XSelect TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A menu appears.XSelect Brightness, Contrast or Colourby turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSet the value between - 5 and + 5 and pressW to confirm.Changing the picture formatThe following describes the TV, video DVDand video AUX modes.XIn TV or video DVD mode, press W theCOMAND controller.The menu is shown.XSelect TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A menu appears.XSelect Automatic, 16:9 optimised, 4:3or Widescreen and press W to confirm.The dot in front of the entry indicates thecurrently selected format.250 Basic settingsVideo
XSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.TV modeReception qualityPortable electronic devices in the vehicle mayseriously impair TV reception.The TV tuner is designed to receive digital TVchannels compliant with the DVB-T standard.If the reception deteriorates, the TV receiverautomatically switches to an alternative digi-tal frequency transmitting the same pro-gramme content with better reception.iIn some countries, DVB-T may not beavailable, or may not be available in allareas.The constantly changing reception conditionswhile the vehicle is in motion can interrupt thesignal. If the reception is too poor,COMAND Online can switch off the sound andfreeze or hide the picture. To indicate this, anicon of a radio tower with a line through itappears in the display.Switching to TV modeVideo menuXSelect Video in the main function bar bysliding XVY or turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If TV mode was the last mode selected, itwill now be highlighted.If another mode is switched on, you cannow switch to TV mode in the video menu.XSelect TV and press W to confirm.If the TV channel that was previously selec-ted is still receivable, it will be displayed.Showing/hiding the control menuControl menu displayed:Preset position of the selected TV channel;Selected TV channel/number=Current programme?Next TV channel in the channel list (chan-nel name or number)AShows the menuBPrevious TV channel in the channel list(channel name or number)XTo show the control menu: slide ZVÆ orturn cVd the COMAND controller.iIf you turn the COMAND controller, thenext/previous station is selected.XTo hide the control menu: slide ZVÆ theCOMAND controller.orXWait for approximately eight seconds.TV mode 251Video
Showing/hiding the menuMenu shown:TV options;Channel preset list=Information about the current programme?To switch on teletextASound settingsXTo show the control menu: press W theCOMAND controller.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press W to confirm.XTo hide the control menu: slide ZV theCOMAND controller and confirm Full screen by pressing W.iInformation about current programme= and teletext ? are not supported by allTV standards or TV channels in all coun-tries.Selecting TV channelsSelecting channels using the controlmenuXTurn cVd the COMAND controller.orXSlide XVY the COMAND controller.orXPress the E or F button.The TV tuner selects the previous or nextchannel from the alphabetical channel list.Setting a channels from the channel listAfter starting the vehicle or switching onCOMAND Online, all receivable TV and radiostations are listed by the reception function.The respective channel list contains the fol-lowing information, if it is transmitted and canbe received:Rthe names of the channels that can bereceivedRthe name of the current and next pro-gramme on each channelThe background reception function requiresa certain amount of time to update this infor-mation. COMAND Online can only display theinformation if the TV channels are transmit-ting it and if the reception conditions are ade-quate. The electronic programme guide (EPG)provides the titles of the current and upcom-ing programmes.The order of the channel list is country-spe-cific.XTo set a channel using COMAND Online: press W the COMANDcontroller.The menu is shown.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect TV channel list or Radio sta‐tion list and press W to confirm.The channel list appears. The # dot in frontof a list entry indicates the currently selec-ted channel. A number before the list entryshows the memory slot in the channel pre-sets.XSelect the channel and press W to confirm.XTo set a channel using the multifunc-tion steering wheel: switch on TV modein COMAND Online(Y page 251).XPress the = or ; button to select theAudio menu.XPress and hold the 9 or : button.252 TV modeVideo
Setting channels via the channel pre-setsChannel presetsSelecting a channel in COMAND Online:XOption 1: press W the COMAND control-ler.The menu is shown.XSelect Preset by sliding XVY or turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The channel preset memory appears. The# dot in front of a preset position indicatesthat the currently selected channel isstored there.XSelect and confirm a channel by turningcVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler and press W to confirm.orXOption 2: briefly press one or two numberkeys.To select a channel from a single-digit pre-set, briefly press the s number key, forexample.To select a channel from a double-digitmemory position, briefly press the land m number keys, for example.If a channel was saved, the storage numberand channel name appear and COMANDOnline sets the channel.Saving a TV channel automatically or man-ually (Y page 254).Selecting channels by entering thechannel and programme numberSeveral programmes can be transmitted onone channel with digital TV. You can thereforeenter a channel and the desired programmeon this channel.XStep 1: to call up the input line for the channel number: press l during TVplayback.orXPress W the COMAND controller.The menu is shown.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Channel entry and press W toconfirm.The input line for the four-digit channelnumber appears.XStep 2: to enter a channel/programme number: press the corresponding numberkeys.As soon as you have entered the channel/programme number, COMAND Online setsthe channel/station.If you only enter the first two or three digitsof the channel/programme number, thefirst receivable programme will be setwithin the programme series.If you have not entered a programme num-ber, the first programme with adequatereception will be set.If you enter channels that are either not inten-ded for or not allowed in your country, theInvalid channel number messageappears.XPress W the COMAND controller and con-firm the message.iYou can enter channel numbers or pro-grammes available in your country even ifthe reception is currently not adequate.TV mode 253Video
Information on channel numbers availablein your country can be found on the websiteof the private or public broadcaster.Storing TV channelsStoring channels manuallyYou can manually store up to 40 TV channelsin preset positions.XOption 1: press one or two number keyswhile a TV programme is playing, until atone can be heard.To save a channel to a single-digit memoryposition, briefly press the s numberkey, for example.To save a channel to a double-digit memoryposition, briefly press the l numberkey, for example. Then within three sec-onds, press and hold m, for example.The current channel is stored under thecorresponding preset. The TV picture thenreappears.orXOption 2: press W the COMAND control-ler.The menu is shown.XSelect Preset by sliding XVY or turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The channel preset memory appears. The# dot in front of a preset position indicatesthat the channel currently selected isstored there.XTurn cVd the COMAND controller to selectthe desired preset position.XTo store a channel, press and hold W theCOMAND controller until you hear a tone.The previously saved channel is overwrit-ten.Storing channels automaticallyTV channels are automatically stored on thefirst 20 of the 40 preset positions in total.Receivable channels are stored in order ofreception quality. The current preset chan-nels in positions 1 – 20 are manually over-written.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Preset by sliding XVY or turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect Autostore and press W to confirm.COMAND Online searches for channelswith adequate reception. The availablechannels are automatically stored in thepreset positions.Information about the current pro-grammeXTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Info by sliding XVY or turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.You will see the information if it is providedby the selected TV channel or radio station.The information field otherwise remainsempty.XTo display multi-page information, turncVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.iIt may take a few seconds for the infor-mation to appear.Displaying the current programme orprogramme previewThis function is available if the selected TVchannel or radio station transmits the neces-sary information.254 TV modeVideo
XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect TV channel list or Radio sta‐tion list.The selected channel list appears. It showsthe current programme on the digital TVchannels or digital radio stations whichhave adequate reception. The # dot in frontof a list entry indicates the currently selec-ted channel.:Alphabetical browser;Channel name=To display the programme preview?Visual display of the elapsed programmetime (if this information is broadcast)ATitle of the current programmeBCurrent channelXTo activate the alphabetical browser:slide XV the COMAND controller to theleft.XSelect the initial letter of the desired chan-nel name by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVdthe COMAND controller.orXTo select the letter B, for example, pressthe l number key twice in quick suc-cession.The programme display changes to theappropriate channel.iEntering characters using the numberkeypad (Y page 37).XSwitch back by sliding VY.XTo display the programme preview: slideVY the COMAND controller to the right.The channel list shows the channel's nextprogramme.:To display the current programme;Channel name=The beginning and end of the programme?Title of the next programmeACurrent channelXTo display the current programme: slideXV the COMAND controller to the left.XTo close the display: press the % backbutton.The alphabetical browser cannot be activa-ted in the programme preview.iThe programme preview is also referredto as the electronic programme guide(EPG).Basic TV settingsFixing the frequencyDepending on reception levels, country or TVstandard, the TV tuner automatically switchesto an alternative channel with better recep-tion if it is broadcasting the same programmecontent. You can use the Channel fix func-tion to prevent this channel switching. This isuseful e. g. if there is a disruptive time delayTV mode 255Video
between the channels or if you do not wishthe tuner to switch channels automatically.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Channel fix and confirm with W.XThe function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status. Whenthe function is switched on, FIX appears inthe display window.XTo exit the menu: slide XVY the COMANDcontroller or press the % back button.iThe setting is only valid for the currentlyselected channel.Setting the reception regionCOMAND Online is set to the correct recep-tion region at the factory. If you are drivingyour vehicle in a different country or region,you should set COMAND Online accordingly.In an incorrect reception area, channels maynot be found or characters may be incorrectlydisplayed. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centrecan help you to select the correct receptionregion.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect TV standard and press W to con-firm.A list appears showing the receptionregions. The # dot in front of a list entryindicates the currently selected receptionarea or country.XSelect the reception area and press W toconfirm.A message appears to inform you that if thewrong country is set, correct reception willnot be possible.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.If you select Yes, COMAND Online willswitch to the country setting you haveselected.If you select No, the country list will appearagain.TeletextIntroductionTeletext and data service functions are notsupported by all TV standards in all countries.Teletext can only be received if there is nointerference in the picture reception. The tel-etext or data service functions receive andsave all teletext pages for the currently selec-ted channel in the system memory. Thisexcludes any subpages. If you set a differentchannel, the memory is cleared and refilled.Switching teletext on/off256 TV modeVideo
XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XTo switch on: select Teletext by slidingXVY and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XTo switch off: press and hold the %back button.The TV picture appears.Selecting a teletext pageXTo access a page directly: press the cor-responding number keys.XTo access the previous/next page: turncVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.iYou can only enter pages that are permis-sible for teletext between 100 and 899.Dynamic teletext pageA dynamic teletext page consists of severalsubpages.XTo select a subpage: slideXVY the COMAND controller.Digital teletext (MHEG-5)In addition to TV and radio programmes, youcan also use interactive multimedia applica-tions such as weather forecasts, newsreports and sports results.Digital teletext is only available in some coun-tries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XTo switch on: select Teletext by slidingXVY and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XWhen the data contents are displayed, turncVd the COMAND controller.The menu bar appears at the bottom of thepicture.XTo select a colour: select Red, Green,Yellow or Blue by turning cVd theCOMAND controller.XPress W to confirm.The contents of the selected colour are dis-played.XTo navigate to the page: when the menubar is displayed, slide ZVÆ the COMANDcontroller.The menu bar disappears.XSlide ZVÆ the COMAND controller andselect contents from the page.XPress W to confirm.XTo return to the TV programme: turncVd the COMAND controller.XSelect TV by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller.orXPress and hold the % back button on theleft next to the COMAND controller.Selecting audioTV mode 257Video
If a multilingual broadcast is received, you canselect the audio channel you would like tohear. With Audio 1 you can select the mainchannel, with Audio 2 you can choose anadditional audio track.XTo show the menu: press W the COMANDcontroller.XTo switch on: select TV by sliding XVY orturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.XSelect Audio 1 or Audio 2 by slidingZVÆ the COMAND controller.The # dot in front of an entry indicates theselected setting.The audio channel switches over, e.g. toanother language.Further optionsOverviewYou can use this function to:Rselect audio languagesRswitch subtitles on/off and select the sub-title languageRselect a country-specific character setRperform channel list settingsRreset adjustmentsThe "TV - further options" menuXTo call up the menu: when the televisionpicture is shown, press W the COMANDcontroller to show the menu.XSelect TV by sliding XVY or turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect Further options by sliding ZVÆor turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XTo exit the menu: select Exit and pressW to confirm.Selecting language and subtitlesXIn the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, con-firm Language & Subtitles by pressingW the COMAND controller (Y page 258).A menu appears.XTo select the language: confirm Audio Language by pressing W the COMANDcontroller.XSelect Prefer COMAND language or oneof the available audio languages.Prefer COMAND language selects the sys-tem language currently set for COMANDOnline. Switch the setting on O or off ª.If you select one of the available audio lan-guages, e.g. English, this setting is used forthe current program. If Prefer COMAND language is activated as well, this settingis then used for the following programme.XTo select subtitles: select Subtitles bysliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.258 TV modeVideo
XSelect Subtitles and press W to confirm.Switch the subtitles on O or off ª.XSelect Prefer COMAND language or oneof the available audio languages.Prefer COMAND language selects the sys-tem language currently set for COMANDOnline. Switch the setting on O or off ª.XTo exit the menu: select Back and pressW to confirm.SettingsXIn the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, con-firm Settings by pressing W theCOMAND controller (Y page 258).A menu appears.XCountry-specific character set: select1. country-specific character setand press W to confirm.Switch the setting on O or off ª.iYou can change the setting from channel-specific to country-specific character setvia the reception region setting (TV stand-ard) (Y page 256).XTo perform station list settings: select2. Station List Settings by slidingZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect Display free-to-air TV Sta‐tions, Display free-to-air Radio Stations or Display data-service-only Stations.Switch the setting on O or off ª.XTo reset the settings: select Reset.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto reset.XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm.After selecting Yes, the settings are resetto the factory settings. No cancels the pro-cedure.XTo exit the menu: select 0. Back andpress W to confirm.Video DVD modeImportant safety notesGWARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. Thereis a risk of injury.You must not open the casing. Always havemaintenance work and repairs carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.GWARNINGHandling discs while driving will distract youfrom traffic conditions. You could then losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-ary.Bear in mind that, at a speed of only50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering adistance of 14 m per second.Notes on discs! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.They could peel off and damageCOMAND Online. Stickers can cause thedisc to bend, which can result in read errorsand disc recognition problems.! COMAND Online is designed to play discswhich comply with the EN 60908 standard.Video DVD mode 259VideoZ
Therefore, you can only use discs with amaximum thickness of 1.3 mm.If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those thatcontain data on both sides (DVD on oneside and audio data on the other), they can-not be ejected and can damage the device.Only use round discs with a diameter of12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of8 cm, even with an adapter.You may encounter playback problems whenplaying copied discs. There are a large varietyof discs, DVD authoring software, writingsoftware and writers available. This varietymeans that there is no guarantee that thesystem will be able to play discs that you havecopied yourself.DVD playback requirementsThere are video DVDs available on the marketthat do not conform to the current standards.Such DVDs may have picture, sound or otherplayback problems.COMAND Online is capable of playing backvideo DVDs produced according to the fol-lowing standards:RRegion code 2 (for Europe) or region code0 (no region code)RPAL or NTSC standardYou will generally find the relevant detailseither on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.iIf you insert a video DVD with a differentregion code, you will see a message to thiseffect.iCOMAND Online is set to region code 2at the factory. This setting can be changedat a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Thiswill allow you to play video DVDs with a dif-ferent region code, provided that they areproduced in accordance with the PAL orNTSC standard. The region code can bechanged a maximum of five times.Function restrictionsDepending on the DVD, it is possible that cer-tain functions or actions will be temporarilyblocked or may not function at all. As soon asyou try to activate these functions or actions,you will see the K symbol in the display.Inserting and removing DVDsXProceed as described in the "Inserting andejecting CDs and DVDs" section(Y page 214).Switching to video DVD modeSwitching on automaticallyXSingle DVD drive: insert a video DVD.COMAND loads the medium inserted andstarts to play it.XDVD changer: insert a video DVD.XPress h.orXPress the % back button.COMAND Online loads the medium inser-ted and starts to play it.Switching on with the function buttonXPress the h function button.COMAND Online switches to the disc oper-ating mode previously set.By pressing the function button repeatedly,you can change the operating mode in thefollowing order:Raudio CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 in theDVD changer or single DVD drive (discmode)Rmemory card modeRMUSIC REGISTERRUSB memoryRMedia Interface or audio AUX modeRoperation with Bluetooth® audio260 Video DVD modeVideo
XDVD changer: select Media by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.Single DVD drive: select Media by slidingVÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-troller and press W to confirm.XSelect a ý video DVD from the media list(Y page 263).Switching on with the video menuXSelect Video in the main function bar bysliding ZV and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.If video DVD mode was the last mode selec-ted, it will now be active.If another video source is switched on, youcan now switch to video DVD mode in thevideo menu.XSelect Video by sliding ZV the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The video menu appears.XSelect DVD-V and press W to confirm.Showing/hiding the navigation menuXTo show: in video DVD mode, slide ZVÆthe COMAND controller.XTo hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND control-ler.orXWait for approximately eight seconds.Navigation menu displayed:Data medium type;Current track=Current scene?Track timeAShows the menuiThis function is not available while theDVD menu is being displayed.Showing/hiding the menuXTo show: in full-screen video DVD mode,press W the COMAND controller.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press W to confirm.XTo hide: slide ZV the COMAND controllerand confirm Full screen by pressing W.Menu shown:Video DVD options;Pause function=Stop functionVideo DVD mode 261VideoZ
?Media media selectionASound settingsiThis function is not available while theDVD menu is being displayed.Fast forward/rewindXIn full-screen video DVD mode, slide XVYand hold the COMAND controller until thedesired position is reached.orXPress and hold the E or F buttonuntil the desired position is reached.You see the navigation menu.Stop functionXShow the menu (Y page 261).XTo interrupt playback: select É byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì. Thevideo image is hidden.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress W to confirm.Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted.XTo stop playback: while playback is inter-rupted, select É again and press W toconfirm.orXDuring playback, confirm É by pressingW twice in rapid succession.Ì is selected.XTo restart playback: confirm Ì bypressing W.Playback restarts from the beginning.Pause functionXShow the menu (Y page 261).XTo pause playback: select Ë by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress W to confirm.The menu is hidden.Selecting a scene/chapterIf the film is divided into scenes or chapters,you can select them directly while the film isrunning, or skip forwards step by step. SomeDVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.during the opening credits).It may also be possible to select the scene/chapter from within the menu stored on theDVD.XTo skip forwards or back: in full-screenmode, turn cVd the COMAND controllerorXSlide XVY the COMAND controllerorXPress the E or F button on the con-trol panel.The navigation menu (Y page 261) appearsfor approximately eight seconds.XOn the multifunction steering wheel:switch to video DVD mode inCOMAND Online (Y page 260).XUse the = or ; button to select theAudio menu.XPress the 9 or : button to select ascene/chapter.If you press and hold the 9 or : but-ton for an extended period, rapid scrollbegins.262 Video DVD modeVideo
Selecting a film/titleDVD function menuThis function is only available if the DVD isdivided into several films/titles. If the DVDcontains several films, these can be selecteddirectly. A film can be selected either whenthe DVD is being played back or when it isstopped.The film can also be selected from the menuon the DVD itself.XShow the menu (Y page 261).XSelect DVD-Video by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.XSelect DVD functions and press W toconfirm.A menu appears.XSelect Title selection by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XSelect a film/title and press W to confirm.Selecting a video DVD from the medialistXShow the menu (Y page 261).XSelect Media by sliding VÆ and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The media list appears. The # dot indicatesthe current medium being played. VideoDVDs are indicated by the ý icon.XIf equipped with a single DVD drive:press W the COMAND controller.COMAND Online loads the video DVD andbegins playing it.XIf equipped with a DVD changer: pressW the COMAND controller to display allmagazine trays.XSelect the video DVD by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.COMAND Online loads the video DVD andbegins playing it.iIf you select a CD, an audio DVD or anMP3 medium, you switch to the respectiveaudio mode.For further information about the medialist; see (Y page 220).DVD menuCalling up the DVD menuThe DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVDitself. It is structured in various ways accord-ing to the individual DVD and permits certainactions and settings.In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-ple, you can change the DVD language in theDVD menu.XShow the menu (Y page 261).XSelect DVD-Video in the menu by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press W toconfirm.XSelect Menu and press W to confirm.The DVD menu appears.Video DVD mode 263VideoZ
Selecting menu items in the DVD menuXShow the DVD menu (Y page 263).XSelect a menu item by sliding ZVÆ theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.orXSelect a menu item by sliding XVY theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.The menu appears.XTo reconfirm your selection: confirmSelect by pressing W.COMAND Online carries out the action.Make a selection from the further options,if necessary.COMAND Online then switches back to theDVD menu.iMenu items that cannot be selected areshown in grey.iDepending on the DVD, the menu items:Back (to the movie), Play, Stop, K,L or Go up may either not function atall or may not function at certain points inthe DVD menu. To indicate this, the Ksymbol appears in the display.Moving up one level in the DVD menuXShow the DVD menu (Y page 263).XSelect the corresponding menu item in theDVD menu and press W the COMAND con-troller to confirm.orXSelect any menu item in the DVD menu andpress W the COMAND controller to con-firm.XSelect Go up and press W to confirm.Going back to the filmXPress the % back button repeatedlyuntil you see the movie.orXSelect the corresponding menu item fromthe DVD menu.XSelect the Back (to the movie) menuitem in the menu and press W to confirm.Setting the language and audio for-matThis function is not available on all DVDs. If itis available, you can set the DVD menu lan-guage, the audio language or the audio for-mat. The number of settings is dependent onthe DVD content. It may also be possible toaccess the settings from the DVD menu(Y page 263).XShow the DVD menu (Y page 263).XIn full-screen mode, press W the COMANDcontroller to show the menu.XSelect DVD-Video in the menu by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press W toconfirm.XSelect Menu language or Audio lan‐guage and press W to confirm.In both cases, a menu appears after a fewseconds. The # dot in front of an entry indi-cates the currently selected language.XSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.264 Video DVD modeVideo
Subtitles and camera angleThese functions are not available on all DVDs.The number of subtitle languages and cameraangles available depends on the content ofthe DVD. It may also be possible to accessthe settings from the DVD menu.XShow the DVD menu (Y page 263).XSelect DVD-Video in the menu by turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press W toconfirm.XSelect Subtitles or Camera angle andpress W to confirm.In both cases, a menu appears. The # dotin front of an entry indicates the currentsetting.XSelect a setting by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.Interactive contentDVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. avideo game). In a video game, for example,you may be able to influence events by select-ing and triggering actions. The type and num-ber of actions depend on the DVD.XSelect an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY theCOMAND controller and press W to exe-cute it.A menu appears and the first entry,Select, is highlighted.XPress W the COMAND controller.Video AUX operationConnecting external video sourcesExternal video sources may have differentvolumes, which can mean that system mes-sages such as traffic announcements andnavigation system announcements are muchlouder. If necessary, deactivate the systemmessages or adjust their volume manually.If your vehicle is equipped with the MediaInterface, you can connect an external videosource.You require an additional audio/video cableset to connect an external video source to theMedia Interface.For more details, please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Then,follow the instructions in the "Media Inter-face" section.You will find the connection sockets in thecentre console stowage compartment.Audio/video sockets:Video port (V) (yellow);Audio port (L) (white)=Audio port (R) (red)iFor correct playback, a suitable videostandard must be set at the external videosource.XConnect the external device to the corre-sponding port.Video AUX operation 265VideoZ
Switching to video AUX modeVideo AUX modeXPress the h function button repeatedlyuntil Media Interface mode is selected.orXSelect Video in the main function bar byturning cVd the COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.If video AUX mode was the last mode selec-ted, it will now be active.If another video source is switched on, youcan now switch to video AUX mode in thevideo menu.XSelect Video and press W to confirm.XSelect Aux and press W to confirm.The video AUX menu appears. You will hearand see the content of the external videosource if it is connected and switched toplayback.Showing/hiding the menuXTo show: in video AUX mode, press W theCOMAND controller.XTo hide: slide ZV the COMAND controllerand confirm Full screen by pressing W.Volume and sound settingsInformation on:RVolume settings (Y page 30)RSound settings (Y page 31)iA device which is connected as an exter-nal video source may seem quieter orlouder in the vehicle, or the usual maximumvolume cannot be achieved. On some devi-ces, it is possible to adjust the volume sep-arately. In this case, start at a medium vol-ume and increase it gradually. This enablesyou to determine whether the system isable to play the sound at high volume with-out distorting it.Increasing the volume on COMANDOnlineXShow the video AUX menu (Y page 266).XSelect Volume by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and press W to con-firm.A menu appears. The # dot indicates thecurrent setting.XSelect Standard or Boost and press W toconfirm.Standard: the volume of the external videosource is adjusted to a standard value.Boost: the volume of the external videosource is raised by approximately 10 dB.Picture viewerIntroductionIf there are pictures on the active datamedium, you can view them. You can displaypictures with a resolution of up to 20 mega-pixels.Data medium Supported pictureformatsCD/DVD with pic-ture filesbmp, jpeg, jpg, pngUSB devices (sticks,hard drives)SD memory cardbmp, jpeg, jpg, png266 Picture viewerVideo
Calling up the category listXSelect a data medium with pictures (e.g. amemory card):Rin the Audio menu (Y page 208)Rin the media list (Y page 220)XSelect Search in the basic display by slid-ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The category list appears (Y page 227).Displaying picturesXSelect Photos from the category list(Y page 227) by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.A folder directory appears.XSelect a folder with photos and press W toconfirm.The folder displays the existing picture files(example).XSelect a photo and press W to confirm.The photo is displayed and the music isstopped.Changing the picture viewXWhile viewing a picture (Y page 267), pressW the COMAND controller.A menu appears.XTo turn the picture clockwise: confirmTurn clockwise by pressing W theCOMAND controller.XTo turn the picture anti-clockwise:select Turn anticlockwise by turning thecVd COMAND controller and press W toconfirm.XTo zoom into a picture: select Zoom byturning the cVd COMAND controller andpress W to confirm.After you have zoomed into the picture, youcan move the section of the picture.XSlide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND control-ler.Picture viewer 267VideoZ
XTo revert to the original size: press W theCOMAND controller.orXPress the % back button.Exiting the picture viewerXSelect Back to menu in the menu by turn-ing cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.268 Picture viewerVideo
Features of your COMAND Online ... 270Overview ............................................ 270Basic functions ................................. 276System settings ................................ 278Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 279TV mode ............................................. 283Video DVD mode ............................... 288Active COMAND source mode ......... 292AUX mode .......................................... 295269Rear Seat Entertainment System
Features of your COMAND OnlineThis Supplement describes all the standardand optional equipment for your COMANDOnline system, as available at the time ofgoing to print. Country-specific differencesare possible. Please note that yourCOMAND Online system may not be equip-ped with all the features described.OverviewImportant safety notesGWARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. Thereis a risk of injury.You must not open the casing. Always havemaintenance work and repairs carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.GWARNINGIf objects such as headphones/headsets orexternal audio/video sources are not securedin the passenger compartment, they can beflung around and hit vehicle occupants. Thereis a risk of injury, for example in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change in direc-tion.Always stow these items or similar objectscarefully so that they cannot be flung around,for example in a lockable vehicle stowagecompartment.ComponentsThe Rear Seat Entertainment System compri-ses:Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front-seat head restraintsRa remote controlRa CD/DVD driveRAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)Rtwo sets of cordless headphones270 OverviewRear Seat Entertainment System
Rear-compartment screens:AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 272);DisplayRemote controlOverview:To switch the screen on/off;To switch the button lighting on/off=To select the screen for the remote con-trol?To select a menu or menu itemATo confirm a selection or settingBMuteCAdjusting the volumeDTo skip, fast-forward/fast-rewindETo select a track; to enter track directlyFTo exit a menu (back)Selecting the screen for the remote con-trolThe remote control can be used to operateone of the two rear-compartment screens orSPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so,you must switch the remote control to thedesired screen (Y page 271).XTo select the left-hand screen: turn thumb-wheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in thewindow.XTo select the right-hand screen: turnthumbwheel = until "R REAR" is highligh-ted in the window.XTo select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel =until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the win-dow.Switching the screen on/offIf the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock (see the vehicle Owner's Manual), or ifthe key is not inserted, the screens in the rearwill switch off after 30 minutes. Before thescreens switch off, they show a message tothis effect.Overview 271Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
You can switch the screens back on. How-ever, this will discharge the starter battery.XPoint the remote control at the rear-com-partment screen that has been selected forremote operation.XPress button : on the remote control(Y page 271).The respective rear screen switches on oroff.iYou can only switch the screens on usingthe remote control if the ignition isswitched on.Switching the button lighting on/offXPress button ; on the remote control(Y page 271).Depending on the previous status, the but-ton lighting is switched on or off.iIf you do not use the remote control forabout 15 seconds, the button lightingswitches off automatically.MuteXPress button B on the remote control(Y page 271).The sound is switched on/off.Selecting a menu/menu item and con-firming your selectionXSelect a menu/menu item using the=;9: buttons on theremote control and press the 9 button toconfirm.CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks:CD/DVD slot;AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal(red)=AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal(white)?AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)ACD/DVD eject buttonThe AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.Identical connections can be found on theright-hand side of the rear-compartmentscreens (display AUX)(Y page 271).272 OverviewRear Seat Entertainment System
Cordless headphonesOverview:Volume control;Selects a screen for the headphones=Battery compartment cover?Switches the cordless headphones on/offAIndicator lamp with various displays (Y page 274)XOpen both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling theheadphone band in the direction of the arrow.Switching the cordless headphoneson/offXPress button :.Depending on the previous status, theheadphones are switched on or off. To pre-serve the batteries, the headphones auto-matically switch off if they have notreceived an audio signal for approximatelythree minutes.Overview 273Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Adjusting the volume of the head-phonesXTurn volume control : until the desiredvolume has been set.iIf you have connected cordless head-phones to a rear-compartment screen, youcan adjust the volume using the remotecontrol (Y page 271).Selecting a screen for the headphonesXMove push slider : to L (left-hand screen)or R (right-hand screen).Indicator lamp displaysThe colour of the indicator lamp showswhether the headphones are switched on oroff and indicates the charge level of the bat-teries inserted.LED dis-playStatusGreen The batteries are fine.Red The batteries are almost dis-charged.Lit continu-ouslyThe headphones are switchedon and connected to a screen.Flashing The headphones are search-ing for the connection to ascreen.Off (dark) The headphones are switchedoff or the batteries are dis-charged.Connecting additional headphonesYou can connect one additional set of cordedheadphones to each of the two rear-compart-ment screens (Y page 271). The socket isdesigned for headphones with a 3.5 mmstereo jack plug and an impedance of32 ohms.Replacing batteriesNotesGWARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.274 OverviewRear Seat Entertainment System
HEnvironmental noteDispose of used batteries in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Batteries are required for the remote controland for the two sets of cordless headphones.The batteries can be replaced (Y page 274).Only valid for South AfricaOn the remote control:Battery compartment;Catch tab=Battery compartment cover?Retaining lugsABatteriesThe remote control contains 2 type AAA,1.5 V batteries.XTo open the battery compartment:remove battery compartment cover = onthe back of the remote control.XTo do so, press down retaining lug ; andtake off battery compartment cover =.XRemove discharged batteries A from thetray.XInsert the new batteries. Observe the polar-ity markings on the batteries and batterycompartment when doing so.Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)must face upwards.Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)must face downwards.XTo close the battery compartment:insert battery compartment cover = start-ing with retaining lugs ? into the batterycompartment and allow catch tab ; toengage in place.On the cordless headphones:Battery compartment coverThe cordless headphones contain two typeAAA, 1.5 V batteries.XTo open the battery compartment: flipbattery compartment cover : upwards.As you do so, hold the left-hand side of theheadphones as shown to prevent the bat-teries from falling out.XRemove the discharged batteries from thetray.Overview 275Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
XInsert the new batteries. Observe the polar-ity markings on the batteries and batterycompartment when doing so.Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)must face upwards.Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)must face downwards.XTo close the battery compartment:press the battery compartment coverdownwards until it engages into place.If the batteries have been inserted cor-rectly, the indicator lamp will light up greenwhen the headphones are switched on.iThe operating duration of the headphoneswith a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.Basic functionsUsing headphonesYou can use the cordless headphones sup-plied and/or up to two sets of corded head-phones connected to the corresponding jackof the rear-compartment screens(Y page 271).Information on:RSwitching the cordless headphones on/offRAdjusting the volume of the headphonesRSelecting a screen for the headphonescan be found under "Cordless headphones"(Y page 273).Using the main loudspeakersThis function is available in conjunction withCOMAND Online.You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to lis-ten to a disc inserted in the rear-compartmentdrive. To do so, at least one of the rear-com-partment screens must be set to disc mode.XTo set on COMAND Online: press the$ function button to switch on an audiomode.XSelect Audio by sliding ZV the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.The Audio menu appears.XSelect Rear by turning cVd the COMANDcontroller and press W to confirm.iThe headphones' volume setting does notaffect the main loudspeakers.Selecting sound settingsYou can select the sound settings in the audioCD/DVD/MP3, TV, video DVD and AUXmodes.XSwitch on an operating mode (e.g. audioCD mode) (Y page 279).XSelect Treble or Bass usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.An adjustment scale appears.XSelect a setting using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.Multiple usersSimultaneous use of the rear-compart-ment disc driveThe two rear-compartment screens can beoperated almost entirely independently fromone another. However, there can be a conflictin some menus if the two screens are usedsimultaneously.If the rear-compartment disc drive is beingused for both screens simultaneously, select-ing certain menus or settings on one of thescreens also affects the other screen.The following functions affect both screens:Rchanging playback optionsRselecting a track (from a track list or folder)Rusing the play, pause and stop functions276 Basic functionsRear Seat Entertainment System
Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrollingRcalling up the DVD menu and navigatingwithin itRsetting the language, subtitles and cameraangleRcalling up interactive DVD contentThe following functions affect only onescreen:Raudio and video functions as well as picturesettingsRswitching between full screen and themenuSwitching between operating modesWhen you exit an operating mode (e.g. audioCD mode), the current setting is saved. If youcall up this operating mode again later, thereare two possibilities:Rthe operating mode has been changed onthe other screen.Rthe operating mode has not been changed.In the first case, the operating mode appearsas it is on the other screen.In the second case, the setting appears on thescreen as it was when you last exited theoperating mode.Picture settingsOverviewYou can select the picture settings in TV,video DVD and AUX mode(Y page 295).Adjusting the brightness, contrast andcolourExample: TV mode:Brightness, contrast and colour;Picture formatsXSwitch on TV mode (Y page 283) or videoDVD mode (Y page 288).XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXWhile the navigation menu is shown, select(Y page 261)Menu and press the 9 buttonto confirm.XIn both cases, select TV or DVD-Videousing the :=; buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Brightness, Contrast or Colourusing the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.An adjustment scale appears.XSelect a setting using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.Changing the picture formatXTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXWhile the navigation menu is shown,select(Y page 261)Menu and press the 9button to confirm.Basic functions 277Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
XSelect TV or DVD-V usingthe :=; buttons and press the9 button to confirm.The dot in front of one of the menu items16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Widescreen indi-cates the format currently selected.XSelect a format using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.System settingsNoteYou can adjust almost all system settingsindividually for each screen without affectingthe other screen. You make these settingsusing the remote control(Y page 271).Selecting the display languageXSelect System using the 9=;buttons on the remote control and press9 to confirm.You see the system menu on the selectedrear screen.XSelect Settings using the : buttonand press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Language using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.The list of languages appears. A #dot indi-cates the current setting.XSelect a language using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.The Rear Seat Entertainment System acti-vates the selected language.Changing the display designXSelect Settings in the system menu usingthe : button on the remote control andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Day design, Night design orAutomatic using the 9: buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.The dot indicates the current setting.Design ExplanationDay design The display is set per-manently to daydesign.Night design The display is set per-manently to nightdesign.Automatic The display designchanges depending onthe vehicle instrumentcluster illumination.Setting the brightnessXSelect Settings in the system menu usingthe : button on the remote control andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Brightness using the 9:buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.A scale appears.XAdjust the brightness using the 9:buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.The brightness bar moves up or down. Thepicture becomes lighter or darker inaccordance with the scale.Hiding/showing the pictureXTo hide the picture: select Display offin the system menu using the :;buttons on the remote control and pressthe 9 button to confirm.The picture is hidden.278 System settingsRear Seat Entertainment System
XTo display the picture: press the 9 but-ton.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeImportant safety notesGWARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. Thereis a risk of injury.You must not open the casing. Always havemaintenance work and repairs carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.General notesYou will find information on the following top-ics in the Audio section:RNotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 227)RNotes on MP3 mode (Y page 225)RNotes on copyright (Y page 226)Inserting a CD/DVD:Disc slot;Disc eject buttonDepending on the vehicle model and equip-ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found:Rbehind the centre console in a folding com-partment, orRunder the rear bench seat, orRin the stowage box between the rear seats.The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. Ifthere is already a disc inserted, this must beejected before another is inserted.XInsert a disc into the disc slot.The printed side of the disc must faceupwards. If neither side of the disc is prin-ted, the side you wish to play must facedownwards.The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:Rif it has been inserted correctly and is apermissible disc, andRafter you have switched on disc mode(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)(Y page 280).Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loadedby the drive. Loading may take some time,depending on the number of folders andtracks.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 279Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD orMP3 modeExample: audio CD mode:Data medium type _;Track number=Track name (only if stored on the disc asCD text)?Track timeAGraphic time and track displayBCurrent playback settings (no symbol for"Normal track sequence")CTo set the bassDTo set the trebleEDisc name (if stored on the disc as CDtext)FTo call up the track listGPlayback optionsXInsert a CD/DVD (Y page 279).The Rear Seat Entertainment System loadsthe inserted disc.XSelect Disc in the menu using the9=; buttons on the remotecontrol and confirm by pressing the 9 but-ton.The corresponding mode is switched on.The Rear Seat Entertainment System playsthe disc.Example: audio DVD mode:Data medium type ü;Track number=Track name (if stored on the disc)?Track timeAGraphic time and track displayBCurrent playback settings (no symbol for"Normal track sequence")CTo set the bassDTo set the trebleEDisc name (if stored on the disc)FTo call up the track listGStop functionHPause functionIPlayback optionsExample: MP3 mode:Data medium type þ;Track number=Track name?Track timeAGraphic time and track display280 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeRear Seat Entertainment System
BCurrent playback settings (no symbol for"Normal track sequence")CTo set the bassDTo set the trebleEDisc name or current folderFTo call up the folder listGPlayback options, to switch track infor-mation on/offiVariable bit rates in MP3 tracks can resultin the elapsed time shown being differentto the actual elapsed time.Selecting a trackSelecting by skipping to a trackXTo skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the = or ; button onthe remote control.orXPress the E or F button.The skip forward function skips to the nexttrack.If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec-onds, the function skips back to the begin-ning of the track. If the elapsed time isshorter, it will skip to the start of the pre-vious track.If the Random tracks or Random folderplayback option has been selected, thetrack order is random.Selecting by track listIn audio CD mode, the track list contains alltracks on the disc currently playing.In audio DVD mode, the track list contains alltracks in the currently active group; see "Set-ting the audio format" (Y page 224).In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracksin the currently active folder as well as thefolder structure, allowing you to select anytrack on the MP3 CD.XSelect Track list (audio CD/DVD mode)or Folder (MP3 mode) usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol, and confirm by pressing the 9button.orXPress the 9 button when the display/selection window is active.The track list appears. The # dot indicatesthe current track.XSelect a track using the 9: buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.Making a selection by entering the tracknumber directlyXPress the h button on the remote con-trol.The track entry display appears.Example: track 2XPress number button 2.Example: track 12XPress the corresponding number keys inrapid succession.XWait for approximately three seconds aftermaking the entry.You will hear the track that has beenentered. The corresponding basic menuthen reappears.iIt is not possible to enter numbers thatexceed the number of tracks on the CD orin the currently active folder.Fast forward/rewindXWith the display/selection window active,press the = or ; button on theremote control repeatedly until you reachthe desired position.orXPress and hold the E or F buttonuntil the desired position is reached.Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 281Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Selecting a folderThis function is only available in MP3 mode.XSelect Folder in MP3 mode usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.orXPress the 9 button when the display/selection window is active.The folder content appears.:Folder selection symbol;Current folder name=Track symbolXTo switch to the superordinate folder:select symbol : using the 9: but-tons on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm.The display shows the next folder up.:Folder selection symbol;Folder symbolXSelect a folder using the 9: buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.You will see the tracks in the folder.XSelect a track using the 9: buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.The track is played and the correspondingfolder is now the active folder.Pause functionThis function is only available in audio DVDmode.XTo pause playback: select Ë usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.The Ì display changes to Ë.Stop functionThis function is only available in audio DVDmode.XTo interrupt playback: select É usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted.XTo stop playback: while playback is inter-rupted, select É again and press the9 button to confirm.Playback stops and returns to the begin-ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.XTo restart playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.Playback starts from the beginning of theDVD.282 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 modeRear Seat Entertainment System
Setting the audio formatFurther information on audio formats is avail-able in the "Audio" section (Y page 224).XSelect DVD-A using the :=;buttons on the remote control and press9 to confirm.XSelect Group using the 9: buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.The list of available audio formats appears.The # dot indicates the format currentlyselected.XSelect an audio format using the9: buttons and press the 9 buttonto confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the =or ; button.Playback optionsFurther information on playback options isavailable in the "Audio" section(Y page 225).XSelect CD, DVD-A or MP3 usingthe :=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.The options list appears. The # dot indi-cates the option currently selected.XSelect Normal track sequence, Random tracks or Random folder using the9: buttons and press the 9 buttonto confirm.The option is switched on. For all optionsexcept Normal track sequence, you willsee a corresponding display in the display/selection window.iIf you switch the data carrier which youare currently listening to, the Normal track sequence option is activated auto-matically. If an option is selected, itremains selected after the Rear Seat Enter-tainment System is switched on or off.Switching track information on/off(MP3 mode only)If the function is switched on, folder and tracknames are displayed.If the function is switched off, disc and filenames are displayed.XSelect MP3 using the :=; but-tons on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm.XSelect Display track informationusing the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status.TV modeGeneral notesFurther information on channel receptionquality can be found in the "Video" section(Y page 251).Switching to TV modeXSelect TV using the 9=; but-tons on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm.You see the last TV channel selected, pro-vided it can still be received.TV mode 283Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Showing/hiding the control menuControl menu displayed:Preset position of the selected TV channel;Selected TV channel=Current programme (digital TV receiveronly)?Next TV channel in the channel list (chan-nel name or number)AShowing the menuBPrevious TV channel in the channel list(channel name or number)XTo show: press the 9 or : buttonon the remote control.XTo hide: press the 9 or : button.orXAfter approximately eight seconds, themenu is automatically hidden.Showing/hiding the menuTV picture with menu:To call up the TV options menu;To call up the channel presets=Information on the current programme(only for digital TV channels)?To switch on teletextATo set the trebleBTo set the bassXTo show: press the 9 button on theremote control.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo hide: press the 9 button, selectFull screen and press the 9 button toconfirm.Selecting TV channelsSelecting channels using the controlmenuXPress the = or ; button on theremote control while the display window isactive.orXPress the E or F button.The TV tuner selects the previous or nextchannel from the alphabetical channel list.Setting channels via the channel pre-setsChannel presets284 TV modeRear Seat Entertainment System
XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Presets using the =; but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.The channel preset memory appears. The# dot indicates where the selected chan-nel is currently stored.XSelect a channel using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.orXPress a number button.Setting a channel from the channel listNotes on the channel list can be found in the"Video" section (Y page 252). Informationregarding COMAND Online also applies to theRear Seat Entertainment System.XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect TV using the =; buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Station list and press the 9button to confirm.The channel list appears. The # dot infront of a list entry indicates the currentlyselected channel. A number before the listentry shows the memory slot in the channelpresets.XSelect a channel using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.Selecting channels by entering thechannel and programme numberSeveral programmes can be transmitted onone channel with digital TV. You can thereforeenter a channel and the desired programmeon this channel.Only one programme can be transmitted ona channel with analogue TV. The programmeentry function therefore has no effect.XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XOption 1: select TV using the =;buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Channel entry and press the 9button to confirm.XOption 2: press the h button while theTV is playing.Irrespective of the option, an input barappears at the top of the screen.XTo set a channel: enter the channel num-ber using the number keys and press the9 button to confirm.orXPress and hold the number key until theentry line is hidden.The channel is set.iIf you have not entered a programmenumber, the first programme with ade-quate reception will be set for a digitalchannel.iYou can enter channels or programmesavailable in your country even if the recep-tion is currently not adequate.If you enter channels that are either notintended for or not allowed in your country,the Invalid channel number messageappears.TV mode 285Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Storing TV channelsStoring channels manuallyThere are ten preset positions available.XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu bypressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect Presets using the =; but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.The channel preset memory appears. The# dot indicates under which preset thecurrently selected channel is stored.XTo store a channel: select a preset usingthe 9: buttons and press and holdthe 9 button until you hear a tone.orXPress and hold a number button until youhear a tone.The TV picture then reappears.Storing channels automaticallyThis function automatically stores channelswith adequate reception in order of theirreception quality. Any channels stored man-ually in the preset memory will be lost.XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu bypressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect Presets using the =; but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Autostore and press the 9 buttonto confirm.The Rear Seat Entertainment Systemsearches for channels it can receive. Theavailable channels are automatically storedin the preset positions.Information about the current pro-grammeThis function is only available on digital TVchannels. If you are watching an analogue TVchannel, this menu cannot be selected.XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu bypressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect Info using the =; buttonsand press the 9 button to confirm.If the current TV channel provides the cor-responding information, this will be dis-played.iIt can take a few seconds for the infor-mation to be displayed.Displaying the current programme orprogramme previewThis function is only available on digital TVchannels. The programme preview is alsoreferred to as the electronic programmeguide (EPG).:Current TV channel;To display the programme preview=Current programme?Visual display of the elapsed programmetimeXTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu by286 TV modeRear Seat Entertainment System
pressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect TV using the =; buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Station list and press the 9button to confirm.The channel list appears. It shows the cur-rent programme on the digital TV channelswith adequate reception. The # dot infront of a list entry indicates the currentlyselected channel.:To display the current programme;The beginning and end of the programme=TV channel?Next programmeXTo show the programme preview: selectDisplay programme preview and pressthe 9 button to confirm.The channel list shows the channel's nextprogramme.XTo show the current programme: selectDisplay current programme and pressthe 9 button to confirm.XTo close the display: press the % but-ton.Basic TV settingsFixing the frequencyFurther information on this function is avail-able in the "Video" section (Y page 255).XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu bypressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect TV using the =; buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Channel fix and press the 9 but-ton to confirm.The function is switched on O or off ª,depending on the previous status. Whenthe function is switched on, FIX appears inthe display window.XTo exit the menu: press the =or ; button.Setting the reception regionFurther information on this function is avail-able in the "Video" section (Y page 256).XTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control or confirm Menu bypressing the 9 button while the controlmenu is shown.XSelect TV using the =; buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect TV standard and press the 9 but-ton to confirm.A list appears showing the receptionregions. The # dot in front of a list entryindicates the currently selected receptionarea or country.XSelect the reception area and press the9 button to confirm.A message appears to inform you that if thewrong country is set, correct reception willnot be possible.XSelect Yes or No and press the 9 buttonto confirm.If you select Yes, the Rear Seat Entertain-ment System switches the country.If you select No, the country list will appearagain.TV mode 287Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
TeletextSwitching teletext on/offXTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the control menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo switch on: select Teletext using the=; buttons and press the 9 buttonto confirm.The first teletext page is displayed.XTo switch off: press the % back button.Selecting a teletext pageXTo select a page directly: press the cor-responding number keys on the remotecontrol.XTo call up the previous/next page: pressthe 9 or : button.iYou can only enter pages that are permis-sible for teletext between 100 and 899.Dynamic teletext pageA dynamic teletext page consists of severalsubpages. The display automatically changesto the next page after a certain time.Video DVD modeImportant safety notesGWARNINGThe CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,invisible laser beams may be released. Theselaser beams may damage your retina. Thereis a risk of injury.You must not open the casing. Always havemaintenance work and repairs carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.General notesDVD playback conditionsYou may encounter playback problems whenplaying copied discs. There are a large varietyof discs, DVD authoring software, writingsoftware and writers available. This varietymeans that there is no guarantee that theRear Seat Entertainment System will be ableto play video DVDs that you have copied your-self.Other information can be found under Video(Y page 260). Information regardingCOMAND Online also applies to the Rear SeatEntertainment System.Function restrictionsDepending on the DVD, it is possible that cer-tain functions or actions described in thissection will be temporarily blocked or may notfunction at all. As soon as you try to activatethese functions or actions, you will see theK symbol in the display.Switching to video DVD modeXInsert a video DVD (Y page 279).The Rear Seat Entertainment System loadsthe disc.If disc mode was the last mode selected, itwill now be active.If it was not, switch on video DVD mode asdescribed in the following instructions.XSelect Disc in the menu using the9=; buttons on the remotecontrol and confirm by pressing the 9 but-ton.If the video DVD fulfils the playback criteria:the film either starts automatically or themenu saved on the DVD appears. If theDVD menu appears, you must start the filmmanually.XSelect the corresponding menu item in theDVD menu.288 Video DVD modeRear Seat Entertainment System
Showing/hiding the navigation menuControl menu:Data medium type;Current track=Current scene?Track timeATo show the menuXTo show: press the 9 or : buttonon the remote control.XTo hide: press the 9 or : button.orXWait for approximately 8 seconds.Showing/hiding the menuMenu system:Video DVD options;Pause function=Stop function?To set the trebleATo set the bassXTo show: press the 9 button on theremote control.orXSelect Menu while the navigation menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo hide: press the 9 button, selectFull screen and press the 9 button toconfirm.Fast forward/rewindXPress and hold the E or F button onthe remote control until the desired posi-tion has been reached.You see the navigation menu.Pause functionXTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the navigation menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo pause playback: select Ë and pressthe 9 button to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.The menu is hidden.Stop functionXTo show the menu: press the 9 buttonon the remote control.orXSelect Menu while the navigation menu isshown and press the 9 button to confirm.Video DVD mode 289Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
XTo interrupt playback: select É andpress the 9 button to confirm.The Ë display changes to Ì. Thevideo image is hidden.XTo continue playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted. The menu is hidden.XTo stop playback: while playback is inter-rupted, select É again and press the9 button to confirm.Playback stops and returns to the begin-ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.XTo restart playback: select Ì andpress the 9 button to confirm.Playback starts from the beginning of theDVD.Selecting a scene/chapterGeneral notesAlso observe the information on the videoDVD mode (Y page 262).Skipping forwards/backwardsXPress the = or ; button on theremote control.orXPress the E or F button.The navigation menu (Y page 261) appearsfor approximately eight seconds.Selecting a scene/chapter directlyThe examples illustrate how to select scene/chapter 5.XOption 1: while the film is playing, pressthe h button on the remote control.XPress the corresponding number key, suchas 5.XOption 2: while the film is playing, pressthe 9 button on the remote control andshow the menu.XSelect DVD-V and press the 9 button toconfirm.XSelect DVD functions and press the 9button to confirm.XSelect Scene selection and press the9 button to confirm.XSelect 5 using the 9 or : button andpress the 9 button to confirm.In both cases, playback will begin from the5th scene/chapter after a brief pause.Selecting a film/titleOption 1:XPress the 9 button on the remote controland show the menu.XSelect DVD-V and press the 9 button onthe remote control to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press the 9button to confirm.XSelect Title selection and press the9 button to confirm.XTo call up the selection list: press the9 button.XSelect a film/track.Option 2:290 Video DVD modeRear Seat Entertainment System
Example: selecting film 2XPress button 2.After a brief pause, the second film isplayed.DVD menuCalling up the DVD menuThe DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVDitself. It is structured in various ways accord-ing to the individual DVD and permits certainactions and settings.In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-ple, you can change the DVD language in theDVD menu.XPress the 9 button on the remote controland show the menu.XSelect DVD-V and press the 9 button onthe remote control to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press the 9button to confirm.XSelect Menu and press the 9 button toconfirm.The DVD menu appears.Selecting menu items in the DVD menuXSelect a menu item using the9:=; buttons on theremote control and press the 9 button toconfirm.A menu appears.XConfirm Select by pressing the 9 button.The Rear Seat Entertainment System car-ries out the action or shows a submenu.XIf available, additional options can now beselected.The Rear Seat Entertainment System thenswitches back to the DVD menu.iMenu items that cannot be selected areshown in grey.iDepending on the DVD, the menu items:Back (to the movie), Play,Stop, ., / or Go up may either notfunction at all or may not function at certainpoints in the DVD menu. To indicate this,the K symbol appears in the display.Stopping a film or skipping to the begin-ning or end of a sceneXSelect any menu item from the DVD menu.The menu appears.XTo stop the film: select the Stop menuitem and press the 9 button on the remotecontrol to confirm.XTo skip to the end of a scene: selectthe / menu item and press the 9 but-ton to confirm.XTo skip to the beginning of a scene:select the . menu item and press the9 button to confirm.Moving up one level in the DVD menuXShow the DVD menu.XPress the % back button on the remotecontrol or select the corresponding menuitem in the DVD menu.orXSelect any menu item in the DVD menu andpress W the COMAND controller to con-firm.XSelect Go up and press W to confirm.Video DVD mode 291Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Going back to the filmXPress the % back button repeatedlyuntil you see the film.orXSelect any menu item in the DVD menu andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect the Back (to the movie) menuitem in the menu and press the 9 buttonto confirm.Setting the audio formatThis function is not available on all DVDs. If itis available, you can set the audio languageor the audio format. The number of settingsis dependent on the DVD content. It may alsobe possible to access the settings from theDVD menu.XPress the 9 button on the remote controland show the menu.XSelect DVD-V and press the 9 button onthe remote control to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press the 9button to confirm.XSelect Audio language and press the 9button to confirm.A menu appears after a short while. The# dot in front of an entry indicates thecurrently selected language.XSelect a language using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the =or ; button.Subtitles and camera angleThese functions are not available on all DVDs.The number of subtitle languages and cameraangles available depends on the content ofthe DVD. It may also be possible to accessthe settings from the DVD menu.XPress the 9 button on the remote controland show the menu.XSelect DVD-V and press the 9 button onthe remote control to confirm.XSelect DVD functions and press the 9button to confirm.XSelect Subtitles or Camera angle andpress the 9 button to confirm.In both cases, a menu appears after a fewseconds. The # dot in front of an entryindicates the current setting.XSelect a setting using the 9: but-tons and press the 9 button to confirm.XTo exit the menu: press the =or ; button.Interactive contentDVDs may also contain interactive content(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you maybe able to influence events, for example, byselecting and triggering actions. The type andnumber of actions depend on the DVD.XSelect an action using the9;:= buttons on theremote control and press the 9 button toexecute it.A menu appears and the first entry,Select, is highlighted.XPress the 9 button.Active COMAND source modeSwitching the function on/off inCOMAND OnlineYou can transfer an audio or video sourceselected in COMAND Online to the Rear SeatEntertainment System. If you subsequentlyswitch modes in COMAND Online, the newsource will not be transmitted to the RearSeat Entertainment System.292 Active COMAND source modeRear Seat Entertainment System
XTo switch on the function in COMAND Online: switch to the desired audio modein COMAND Online, e.g. CD mode(Y page 218), or show the menu in videoDVD mode (Y page 261).XSelect the menu item at the bottom left,e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆand turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Active audio/video source in rear and press W to confirm.In the status bar at the top, you will see theheadphones symbol and the _ symbol forthe source that has been switched on.XTo switch off the function in COMAND Online: switch on the desired audio modein COMAND Online or show the menu invideo DVD mode.XSelect the menu item at the bottom left,e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆand turning cVd the COMAND controllerand press W to confirm.XSelect Rear audio/video off_ andpress W the COMAND controller to con-firm.Selecting an active COMAND sourcein the rear-compartment screenLoading the active COMAND sourceXSelect COMAND using the 9=;buttons on the remote control and press9 to confirm.The audio or video source selected inCOMAND Online is loaded in the Rear SeatEntertainment System.When the loading process is complete, theaudio or video source is set in the Rear SeatEntertainment System.If Rear audio/video off is activated inCOMAND, the COMAND is off or there is no active COMAND source messageappears.Active COMAND source mode 293Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
Audio CD modeExample: CD modeXTo select by skipping to a track: pressthe = or ; button.orXPress the E or F button.The skip forward function skips to the nexttrack.Skipping backwards restarts the currenttrack (if it has been playing for more thaneight seconds) or starts the previous track(if the current track has only been playingfor a shorter time).Additional setting option:RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 276)Audio DVD modeExample: audio DVD modeXTo skip to the next/previous group:press the : button on the remote con-trol.XHighlight with the = or ; or b orc button and press 9 to confirm.Additional setting option:RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 276)iInformation on groups can be found in the"Setting the audio format" section(Y page 224).MP3 modeExample: MP3 modeXTo select a track by skipping to a track: press the = or ; button onthe remote control.orXPress the E or F button.The skip forward function skips to the nexttrack.Skipping backwards restarts the currenttrack (if it has been playing for more thaneight seconds) or starts the previous track(if the current track has only been playingfor a shorter time).XTo select a folder: press the : buttonon the remote control.XHighlight one of the two folder symbolswith the = or ; button and press9 to confirm.Depending on your selection, the previousor next folder is selected and the first trackis played.294 Active COMAND source modeRear Seat Entertainment System
Additional setting option:RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 276)Video DVD modeExample: video DVD modeXTo hide a menu: confirm Menu with the9 button.The video image is played in full screenmode.Additional setting options:RAdjusting the brightness, contrast and col-our (Y page 277)RChanging the picture format (Y page 277)RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 276)AUX modeIntroductionYou can connect one external video source toeach of the displays of the Rear Seat Enter-tainment System (AUX display) and also oneexternal video source to the rear-compart-ment drive (AUX drive) with a sound and videosignal.Please see the corresponding operatinginstructions for information on how to oper-ate the external video source.For further details about external video sour-ces, please consult a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Connecting AUX equipmentAUX driveThe AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/DVD drive on the right next to the CD/DVDeject button (Y page 272).AUX displayThe AUX display jacks are on the side of thescreen (Y page 271).Audio and video connectionXInsert the audio plugs for the left and rightsignals into the corresponding L and Rjacks.XInsert the video plug into the V jack.Switching to AUX modeAUX driveXSelect Aux in the menu using the9=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.The AUX menu appears.AUX menuXSelect Source from the AUX menu andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Disc drive Aux and press the 9button to confirm.You will hear and see the content of theexternal video source if it is connected tothe CD/DVD drive and switched to play-AUX mode 295Rear Seat Entertainment SystemZ
back. If no video image is available from theAUX source connected, you will see anaudio menu.AUX displayXSelect a screen using the thumbwheel onthe remote control (Y page 271) until "LREAR" (left-hand screen) or "R REAR" (right-hand screen) is highlighted in the window.XSelect Aux in the menu using the9=; buttons on the remotecontrol and press the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Source from the AUX menu andpress the 9 button to confirm.XSelect Display Aux and press the 9 but-ton to confirm.You will see and hear the content of thevideo source if it is switched to playback. Ifno video image is available from the AUXsource connected, you will see an audiomenu.Setting treble and bassXSelect Treble or Bass in the AUX menuand press the 9 button on the remotecontrol to confirm.An adjustment scale appears.XSelect a setting using the 9 or :button and press the 9 button to confirm.Adjusting the brightness, contrast orcolourXSelect Display Aux or Disc Drive Auxin the AUX menu and press the 9 buttonto confirm.XSelect Brightness, Contrast or Colourand press the 9 button to confirm.An adjustment scale appears.XSelect a setting using the 9 or :button and press the 9 button to confirm.Changing the picture formatXSelect Display Aux or Disc Drive Auxin the AUX menu and press the 9 buttonto confirm.XSelect 16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Wide‐screen using the 9: buttons andpress the 9 button to confirm.The dot in front of a menu item indicatesthe current setting.296 AUX modeRear Seat Entertainment System
Publication detailsInternetFurther information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.daimler.comEditorial officeYou are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOwner's Manual to the technical documenta-tion team at the following address:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.As at 28.08.2012
Order no. 6515 6981 02 Part no. 172 584 54 81 Z102 Edition ÄJ 2013-1aÉ1725845481Z102dËÍ1725845481Z102Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

Navigation menu